Autodesk Factory Design Suite Learning Essentials

Chapter
Autodesk Factory Design Suite

Autodesk Factory Design Suite is a 2D/3D factory layout solution purpose-built to help you make better layout
decisions by enabling you to create a Digital Prototype of your factory. It provides tools for integrating 2D layout data
with 3D models of factory equipment, creating accurate factory models and 3D visual walkthroughs that help teams
collaborate effectively and make more informed decisions before any equipment is installed and commissioned on
the factory floor.
Core Products
Core products in the Suite include AutoCAD Architecture, Autodesk Navisworks, Autodesk Vault, and Autodesk
Inventor enhanced with the Autodesk Factory Design Utility that gives users a factory-specific parametric work
environment to better design, optimize, and visualize factory layouts.
Chapter1: Autodesk Factory Design Suite 1

AutoCAD Architecture
The most complex and intricate 3D Factory Layout designs begin as simple 2D facility drawings. The Autodesk Factory
Design Suite delivers state of the art 2D design capabilities by providing the most versatile and dynamic drawing
generation package in use today, AutoCAD.
AutoCAD Architecture is the initial 2D design component of the Autodesk Factory Suite. AutoCAD, as well as the DWG
file format, has served as the design and documentation standard for both buildings and factory components for over
25 years. The development of facility drawings is the primary focus of the initial element in the Autodesk Factory
Suite. Designers need a tool to easily layout and develop Walls, Windows, and other architectural elements as the
initial 2D design comes together.
AutoCAD Architecture provides you the flexibility to work in the traditional AutoCAD environment if required, or in
the AutoCAD Architectural workspace, where you have access to specific commands for Walls, Doors, Windows,
Beams, and many more Architectural design elements. These Architecturally specific commands provide productive
and efficient methods of creating facility layouts.
Fitting your new Factory Layout into an existing building offers several costly and counterproductive challenges.
Capturing the As Built state of an existing facility with 2D tape measurements is a tedious, time consuming, and
above all, error prone process.
The ability to utilize Laser Scan Point Clouds to record the As Built state of an existing facility reduces the amount of
time needed to document the design. These Point Clouds can be added to your 2D AutoCAD designs to facilitate
space reservations in context of the As Built State of the facility.
2 Chapter1: Autodesk Factory Design Suite

Generating Factory Layout proposals is by nature a costly process. Often, the Free Work necessary to submit
several proposals only results in a single contract. Factory Layout designers need a purpose built 2D and 3D solution
that allows them to quickly and efficiently produce Factory Layouts that communicate their design intent to everyone.
Autodesk Factory Design Suite extends the benefits of Digital Prototyping to the factory floor. Purpose built for
Machine Builders, System Integrators and Manufacturers, it helps you to make better layout decisions earlier in the
design process in order to meet tighter schedules, optimize your factory layout processes, and, above all, win more
business.
Autodesk Inventor Enhanced with the Factory Design Utilities

The nature of the Two Dimensional Factory Layout process requires a good deal of time and attention to numerous
details. The Autodesk Factory Design Suite helps factory layout users save hours of effort, so they can spend time
innovating rather than drafting. Users can take advantage of their existing layout data and expertise to build an
accurate digital model of the factory, quickly try multiple layout what if scenarios, and communicate the best
solution to stakeholders and partners.
Autodesk Inventor, enhanced with the Autodesk Factory Design Utility, gives users a factory-specific parametric work
environment to better design, optimize, and visualize factory layouts. Users can quickly grasp the simplified workflow
without expertise in 3D modeling practices.
The Autodesk Factory Design Utility introduces Inventor users to the floor concept. The customizable Floor provides
gravity, so anything placed on it will automatically land upright, eliminating the need to understand classic 3D
paradigms and figure out how to constrain and align components. Designers can easily leverage existing 2D layout
drawings, using them to paint reference lines on the Factory Floor.

The Factory Model is built by dragging and dropping 3D models of machines and other facility equipment directly on
the 2D layout from a library of commonly used Factory Assets. The Assets contain built-in connectors that allow them
to sense one another and snap together like building bricks. The Assets also contain built-in parameters that enable
easy modification to the basic asset design.
You can easily build and include your own 3D factory asset models in the layout. Any existing models, acquired from
various sources, can be used as Factory Assets. The Asset creation process simply requires designers to assign a
landing surface and connector points to the model. The Asset is then saved and available via the Asset Browser for
use in the Factory Layout.
Limited experience in 3D modeling is not a factor when using the Autodesk Factory Design Suite. Dedicated
commands make moving and orienting Factory Assets as easy as possible. Developing your Factory Layout becomes
as easy as moving pieces to the best strategic location on a game board. The process enables you to try multiple
what if scenarios until the best solution is found.
2D Layout Drawings are a necessary part of any proposal and Autodesk Inventor provides easy creation of Layout
Drawings. Plan Views, Section Views, Detail Views, and Bill of Materials are all created quickly and easily. The
drawing also maintains an associative relationship to the model, updating automatically when changes occur.
Digital Prototyping with Autodesk Factory Design Suite, combined with Autodesks leadership in Building Information
Modeling, uniquely positions Autodesk to deliver an integrated workflow that enables better productivity,
predictability, and control throughout the life of the project. This integrated workflow is changing the way
manufacturing and architectural companies think about their design practices and is helping companies build better
products faster, with greater confidence and fewer costs. Autodesk is the only company that can offer these solutions
in a way that is truly scalable, attainable, and cost effective for manufacturers, architects, engineers, and builders.

Navisworks
Validating your Factory Layout requires the comparison and analysis of multiple designs from various stakeholders.
Your Layout must interface with the Architectural Facility and the Manufacturing designs supplied by the System
Integrators or Factory Owners. Putting all this information into a single environment is often beyond the capabilities
of most software programs.
Navisworks enables Factory Layout Designers to visualize large complex Layouts with thousands of components such
as complete manufacturing facilities, factory floor layouts, production lines & industrial machinery, all in a single
digital model by means of real time flythrough and walk through. Customers can combine together CAD data from
various design systems regardless of file format or size, for complete Factory visualization and analysis.
Navisworks is compatible with all major native design and laser scan file formats. This means that 3D design data
from various CAD systems can be combined together to create a single digital model.
The ability to navigate the entire digital model is extremely important for quality assurance and the design review
process. Navisworks unique display ability allows models of any size to be loaded and combined with other models
to create designs beyond the capability of most CAD systems. Now there is no limit to the size and complexity of your
Factory Layout.
Navisworks allows users to build complex environments from smaller models by appending, or uniting, multiple
model files together. These smaller models can be loaded from any file type supported by Navisworks. Aggregation
of 3D data from different CAD systems brings together design, manufacturing, and plant & supplier data into a single
digital model. This allows all stakeholders to validate the design by visualizing it in 3D.
Navisworks is a unique technology for interactive visualization of any 3D design regardless of file type or size. The
application offers users smooth, real-time, flythrough & Walkthrough capabilities. Designers can now navigate and
explore even the largest and most complex models on standard computers. We can visualize complete 3D layouts of
manufacturing plants and factories consisting of the products, tooling, fixtures, machines, and plant layouts.

The ability to walk through an extensive digital design is just the beginning of the Navisworks interactive experience.
The Measuring tools enable detailed measurement of distance, area, and angles. User defined Cross Sections and
section planes, enable close inspection of all details. Designers can simulate the real-life experience and appearance
of manufacturing plants and factory layouts at any time in the installation process, so things go according to plan.
Material handling equipment can also be simulated moving across the factory floor. It is easy to see how the
Navisworks environment can quickly become your digital mockup.
Clash Detection
3D interferences are very common when you are bringing multiple models together for the first time. These
interferences must be discovered as quickly as possible to assure a quality design and reduce construction problems.
Navisworks enables the effective identification, inspection and reporting of interferences from the digital model with
a versatile set of Clash Detection tools. The digital model of factory layouts, work cells and production lines can be
inspected to detect potential issues such as equipment collisions and space restrictions. Navisworks also works with
laser scanned point clouds. Large volumes of point clouds can be imported into the digital environment to compare
the as built laser scan with the 3D model data.
Large designs often require input from various sources. Communicating the design intent to these sources is a crucial
factor in the design process. When design problems occur, stakeholders need a method to comment on the situation.
Navisworks provides a set of Redline tools that allow designers to markup any pre-established Viewpoint with text,
balloons, clouds, or geometry
Navisworks can publish the single digital model in high compressed, lightweight NDW and 3D DWF format for Free
viewing giving all stakeholders access to the complete manufacturing plant or factory layout.
You can share your digital design with all the members of your design team. If members of your team dont have
Navisworks, they can download Navisworks Freedom from Autodesk.com. Navisworks Freedom allows anyone to
view the NWD files created by Navisworks. Navisworks Freedom can also view Autodesk 3D Design Review files or 3D
DWF.

About this Course
This course is designed to cover the basic functions of the Autodesk Factory Design Suite. The Autodesk Factory
Design Suite consists of the following four applications:
Autodesk Inventor
The Autodesk Factory Design Utilities
Autodesk Navisworks.
The course does assume that the student has some basic knowledge of AutoCAD drawing practices, but a novice user
should be able to complete the course with the help of a qualified instructor. The course in not intended to provide
advanced and detailed instruction in any specific member application. For advanced training in AutoCAD
Architecture, Autodesk Inventor, or Autodesk Navisworks, please contact your local Autodesk support representative.
Class Setup
The Training files used for this course are located in the following directory.
C:/Autodesk Learning / Autodesk Factory Design Suite /

Chapter
Basics
In this chapter, you are introduced to basic concepts that will help you work effectively in
the AutoCAD Architecture component of the Factory Design Suite. You also learn how to
use the basic tools that make up the AutoCAD Architecture interface.
This course does not cover the advanced principles of AutoCAD Architecture. The primary
goal is to familiarize you with the basic functions and practices of the applications.
General familiarity with AutoCAD geometry creation is assumed, but a novice user should
be able to complete all exercises with the aid of a qualified instructor. For advanced
training on this application, please consult your Autodesk support representative.
Objectives
After completing this chapter, you will be able to:
Navigate the AutoCAD Architecture User Interface.
Understand the basic Concepts of AutoCAD Architecture.
Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics 1

Understanding the Concepts
What is AutoCAD Architecture 2010?
AutoCAD Architecture is a design and documentation system that supports the design,
drawings, and schedules required for a building project.
In the AutoCAD Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is
a presentation of information from the same underlying building model. As you work in
drawing and schedule views, AutoCAD Architecture collects information about the
building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the
project.
Designing with Objects

AutoCAD Architecture is an object-based CAD application. When you design in the
application, you draw from large collections of objects that represent real-world
architectural components, such as wall, doors, windows, stairs and roofs.
AutoCAD Architecture objects contain information that allows them to function like the
real-world components that they represent, to relate intelligently to one another, and to
display in a 2-dimensional (2D) or 3-dimensional (3D) context.
Understanding AutoCAD Architecture Terms

Many of the terms used to identify objects in AutoCAD Architecture are
common, industry-standard terms. However, some terms are unique to AutoCAD
Architecture. Understanding the following terms will help you to work effectively
in the software.
Project: In AutoCAD Architecture, the project is the single database of
information for your design. The project folder contains all information for the
building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes
components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the
design. By using a single project folder, AutoCAD Architecture makes it easy for
you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (such as
plan views, elevation views, section views, and schedules). Having one folder to
track also makes it easier to manage the project.
Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for
Level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use
levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for
each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first
floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a
section or elevation view.
2 Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics

Divisions: Divisions segment the building in the horizontal plane. A division might
be a wing of a building. By default, each new project in AutoCAD Architecture has
one division.
Constructs: Constructs are the main building blocks (or base drawing files) of the
building model. A construct represents one unique portion of a building, such as a
building core, an apartment, or an entire floor. You assign a construct to a level
and a division within the project.
Elements: An element is a generic building block for multiple uses. For example,
you can create an element for a typical bathroom layout and reference it multiple
times into one or more constructs.
Views: After the structure of the building project is defined and constructs are
assigned to levels and divisions, you can start to create view drawings. A view
drawing references a number of constructs to present a specific view of the
building project.
To create a view drawing, you first decide which portion of the building you wish
to look at and which type of view to generate. View drawings automatically
reference the appropriate constructs according to their level/division
assignments within the building.
Sheets: Sheets are the final output of a building design. Sheets are used to plot view
drawings of your building project. After you create the necessary model views, detail
views, and section/elevation views, you then drag the views onto the sheets to create
sheet views. Sheets are collected together to create a sheet set.
Working in the Product

AutoCAD Architecture is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft Windows
operating system. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows,
featuring a ribbon that contains the tools you use to complete tasks.
The AutoCAD Architecture interface is designed to simplify your workflow. With a few
clicks, you can change the interface to support the way that you work. For example,
you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the
interface. You can also display several project views at one time, or layer the views so
you see only the one on top.
Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the AutoCAD
Architecture product. Then experiment with hiding, showing, and rearranging
interface components to support the way you work.

Ribbon Overview
The ribbon displays automatically at the top of the work area when you create or
open a file. It provides a palette of all available tools. The ribbon is made up of tabs,
and each tab is divided into panels.
You can customize the ribbon by changing the order of the panels, or moving a panel
off the ribbon to the drawing area or your desktop. You can minimize the ribbon for
maximum use of the drawing area.
To move panels
1. Select a panel label and drag the panel to a new location on the ribbon.
2. Select a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon.
3. To return the panel to the ribbon, on the border of the floating panel, click
(Return Panels to Ribbon).
To minimize the ribbon

1. Click (Minimize) to the right of the ribbon tabs.
2. The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options:
Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon.

Minimize to Panel Titles: Shows tab and panel labels only.
Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels only.
Ribbon Tabs and Panels

TIP: When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides, you can
click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click
the other side to display a list of related tools.
Example of button
that can be
clicked on two
sides

The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain:
Ribbon Tab Includes commands for
Home Many of the tools you need to
create the building model.
Insert Tools to add and manage
secondary items such as raster
images, and CAD files.
Annotate Tools used for adding 2D
information to a design.
View Tools used for managing and
modifying the current view, and for
switching views.
Manage project and system parameters and
settings.
Extended Panels
A drop-down arrow next to a panel name ( ) indicates that you can expand the
panel to display additional tools and controls. By default, an expanded panel closes
automatically when you click another panel. To keep a panel expanded, click the
push pin ( ) in the bottom left corner of the expanded panel. A dialog-launcher
arrow near the bottom right of a panel ( ) opens a dialog.
Contextual Ribbon Tabs

When you execute certain commands or select an object, a special contextual ribbon
tab displays, that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context in which you
are working.
For example, when you select a door/window assembly, the Door/Window Assembly
contextual tab displays commands that are commonly used when working with
door/window assemblies.

The Application Menu
Click the application button ( ) to display the application menu. The application
menu provides access to many common file-related commands and also allows you to
manage your files using advanced commands such as Export and Publish.
You can perform the following actions on the application menu:
On the application menu to

click
select a template and
create a new drawing.
New
select a file to open.
Open
save the current file.
Save
save the current
Save As drawing with a new
name.
export the current
Export drawing.
print the current
Print drawing.
publish the current project.
Publish
transmit the current
Send drawing.
access tools to
Utilities maintain the current
drawing.
close the current drawing.
Close
Options set various AutoCAD Architecture options.

Using the Quick Access Toolbar
The Quick Access toolbar is located on the AutoCAD Architecture title bar and
contains the following items by default:
Quick Access Toolbar Item Description

creates a new drawing.
New
opens a file.
Open
saves the current drawing.
Save
cancels the last action.
Undo Displays list of all actions
taken during the session.
reverses the effects of the

Redo previous Undo command.
prints a drawing.
Print
opens the Project Browser.
Project Browser
opens the Project Navigator.
Project Navigator
To undo or redo a series of operations, click the drop-down to the right of the Undo
and Redo buttons. This displays the command history in a list. Starting with the
most recent command, you can select any number of previous commands to include
in the Undo or Redo operation.
The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Click at the right side of
the Quick Access toolbar, and then click Show Below the Ribbon to change the
display setting.
You can add an item to the Quick Access toolbar from the drop-down by clicking
More Commands and dragging the command from the Command List pane to the
Quick Access toolbar.

Project Browser
Use the Project Browser to create, copy, and switch between projects. On the left
side of the Project Browser, you can create new projects, browse existing projects,
and select the current project. On the right side of the Project Browser, an
embedded Internet Explorer allows you to browse your project home page.
To open the Project Browser, on the Quick Access toolbar, click (Project Browser).
To change the current project, double-click the name of a project in the left pane.
Project Navigator
After you select a project in the Project Browser, you use the Project Navigator to
create, edit, and manage the drawing and construction documentation files within
the project. Use the Project Navigator to create and open elements, constructs,
views, and sheets for the current project.
The Project Navigator has 4 tabs that correspond to the main phases of project creation:
The Project tab contains the project information, including the levels and divisions in the
building model.
The Constructs tab manages the construct and element drawings that make up the
building model.
The Views tab manages the drawings that contain views of the building model.
The Sheets tab organizes all the plotting sheets (created from referenced views) into a
single project sheet set.
To open the Project Navigator, in the Quick Access toolbar, click (Project Navigator).

Tools and Tool Palettes
AutoCAD Architecture includes a large inventory of tools organized into tool palettes.
Tools represent the individual objects you can add to a drawing. For example, there
are numerous tool palettes containing tools for design, such as tools for working with
walls, windows, and doors. There are also tool palettes containing documentation
tools, such as those for annotation and callouts.
To open the current tool palette, click Home tab > Build panel > Tools drop-
down > Design Tools.
To switch the active tool palette group, right-click the title bar of the currently
active tool palette group. On the context menu, select the tool palette group that
you want to display.
Controlling the Appearance of Palettes

Palettes, such as a tool palette or the Properties palettes, remain open as you
work in AutoCAD Architecture. You can control the behavior of a palette by using
techniques to hide, dock, or pin it.
You can hide a palette so that it becomes hidden when you move the cursor away
from it, leaving only the title bar visible. To automatically hide a palette, in the
title bar of the palette, click (Auto-hide). To temporarily redisplay a hidden

palette, move the cursor over the title bar.
To disable auto-hide, click (Auto-hide) again.
You can position palettes in the application window to make the best use of
your work area. A palette can be docked on the left or right side of your
workspace, or it can float (undocked).
To dock a palette, right-click the title bar of the palette, and select Allow
docking. Position the cursor over the title bar, and drag the palette to the
left or right side of the workspace. To undock a palette, drag the palette
from the edge of the workspace.

Properties Palette
The Properties palette provides a central location to view the properties of a selected
object. Use the Properties palette to view and change settings for the style,
dimensions, location, property set data, and other characteristics of an object.
If the Properties palette is not displayed when you

select an object, you can display it by clicking Home tab
> Build panel > Tools drop-down > Properties.
Drawing Window Status Bar

The drawing window status bar is located at the bottom of the drawing window.
It contains the following information about the current project and drawing:
Name of the current project.
Type (construct, element, view, or sheet) and name of the current drawing.
Active scale for the current drawing or viewport.
Display configuration of the current viewport or model space view.
Cut plane height.
Options at the far right of the drawing window status bar provide access to the
following functions: Surface Hatch Toggle, Layer Key Overrides, Isolate Objects,
AEC Project Standards, Autodesk Trusted DWG, and Manage Xrefs.
Command Line Window

The command line window is located under the drawing window status bar. You can
use it to enter a command by typing the command name. Some commands have
abbreviated names. For example, instead of entering line to start the LINE command,
you can enter l. To find a command, you can type a letter in the command window,
and press TAB to cycle through all the commands that begin with that letter. To
repeat a command, press the Up arrow to scroll through recent commands.

Application Status Bar
The application status bar is located under the command line window. It contains the
following information and tools when you drawing is open:
Coordinate values
Drawing tools
Quick properties
View tools
Navigation tools
Annotation tools
Workspace
Lock
Elevation
Clear screen
Style Manager
The Style Manager provides a central location where you can view and work with styles.
A style is a set of parameters that determines the appearance or function of an object in

AutoCAD Architecture. For example, a door style determines the type of door
represented in a drawing, such as single, double, bi-fold, or hinged. The door style also
determines the shape of the door, such as rectangular or arched, as well as default
frame dimensions, standard sizes, and display properties. You assign the same style to all
instances of an object that have the same characteristics. For example, you could assign
one door style to all the office doors in a building and another door style to all fire doors
in the building.
To access the Style Manager, click Manage tab > Style & Display panel > Style Manager.
Content Browser
The Content Browser is a library of tool catalogs that contain tools, tool palettes, and
tool packages. You can locate tools in the content browser either by searching or by
navigating through the tool catalogs.
You will use the Content Browser in several lessons in the tutorials to obtain tools that
you use to perform specific tasks.
To access the Content Browser, click Insert tab Content Panel Content Browser.

Chapter Summary
This chapter introduced the basic concepts that help you work effectively with the AutoCAD Architecture
component of the Factory Design Suite. You also learn how to use and navigate the AutoCAD
Architecture user interface.
Having completed this chapter, you can:
Navigate the AutoCAD Architecture User Interface.
Understand the basic Concepts of AutoCAD Architecture.

Chapter
Creating the Shell

AutoCAD Architecture allows designers to easily create a factory facility with simple, easy to use
commands. Special architectural commands are dedicated to creating Walls, Doors, and Slabs.
These elements can be created from scratch or applied to existing linework. This chapter will focus
on the process of creating the outer shell of the factory facility using architectural specific
commands.
Objectives
Create the shell walls from linework in a drawing.
Use two different techniques to create the structural grid.
Add curtain walls and an entrance to the shell.
Add a Slab to the design.
Chapter3: Creating the Shell 1

Lesson: Converting Linework to Shell Walls
In this lesson you will create the exterior building shell by converting 2D linework in an AutoCAD drawing
(DWG) to walls.
After you create the walls, you adjust their position, materials, and height to match the building design
requirements.
Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

2 Chapter3: Creating the Shell

Exercise: Converting Linework 3. With the walls selected, zoom in to the
top left corner of the floor plan.
to Shell Walls
The linework displays in the center of
In this exercise you create, the exterior building shell by the walls. Because the linework
represents the interior face of the
converting 2D linework in an AutoCAD drawing (DWG)
walls, you need to reposition the walls
to walls. so their exterior faces align with the
linework. Walls have a Justification
property that lets you control their
positioning.
The completed exercise
1. Open ACA_001_Linework.dwg.
2. Convert the exterior linework to walls

Turn off the visibility of the Conveyor layer.
On the Design tab of the Design tool
palette, right-click the Wall tool and click 4. Change the Wall Justification
Apply Tool Properties to Linework. On the Properties palette, under
Dimensions, for Justify, select Right
and press ESC.
Zoom to the drawing extents.
The walls are now right justified and

the linework, although still in the
drawing, is no longer visible because
the interior wall faces align with it.
Select the green polyline, which represents
the exterior face of the shell wall that you
want to create.
Press ENTER twice to retain linework in the

drawing so that you can check the position
of the walls that you create.

5. Turn off the visibility of the linework. 8. View the walls in 3D.
The original linework will be Select View panel View drop-down
preserved for later use in the Factory View, SW Isometric.
Layout process. Turn off the visibility Select Visual Styles drop-down
of the Walls-Exterior Layer and the Visual Styles, Realistic.
Walls Interior Layer.
6. Change the wall style to match the 9. Close the Drawing without saving.
design requirements.
Using the Select Similar command or a
window selection, select the shell
walls
On the Properties palette, under
General, for Style, select Stud-5.5
Brick-LOWER FLOOR.
Press ESC.
Zoom to the triangulated walls at the
top of the drawing.
The wall displays the multiple layers

of material specified in the new style.
However, to ensure that the shell
walls reach the roof, you need to
change the wall height.
7. Adjust the wall height.

Select all the walls in the drawing
On the Properties palette, under
Dimensions, for Base height, enter
15'.
Press ESC.

Lesson: Creating a Layout Grid
The Column Grid command can be used to easily create a structural grid for the factory building. The
command creates a regularly-spaced rectangular grid by default. Once the grid is inserted into the design, it
can be resized to suit any factory layout. After the grid is modified, the Column Bubble command is used to
easily annotate the grid lines.
Objectives
Create a default building grid for the factory layout.

Modify the column grid to suit existing building lines.
Label the building grid with bubbles.

Exercise: Creating a 3.

Place the grid.
If necessary, on the application status
Layout Grid bar, click Ortho Mode to turn it off.
Click Object Snap to turn it on.
Right-click Object Snap and select
In this exercise, you create a structural grid Intersection.
for the Factory Building. You create the Move the cursor to the middle of the
grid as a regularly-spaced rectangular grid, tick mark in the lower left corner of the
and then grip-edit it to create the irregular drawing, and when the Intersection
shape that the building requires. When Snap displays, select it.
you complete the grid, you use automatic The tick mark is located at the endpoint
labeling to place bubbles on the ends of extension of the lower wall and the
the grid lines. leftmost wall, and exists to aid you in
placement of the grid.
Press Enter twice.

A grid displays, but it is too small. You
can adjust the overall size of the grid, as
well as the individual bays by changing
the grid properties.
1. Open ACA_002_Gridwork.dwg.
2. Create a Structural Grid. 4. Resize the grid.

In the Design tab of the tool palette, Select the grid.
click the Column Grid tool. On the Properties palette, under
Dimensions:
o For X-Width, enter 185'.
o For Y-Depth, enter 95'.
Press ESC.
The grid is still not the correct size for
the building. Because the bays/grids
are set to regular spacing, the exact
dimensions of 185' x 95' cannot be
created.

5. Convert both X and Y directions of the Select the top right grid grip, drag it
grid to manual placement in order to over to align with the right vertical
edit the grid shell wall, and press ESC.
Select the grid, right-click and select X
Axis Layout Mode.
Press Enter.
After the layout mode is selected, you
can make selections on the command
line. By default, manual is the
selection made on the command line.
After you convert to manual, grips
display on each grid line endpoint.
Select the grid, right-click and select Y

Axis Layout Mode. 7. Manually add a horizontal grid line to
Press Enter the top of the grid.
Now you can edit the grid lines like On the application status bar, click
linework. Object Snap to turn it off.
Select the grid, right-click and select Y
axis Add Grid Line.
6. Grip edit the grid. Specify a point on the grid as shown.
Select the grid to display grips. Exact placement of the grid line is not
necessary, as you adjust the line in
subsequent steps.
Select the top left grid grip, and drag it

to the top endpoint of the left vertical
wall.
8. Automatically label grid lines with a
preloaded grid bubble block.
Select the grid, right-click and select
Label.
The X and Y axis both have tabs to
control how you can label both the
horizontal and vertical grids.

9. In the Column Grid Labeling dialog:
In the Y Labeling tab, under Labels,
click in the Number field in the first
line, enter A, and press ENTER.
The rest of the grid lines in the dialog
box are assigned letters
Under Bubble Parameters, select Left

and clear Right.
Under Extension, enter 10'.
Click the X Labeling tab.
On the X Labeling tab, under Labels
in the X - Direction, click in the
Number field in the first line, enter 1,
and press ENTER.
Under Bubble Parameters, select Top
and clear Bottom.
Under Extension, enter 10'.
Click OK.
10. Close the drawing without saving.

Lesson: Creating a Layout from Linework
It is a common practice to develop architectural elements from simple AutoCAD geometry. A custom
building grid can be easily created from primitive linework. In this exercise, you use linework in a common
sketch to create a complex building grid. The grid is used to create the 3D columns that support the roof.
Objectives
Convert common AutoCAD lines into a custom building grid.

Place columns on a building grid.
Label a building grid.

Exercise: Creating a 3. Create a Column on each node of the
grid.
Layout from Linework On the Design tab of the Design tool
palette, click the Column tool.
In this exercise, you use linework in a
sketch to create a more complex
building grid than the grid that you
created in the previous exercise. After
you create the grid, you attach
columns to the grid nodes. When the
grid is complete, you manually label
the grid lines.
Move the cursor over any one of the

grid intersections until a column and a
tooltip display.
Note: Do Not Click.
Press CTRL once to access the Add
columns to all nodes option. A red
circle displays wherever a column will
be placed.
1. Open ACA_003_Gridwork_Custom.dwg.
Zoom to the drawing extents.
2. Convert linework to a grid.

palette, right-click the Column Grid Click to place the columns.
tool and click Apply Tool Properties to Press Enter.
Linework.
Columns display at each node,
however, some grid nodes do not
require columns. For example, some
columns block the entrance of the
building.
Select the highlighted columns and
press DELETE.
Using a selection window, select the

drawing linework, and press ENTER.
Sub Step 3.
In the Command line, enter y, and
press ENTER.
Press ESC.

4. View the columns in 3D Select one of the Columns. In the
Click View panel View drop-down
View, SW Isometric. Context Ribbon, click (Select
Because the columns use the Standard Similar).
style, a generic column displays at All columns are selected.
each grid intersection.
On the Design tab of the Tool palette,
right-click Column Cover 12 x 12, and
click Apply Tool Properties to
Column.
Press ESC.
5. Change the style of the columns using

the Content Browser.
Click Home tab Build panel Tools
drop-down Content Browser.
6. Use the grid bubble tool to label each
line individually.
View, Top.
Right-click the Tool palette title bar,
and select Document.
On the Annotation tab of the
Document tool palette, click the
Column Bubble tool.
In the right pane of the Content

Browser, click the Design Tool Catalog
- Imperial.
In the left pane, click Structural
Members. Select the left endpoint of the top
In the right pane, click Next until you horizontal grid line.
locate the Column Cover 12 x 12 tool. In the Create Grid Bubble dialog:
On the lower-right corner of the o For the Label, enter A.
Column Cover 12 x 12 icon click the i- o Clear Apply at both ends of
gridline.
drop symbol . o Click OK.
Drag the tool onto the tool palette,
and when the dropper fills, release
the mouse button.
Close the Content Browser.

7. View the columns in 3D.
Select the left endpoint of the grid
line below the one that you just
labeled.
In the Create Grid Bubble dialog:
o For Label, verify that B
displays.
o Clear Apply at both ends of
gridline.
o Click Ok.
Continue to select grid line
endpoints to label the remaining
lines as shown.
Use a letter sequence on the
horizontal lines and a numeric
sequence on the vertical lines.
When you are finished, press ENTER.

Lesson: Creating a Curtain Wall
Curtain Walls are often part of a factory building design. As with all other architectural elements, curtain walls
are easily created using dedicated commands. Curtain walls can be created from scratch or applied to existing
walls or AutoCAD linework. This section will demonstrate the process of converting existing walls to
architectural curtain wall elements.
Objectives
Convert Existing Walls to Curtain Walls.

Trim Curtain Walls.
Modify Curtain Wall Styles.

Exercise: Creating a On the Command line:
Enter c and press ENTER.
Curtain Wall This option enables you to use the
center of the wall to justify the curtain
walls.
In this exercise, you convert some of the
walls that you created in a previous Enter y and press ENTER.
exercise to curtain walls.
Use this option to erase the layout
geometry (the walls used in the
conversion).
Press ESC, and zoom to the bumpout

to view the curtain walls.
The curtain walls may overlap or
display with a gap at the corner.
Trimming and Extending is often
necessary when you convert linework
or walls to curtain walls, or other
The completed exercise objects.
1. Open ACAD_004_Curtain_Wall.dwg.
2. Convert Walls to Curtain Walls.

palette, right-click the Curtain Wall
tool and click Apply Tool Properties to
3. Stretch the curtain walls.
Walls.
Extend the curtain walls, using the
grips, until the walls overlay as shown.
Select the walls in the bumpout on the

north side of the building and in the 4. Trim the right curtain wall.
corners of the left wing of the building Click Home tab Modify panel
as shown.
AEC Trim drop-down Trim.
Select the left curtain wall segment,
and press ENTER.
Select the top portion of the right
curtain wall segment.
Press ENTER.
The right segment is trimmed to the
left segment.
Press ENTER.

5. Trim the left curtain wall. 7. View the changes to the curtain wall in
Click Home tab Modify panel 3D.
Trim. Click View panel View drop-down
Select the right curtain wall segment, View, NE Isometric.
and press ENTER. Click Visual Styles drop-down
Select the top portion of the left Visual Styles, Realistic.
curtain wall segment, and press
ENTER
6. Modify the curtain wall style to match 8. Optional: Use same techniques to
design requirements. change the two corner conditions on the
Select the left curtain wall segment, curtain walls in the left wing of the
right-click, and click Edit Curtain Wall building.
Style.
Modify the Orientation to Horizontal,
shown by marker (1) in the following
image.
Modify the division type to Fixed
Number of Cells, shown by marker (2)
in the following image.
Modify the Number of cells to 5,
shown by marker (3) in the following
image.
Click OK.

Lesson: Creating an Entrance
Interior and exterior entrances are a fundamental architectural element of any factory design. Doors and
door/window assemblies can be placed anywhere along existing walls. The door/window assemblies
command creates an access door nested in a window assembly. Supporting styles for doors and
door/windows assemblies allow designers to create any size and mullion combination desired for simple or
complex access situations.
Objectives
Place Door/Window assemblies in existing walls.

Exercise: Creating an
Entrance
In this exercise, you create an entrance by On the right panel, click
adding two door and window assemblies (Design Tool Catalog Imperial).
to the building shell.
On the left panel, click Doors and
Windows, and then on the right
panel, click Door and Window
Assemblies as shown in the following
image.
1. Open ACA_005_Creating_Entrance.dwg.
Left Click and drag the Hinged Double
4 Inch Head Door and Window
2. Place two door/window assemblies. Assembly from the right panel into the
Zoom in to the highlighted area of the drawing.
drawing shown in the following image.
3. Place the door/window assembly.

On the Home Ribbon, select Content
Select the wall shown in the following
Browser on the Build Panel.
image

Set the Door Dimension Width to 9- 4. Modify the doors to swing outward.
0 in the Properties pallete. If required, select one of the doors,
and click the flip grip.
Place the Door 2 from the right hand

wall as shown in the following image.
Press ESC to clear your selection.
Enter 2 in the right hand input box
If required, repeat the previous steps
and hit ENTER.
to flip the swing of the other door.
The doors should swing to the outside
of the building as shown in the
following image.
Place a second Entrance Door 13

from the right hand wall as shown in
the following image. Enter 13 in the
right hand input box and hit ENTER.
5. View the door/window assemblies in 3D.

View, SW Isometric.
On the visual Style panel, set the
Visual Style to Realistic.
Zoom in to the door/window
assemblies.
Close the drawing without saving.

Lesson: Creating a Foundation Slab
In AutoCAD Architecture, a slab is a three-dimensional object with multiple edges. A slab style controls the
appearance of the slab, while a slab edge style controls the appearance of the slab edges.
To create the haunched edges of the foundation slab, a profile is applied to the slab edges in the slab edge style.
When you create the slab, this profile is extruded along the slab edges, creating the haunched appearance.
Objectives
Locate the haunched slab in the Content Catalog.

Create a haunched slab from existing AutoCAD linework.

Exercise: Creating a 3. Add the Haunch (6 inch slab) tool to the
Design tool palette.
Foundation Slab In the lower right corner of the
Haunch (6 inch slab) tool icon, click
In this exercise, you create a haunched (i-drop).
foundation slab for the factory building.
Because the Design tool palette does not Drag the tool onto the Design tool
contain a tool to create the haunched slab, you palette, and when the dropper icon
must import a haunched slab tool from the fills, release the mouse button.
Content Browser Close the Content Browser
4. Use the new slab tool to create the

foundation slab.
bar:
o Click Ortho Mode and Object
Snap to turn them on.
o Right-click Object Snap and
select Endpoint.
The completed exercise palette, click Haunch (6 inch slab).
1. Open ACA_006_Slab.dwg.
2. Search for the haunched slab tool in the

Content Browser.
Click Home tab Build panel Tools
Flyout Content Browser.
Trace the outer perimeter of the
building:
If necessary, turn off the all layers
except the original slab layer.
Move the cursor over the outer wall
endpoint as shown, and when the
endpoint displays, select it.
In the left pane, under Search, enter

haunch slab, and click GO. The search
results, which include a 6 inch haunch
slab tool, displayed in the right pane.
Moving in a clockwise direction,

continue to select the outer endpoints
of each wall segment.
When you select the final endpoint,
on the command line, enter c and
press ENTER

5. View the Slab in 3D.
View, SW Isometric.
Click Visual Styles drop-down
Visual Styles, Hidden.
To view the slab edges, on the
ViewCube, click .
Close the drawing without saving.

Chapter Summary
This chapter presented special architectural commands dedicated to creating Walls, Doors, and
Slabs. These elements could be created from scratch or applied to existing linework. This chapter
focused on the process of creating the outer shell of the factory facility using the architectural
specific commands.


Chapter
Creating Interior Features

Interior features such as interior walls, doors, and fixtures, are created using architectural specific
commands. Some commands such as walls and windows are located on the Design palette. Many
interior features such as restrooms and furniture are available in the Content Browser. This chapter
will demonstrate the process of converting existing AutoCAD linework to interior walls, and installing
interior access doors and restroom fixtures. The process of installing windows will be reviewed as
well.
Objectives
Create interior partition walls.
Place doors and windows in interior partition walls.
Layout a restroom created by partition walls.
Place furniture in the layout.
Chapter4: Creating Interior Features 1

Lesson: Creating Partition Walls
As with all architectural elements created with AutoCAD Architecture, partition walls can be created from scratch
or applied to existing AutoCAD linework. This lesson will demonstrate the process of converting existing AutoCAD
linework to interior partition walls.
Objectives
Draw a partition wall.

Convert existing AutoCAD linework to walls.
Modify the wall justification.
2 Chapter4: Creating Interior Features

Exercise: Creating 2. Draw a wall.
Partition Walls palette, click the Wall tool.
In this exercise, you create interior

partition walls on a building floor plan.
On the Properties palette:

o Under Dimensions, for Width,
enter 6''.
o For Justify, select Center.
1. Open ACA_007_Interior_Walls.dwg.
Zoom in to the upper left corner of
the floor plan.
Move the cursor to the lowest

horizontal interior wall in the image
below, and select the right endpoint
of the linework as shown.

bar:
o Click Ortho Mode and Object
Snap to turn them on.
Move the cursor to the left, select the
o Right-click Object Snap and
left endpoint of the linework, and
select Endpoint.
press ENTER.

3. Add another partition wall. 5. Select a different wall style.
Right-click in the drawing, and click Select a single interior wall.
Repeat WallADD. On the context Wall ribbon, click
Select the endpoint of the vertical line
as shown.
(Select Similar).
On the Properties palette, set the

Style setting to Stud-3.5 GWB-0.625
Each Side.
Move the cursor up, and select the

endpoint of the line as shown.
Press ESC.
6. Optional: View the interior walls in 3D.
7. Close the file without saving.

Press ENTER.
Note: Another quick way to add an
object to the drawing is to use the
Add Selected from the right-click
menu. This not only repeats the
command, but also uses the same
style and properties of the object that
you selected.
4. Create the remaining walls from existing

AutoCAD linework.
palette, right-click the Wall tool and
select Apply Tool Properties to
Linework.
Select the remaining interior walls.
Press ENTER twice.

Lesson: Placing Doors and Windows
Interior access doors are created with the architecturally specific Door command located on the design tool
palette. Exterior and Interior windows are created with the Window command also located on the design tool
palette. If a door encased in a window is needed, the Door/Window Assemblies command is used. This lesson
demonstrates the process of adding interior doors and windows to the factory facility.
Objectives
Add interior doors to existing walls.

Add interior windows to existing walls.

Exercise: Placing Doors 2.

Place the double doors.
and Windows palette, click the Door tool.
In this exercise, you will place doors and

windows in the interior partition walls on the
floor plan.

Under General, for Style select Hinged
Double Metal Frame in Plan.
Under Dimension, for Width, enter 6'.
Under Location, for Position along
wall, select Center.
1. Open the exercise drawing

ACA_008_Interior_Doors_Windows.dwg.
Zoom to the upper left portion of the
floor plan.
bar, click Dynamic Input to display
temporary dimensions as you place
doors and windows.

bar, click Osnap to turn it off.
Select the center of the wall as shown,
and when a centered door displays,
click to place it.
Press ENTER.

3. Place another door. 5. Place two double doors accessing the
Using the same technique, place conference room and the factory floor.
another door as shown. On the Design tab of the Design tool
palette, click the Door tool.
o Under General, for Style,
select Hinged Double Full
Lite.
enter 6'.
wall, select Offset/Center (depending
on the installation requirements).
Adjust the door swing direction if If necessary, for Automatic Offset,
necessary. enter 1'.
Place doors as shown, and press ESC.
Press ESC if necessary.
4. Place single doors.

palette, click the Door tool.
o Under General, for Style,
select Hinged Single
Metal Frame in Plan.
enter 3'.
o Under Position, select Offset.
o For Automatic Offset, enter
4.
Place the doors as shown in the
following image. 6. Place windows.
palette, click the Window tool.

Under Dimensions, for Width, enter
4'.
Press ESC. For Height, enter 6'.
wall, select Unconstrained.
For Vertical alignment, select Head.
For Head height, enter 7'.

Place three windows in the wall as
shown, and press ESC.
Exact placement is not necessary.
7. View the floor plan in 3D.
Close the Drawing without saving.
8. Change the display of the doors to open.

Autodesk Factory Design Suite enables
you to walk through the factory layout
and experience the facility before it is
constructed. To make navigation easier,
the doors should be displayed open
instead of closed.
Select a single door.

On the Properties Palette, click the
Display tab.
On the Display tab, set the value of
the Swing Angle to 90.
Press ENTER.

Lesson: Laying out a Restroom
The restroom fixtures that you place on the floor plan are contained in a single block. The block contains the fixtures
in a pre-constructed restroom layout, including accessories and stall partitions.
After you place the restroom layout, you modify it to better fit the floor plan. Because the restroom layout is a block,
you can explode it to edit its individual components.
Objectives
Convert an existing wall to a chase wall.

Insert a preset restroom from the Content Browser.
Explode and modify the restroom design.

Exercise: Laying out a
Restroom
In this exercise, you lay out a restroom.
You create a chase wall on the floor plan,
and then place fixtures, accessories, and
stall partitions on the floor plan.
3. Add a restroom layout to the design.

Open the Content Browser.
rest room, and click GO.
In the right pane, locate the Rest
Room (Women) tool. You may have to
click Next in the bottom right corner
to view more of your search results.
In the lower-right corner of the Rest
Room (Women) tool icon,
1. Open ACA_009_Restrooms.dwg. click (i-drop).
Drag the icon into the drawing
window.
2. Change a wall style to create a chase On the Insert dialog box, place a
wall. checkmark for Insertion point and
Select the wall in the following image. Rotation angle then click OK.
On the Properties palette, under Move the cursor over the endpoint of
General, for Style, select 12in Chase the wall as shown and click.
Wall Stud-3.5 GWB-0.625 Each Side,
and press ESC.
The chase wall divides the 2 rooms
that are intended for use as
restrooms. You want to lay out the
lower restroom, which is the womens
restroom.

Rotate the block into the correct
position as shown in the following
image and click.
6. Replace the lavatories.

Select the lavatories and counter top,
and press DELETE.
Open the Content Browser, search for
the Lavs (3) tool, and use i-drop to
drag it into the drawing window.
4. Explode the restroom layout.
On the Insert dialog box, click OK.
Explode the restroom layout block.
Move the cursor over the endpoint of
Select the restroom layout.
the stall wall as shown.
Click Home tab Modify panel
Explode.
5. Lengthen the stall wall:

Select the wall to display its grips.
Rotate the block into position and

click.
Explode the lavatory block and grip
edit the counter to the proper
position.
7. Optional: Using the techniques learned

On the application status bar, right- in this exercise, layout the mens
click Object Snap. restroom.
Click Wall Justification Line to turn it Tip: Use the following tips to complete
off, and click Perpendicular to turn it the restroom layouts.
on. Use the Content Browser to locate a
This allows you to snap to the face of mens restroom layout block.
the interior wall while lengthening the Before you explode the block, use the
stall wall. mirror command to create the
necessary layout orientation.
Select the bottom triangular cyan
lengthen grip. 8. Close the drawing without saving.
Click the face of the wall, and press
ESC.

Lesson: Placing Furniture
Thousands of furniture and accessories are available in the Content Browser. You place furniture on the floor plan
as a single multi-view block. Like an AutoCAD block, a multi-view block is an object that can combine two or more
objects to create a single object. Unlike an AutoCAD block, a multi-view block can have different representations
when viewed from alternate directions. This lesson demonstrates the process of placing furniture into an existing
floor plan.
The conference table in Plan view.
The conference table in a 3D view.
Objectives
Place furniture from the Content Browser into an existing floor plan.

Exercise: Placing 3.

Place the conference table.
Zoom to the large conference room on
Furniture the floor plan.
In this exercise, you place a conference

table and chairs on the floor plan as a
single multi-view block.
Move the cursor over the center of

the conference room and click to
insert the conference table as shown
1. Open ACA_010_Furniture.dwg.
Rotate the conference table into the
correct position and click to finish the
2. Browse for the Conference table. operation.
Click Home tab Build panel Tools Press ESC.
drop-down Content Browser.
In the right pane of the Content
Browser, click Design Tool Catalog - 4. View the conference table in 3D.
Imperial.
conference table, and click GO.
In the right pane, locate the Conf 16ft
- 16 Seat tool.
In the lower right corner of the Conf
16ft - 16 Seat tool, click (i-drop).
Drag the tool to the AutoCAD drawing
window and release the mouse
button.
On the Insert dialog box, click OK.
5. Optional: Search the Content Browser

for additional office furnishing and place
them on the floor plan.

Exercise: Challenge
Using the methods you have learned and
the extra tips in this section, convert the
linework in this drawing to a suitable
building shell.
1. Open ACA_013_Challenge.dwg.
2. Use the tips below to complete the

factory floor plan:
Exterior Wall Stud-5.5 Brick-LOWER
FLOOR 15. Base Height Right
Justified.
Interior Walls - Stud-3.5 GWB-0.625
Each Side Center Justified.
Convert existing grid lines to custom
grid.
Columns - 8" Steel Column w/ 12"x12"
Column Cover, available in the Content
Catalog.
Restroom - Use the 3 Lavs block from
the Content Catalog for the mens and
womens restrooms.
Insert an Overhead Coiling Industrial
rolling overhead door from the Content
Catalog.
Rolling Door Centered in the Wall at
each end of the facility - Door Size 12 x
12.
Doors to suit.
Use the images below to aid in the
completion of the challenge exercise.

This image shows the completed exercise viewed in 3D.
This image shows the finished office and restroom spaces in plan view.

Chapter Summary
This chapter presented the tools and recommended workflows for basic shape design. Using these
techniques, you can now create more complex 2D sketches at different locations on your part,
combine multiple 3D features to create various shapes, and modify those shapes at any time during
the design process.
Create interior partition walls.
Place doors and windows in interior partition walls.
Layout a restroom created by partition walls.
Place furniture in the layout.

Chapter
5
Autodesk Inventor
Getting Started
Autodesk Inventor has a context-sensitive user interface that provides you with the tools relevant
to the tasks being performed. A comprehensive online help and tutorial system provides you with
information to help you learn the application. This chapter introduces the tools and interface options
that you use on a constant basis.
This chapter also introduces fundamental of parametric part design concepts that enable you to
capture design intent and build intelligence into your designs.
Objectives
Identify the main user interface components that are common to all Autodesk Inventor design
environments and describe how to access different tools.
View all aspects of your design by efficiently navigating around in 2D and 3D space.
Describe the characteristics and benefits of a parametric part model.
1
Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface
This lesson describes the application interface. You are introduced to the different file types (part,
assembly, presentation, and drawing) you work with as you create and document your designs,
and you examine the common user interface elements and view management tools in these
environments.
As with all computer applications, the User Interface (UI) is what you use to interact with the program.
While the Autodesk Inventor UI shares many common themes and elements with other Microsoft
Windows applications, it also has some unique elements and functionalities that may be new to you,
even as an experienced CAD user.
In the following illustration, the Autodesk Inventor User Interface is shown.
Objectives
Describe the multiple environments within Autodesk Inventor.
Describe what project files are used for.
Describe the types of files Autodesk Inventor creates and the kinds of information they store.
Identify the major components of the Autodesk Inventor user interface.
Identify the browser and panel bar in the assembly, part, presentation, and drawing
environments.
Identify and access various types of online help and tutorial resources.
2 Chapter 5: Autodesk Inventor Getting Started

About Multiple Environments
In order to provide the greatest design flexibility and reuse, each part, assembly, and drawing is stored
in a separate file. Each part file is a stand-alone entity that can be used in different assembly files and
drawing files. When you make a change to a part, the change is evident in each assembly or drawing
that references that part. Assembly files can be referenced by other assembly files, presentation files,
and drawing files. IDW and DWG files are now interchangeable. Depending on your workflow and
need for use in downstream applications, you can create your production drawings with either file
format.
The basic file references that exist in a typical 3D design are represented in the following illustration.
Assembly files: IAM files reference part files and are referenced by drawing files.
Part files: IPT files are referenced by assembly files and drawing files.
Drawing files: DWG files reference assembly files and part files.
Inventor Drawing files: IDW files are interchangeable with DWG files in Inventor and
reference assembly and part files.
Using Template Files

Template files serve as the basis for all new files that you create. When you begin a file from a
template file, you can control default settings such as units, snap spacing, and default tolerances in
the new file.
The application offers template files for each type of file. Template files are categorized into two
main groups: English for English units (inches and feet), and Metric for metric units (millimeters and
meters).
The New File dialog box has three tabs: Default, English, and Metric. The Default tab presents
templates based on the default unit that you select during installation, while the English and Metric
tabs present template files in their respective units.
Autodesk Factory Design Suite provides a special template for the creation of Factory Layouts .
Chapter 5: Autodesk Inventor Getting Started 3

Part Modeling Environment
In the part modeling environment:
You create and edit 3D part models.
The interface adjusts automatically to present tools for your current task, for example, tools for
sketching or tools to create 3D features.
The following illustration shows the user interface in the part modeling environment.
Assembly Modeling Environment

In the assembly modeling environment:
You build and edit 3D assembly models. The components displayed in the system are references to
external parts and subassemblies.
You use assembly specific tools to position and build relationships between components.
A common set of viewing tools is available.
The following illustration shows the user interface in the assembly modeling environment.

Presentation Environment
In the presentation environment:
You create exploded assembly views.
You can record an animation of an exploded view to help document your assembly.
The presentation file references an existing assembly.
A common set of viewing tools is available.
The following illustration shows the user interface in the presentation environment.
Drawing Environment
In the drawing environment:
You create 2D drawings of parts and assemblies.
A drawing file references one or more parts, assemblies, or presentation files. Changes to the part
or assembly model update the associated drawing views and annotations.
The following illustration shows the user interface in the drawing environment.

About Project Files
As you create designs in Autodesk Inventor, file dependencies are created between files of different
types. For example, when you create a 3D assembly, a file dependency between the assembly and its
part models is created. As your designs grow in complexity, these dependencies can become more
complicated. Autodesk Inventor utilizes project files to locate the required files as they are needed.
As a result of using the information contained in the project file, when you open that 3D assembly,
Autodesk Inventor can locate the 3D part files and display them properly.
In the context of an introduction to the Autodesk Inventor user interface, all that is important to
realize is that you must have an active project before you create any files. This is why the project file is
listed in the New File dialog box. Autodesk Inventor installs several sample project files, but the default
project is initially active.
Inventor File Types

To maximize performance, Autodesk Inventor uses different file types for each type of file. Assembly
files are stored in a different type of file than the parts that are used to create them. 2D drawing
information can be stored in either the IDW file type that is unique to Autodesk Inventor, or the DWG
format that is native to AutoCAD and is an accepted industry standard.
In the following illustration, the New File dialog box illustrates the different types of files that you can
create with Autodesk Inventor.

Part Files
Part files (*.ipt) represent the foundation of all designs using Autodesk Inventor. You use the
part file to describe the individual parts that make up an assembly.
Assembly Files
Assembly (*.iam) files consist of multiple part files assembled in a single file to represent your
assembly. You use assembly constraints to constrain all the parts to each other. The assembly
file contains references to all of its component files.
Presentation Files
You use presentation files (*.ipn) to create exploded views of the assembly. It is also possible
to animate the exploded views to simulate how the assembly should be put together or taken
apart.

Drawing Files
You use drawing files (*.idw) to create the necessary 2D documentation of your design.
Drawing files include dimensions, annotations, and views required for manufacturing. When
you use a drawing file to create 2D views of an existing 3D model, the views are associative to
the 3D model, and changes in model geometry are reflected in the drawing automatically. You
can also use drawing files to create simple 2D drawings in much the same way that you use
other 2D drawing programs.
Inventor drawing files can also be stored in the standard DWG format. If you use this format
for your 2D drawings, they can be opened and saved in AutoCAD. This is a very useful option
for users who must share their design data with others who use AutoCAD.

User Interface
All environments share a common layout for tabs on a single toolbar across the top of the
application window called the ribbon. The ribbon contains tools and commands for specific
tasks on separate tabs. Each environment, assembly, part, or drawing for example, displays tabs
and tools specific to that environment. As you change tasks within a single environment, the
ribbon adjusts to present the appropriate tabs and tools.
The following illustration shows the major components of the Autodesk Inventor user
interface. The ribbon and tabs are displayed at the top of the application window.
Application Menu
Quick Access Toolbar
Ribbon
Ribbon Tabs
ViewCube
Navigation Bar
Browser
3D Indicator
Graphics Window

Interface Structure
Autodesk Inventor uses a standard structure common in all Microsoft Windows applications. The
structure is context-sensitive based on the environment and mode you are using.
As you are learning the application more thoroughly, you should take the time to familiarize yourself
with the different options that are displayed on the ribbon in different work environments.
The following illustration shows the Assemble tab in the assembly modeling environment.
The following illustration shows the Model tab in the part modeling environment.
The following illustration shows the Place Views tab in the drawing environment.

Quick Access Toolbar
By default, a single Inventor standard toolbar is displayed in all environments and is called the
Quick Access toolbar. When you change between environments, the Quick Access toolbar
updates to present valid tools for the environment. The toolbar contains tools for file
handling, settings, view manipulation, and model or document appearance.
A section of the Quick Access toolbar is displayed in the following illustration. It is organized
into groups based on functionality. This area of the toolbar displays tools for standard file
and modeling operations.
Standard file management tools

Undo and Redo
Environment navigation
Update document
Selection filters
Color List
Design Doctor

Context-Sensitive Tools
As you switch between environments or between tasks in a single environment, Autodesk Inventor
displays the appropriate tools and information for the current task. The ribbon automatically
presents tabs and tools for the current task. The browser displays information on the active
environment.
The ribbon is your primary interface for accessing the tools available while you design. The
context-sensitive design presents the relevant tools based on the current context of your design
session. For example, when you switch from assembly modeling to part modeling, the ribbon
switches automatically to display the correct tabs and tools for the context where you work.
The browser is one of the main interface components. It is context-sensitive with the environment
you use. For example, when you work on an assembly you use the browser to present information
specific to the assembly environment. While you use the part modeling environment, the browser
displays information that is relevant to part modeling.
Model Tab
When you are in the part modeling environment, the Model tab is displayed while you create and edit
part models. You use these tools to create parametric features on the part.

Sketch Tab
You use the Sketch tab in the modeling environment to create 2D parametric sketches, dimensions,
and constraints. You use the same set of tools on the Assemble tab when creating a sketch in the
assembly environment.
Part Modeling Browser

The browser displays all features you use to create the part. The features are listed in the order
in which they are created. The browser also displays the Origin folder at the top of the list which
contains the default X, Y, and Z planes, axes, and center point.
Assembly Modeling Environment

When you are in the assembly modeling environment, the browser displays all the parts you use in
the assembly. It also lists the Origin folder containing the default X, Y, and Z planes, axes, and center
point of the assembly.
If applied, nested under each part, you see the assembly constraints. If you select an assembly
constraint, an edit box is displayed at the bottom of the browser, enabling you to edit the offset or
angle value for the constraint.

In the assembly environment, you can use the Modeling View option in the Assembly
View drop-down list to display the part features nested under the parts instead of the
assembly constraints. This is useful when performing part modeling functions in the
context of the assembly.
In the following illustration, the Assemble tab is shown in the default Normal mode. In Normal mode,
the tool icons and names are displayed.
You can also choose to display tool icons without text by right-clicking anywhere on the
ribbon and then clicking Ribbon Appearance > Text Off.

Design Accelerator
Clicking on the ribbon, Design tab displays the Design Accelerator tools.
Presentation Tab
When you are in the presentation environment, you use the Presentation tab to create presentation
views and tweaks, and to animate geometry in the presentation environment.
Presentation Browser
The browser displays the presentation views you create followed by the tweaks you use for the
explosion. When you expand each tweak, you see the parts included in that tweak. You can also
switch the browser mode from Tweak View to Sequence View or Assembly View.

Drawing Environment
In the drawing environment, the browser displays the Drawing Resources folder containing sheet
formats, borders, title blocks, and sketched symbols. It also displays each sheet in the drawing along
with the views you create for each.
You use the Place Views tab in the drawing environment to create drawing views on the sheet.
You use the Annotate tab in the drawing environment to add reference dimensions and other
annotation objects.

Keyboard Shortcuts
You can use keyboard shortcuts to access and begin tools and commands. For example, you can enter
P for Place Component, or N for Create Component. Entering the keyboard shortcut is the same as
clicking the tool on the tabs. When you hover the mouse over a tool on the ribbon, the tooltip will
expand to reveal information about the tool. The keyboard shortcut (1) will be listed as shown in the
following illustration.
Access Shortcut Keys List

You can access a complete list of the default shortcut keys from the Help menu.
In the Info Center, click the arrow next to the Help icon > Shortcut/Alias Quick
Reference
Condensed Ribbon
As you become more familiar with the tools in each environment, you can condense the ribbon by
choosing to display tool icons without text. To switch, right-click anywhere on the ribbon and click
Ribbon Appearance > Text Off. Clear the check mark to display icon text. In this mode, tools are
displayed with icons only resulting in more area for the browser and graphics windows.

Alternative Ribbon and Browser Positions
In addition to the default positions, you can alter the location of the ribbon or browser by clicking and
dragging the horizontal bars near the top of the element, or the title area when the element is floating.
Both the ribbon and browser can be placed in a docked position on the left or right side of the screen,
or in a floating position anywhere in the graphics window.

Online Help and Tutorials
Autodesk Inventor offers several types of online help, tutorial references, and other resources to assist
in building your skill level. Standard Help files, context-sensitive how-to presentations, Show Me
animations, and tutorials are available.
Autodesk Factory Design Suite also offers factory specific help, available on the Factory ribbon. The
Factory Design Help is shown in lower image.

Setting Your User Type
The initial Help screen enables you to specify the user type that most closely matches your situation.
The topics that are most relevant to the user type that you select are presented first on the initial
help screen. By default, the option to Show Help on startup is enabled. This causes the Inventor Help
system to launch each time you start Inventor and create a new file or open an existing file.
To access the Inventor Help System, press F1 or click Help menu > Help Topics.
Help for Returning and New Users

Returning and new users can find links to Help information that is most relevant for them.

Help for AutoCAD Users
AutoCAD users can use the Help topics designed specifically for them as they make the transition to
Autodesk Inventor.
Shortcut/Alias Quick Reference

The Shortcut/Alias Quick Reference shows all of the default Shortcut/Alias keys along with the
command names they execute.
Click Help menu > Shortcut/Alias Quick Reference to access the reference.

Show Me Animations
The Show Me animations present topic-specific information in animated presentations.
To access the Show Me animations, on the Info Center, click Help > Help Topics and select the Show
Me Animations link. In the Show Me Animations dialog box, navigate to the topic of choice and the
animation begins automatically.
Inventor Tutorials
There are several tutorials available that cover a range of topics from Level 1 to Level 3. Click the tabs
along the top of the page to view the tutorials for each level. On each tab, panels display tutorial titles
and descriptions. From the main list of tutorials, select the topic of interest. The tutorials present step-
by-step information on performing tasks in Autodesk Inventor.
You access these tutorials by clicking Help menu > Learning Tools > Tutorials, or by clicking Try It
Tutorials on the main Help screen.
Factory Design Suite Tutorials

There are several Factory Design tutorials available that cover the initial processes and practices of the
Autodesk Factory Design Suite. These tutorials are access on the Factory Ribbon > Learn About
Factory Panel > First Experience Videos.

In the following illustration, the Introduction to the Ribbon Interface page of the Autodesk Inventor
tutorial is displayed.

Exercise:
Explore the Autodesk Inventor
User Interface
In this exercise, you explore the Autodesk Inventor

user interface for assembly, part modeling, and
drawing environments.
Exercise Setup
Before you can complete the exercises for the
Autodesk Factory Design course, you must activate
the Learning Autodesk Factory Design Suite project
file.
1. Start Autodesk Inventor. If Autodesk Inventor
is already running, close all files.
2. Click Get Started tab > Launch panel > Projects.

If Learning Autodesk Factory Design
Suite is displayed in the project list,
double-click to make it active. A check
mark appears next to the active project.
If Learning Autodesk Factory Design is not
in the list, click Browse.
Navigate to the installation folder of
your student dataset files. By default,
this location is C:\Autodesk
Learning\Autodesk Factory Design
Suite\Learning.
Double-click Learning Autodesk Factory
Design Suite.ipj. A check mark appears next
to the
active project.
Click Done.
3. End of exercise setup. Continue to the exercise.

Explore the Autodesk Inventor User Interface 4. To activate a part in the context of
the assembly:
1. Open Inv-001_Getting_Started.iam.
Because this is an assembly file, notice the In the browser, collapse the
2. INV_001_Conveyor_Line:1
specific assembly modeling tools on the
ribbon. In the browser, notice the subassembly node.
appearance of both assembly files (1) and Double-click
part files (2). When assembly files are INV_001_Conveyor_Line:2
referenced in other assemblies, they are Notice the change in appearance in the
commonly referred to as subassemblies. browser, graphics window, and ribbon.
In the browser, the area listing inactive
components and subassemblies has a
gray background. The ribbon changes to
display tools specific to part modeling,
and in the graphics window, all inactive
components become transparent leaving
only the active part opaque in color.
3. In the browser, expand the

INV_001_Conveyor_Line:1 subassembly to
view its referenced parts (1) and assembly
constraints (2).
5. To return to the assembly, on the ribbon,

click Return. Note: You could also double-
click the assembly in the browser to return.

6. To open a part in its own window:
In the browser, expand
INV_Conveyor_Line_001 assembly and
right-click the Straight Belt Conveyor:1
part. Click Open. The part opens in a
separate window and any changes made
to the part are reflected in the assembly.
8. To exit the sketch, on the ribbon, click Finish

Sketch.
9. Close the part file and return to the assembly. If
you are prompted to save changes, click No.
10. To open an Inventor drawing file:
On the Quick Access toolbar, click Open.
In the Open dialog box, select
INV_001_Getting_Started.dwg and click
Open.
The ribbon updates to show drawing
related tasks and tools.
7. To activate the sketch environment:

In the browser, expand the Rail1 part
feature.
Double-click Sketch1.
The browser background color changes to
indicate the active sketch, the part features are
rolled-back and the graphics window displays
the sketch geometry.

11. In the browser, expand the Drawing Resources
node and View1: INV_Getting Started.iam
node to reveal the nested resources, views,
and assembly references.
12. To explore the Help System resources:

Press F1.
If you are an experienced AutoCAD user,
click the option for Users Transitioning from
AutoCAD and explore the Help resources
that are tailored for these users.
If you are new to Inventor and do not have
AutoCAD experience, click the option for
Returning / New Inventor Users and explore
the Help resources that are tailored for
these users.
Return to the Factory Assembly and review
the Factory Specific Help available on the
Factory Ribbon.
13. Close the Help windows.
14. Close all files. Do not save.

Lesson: View Manipulation
This lesson describes the use of the various view manipulation tools in the modeling and drawing
environments.
You view all aspects of your 3D geometry by navigating around in 3D space. The view manipulation
tools enable you to quickly perform these tasks in a manner that is intuitive and efficient.
In the following illustration, a constrained orbit is used to rotate the assembly and change the view
orientation. The ViewCube, in the upper right corner of the graphics window, is shown with the
compass displayed. The ViewCube rotates with the model and aids in the orientation of the model.
Objectives
Identify the tools that are available in the graphics window.
Explain the behavior of the Free Orbit and Constrained Orbit tools.
Explain the ViewCube options and how to access them.
Describe how the ViewCube can be used to view part and assembly models and how to customize
its appearance and behavior options.
Explain the steps to define and restore the home view.
Describe how to use various tools to restore previous views.
Lesson: View Manipulation 33

About the Graphics Window
Your 3D part and assembly models, presentations, and drawings are displayed in the graphics window.
Many tools are available to manipulate the view and appearance of your model in the graphics
window.
Viewing Tools
View manipulation is a key 2D drawing and 3D modeling skill. You are often required to view different
areas of a design, and changing your view can help you visualize solutions for the current task. Many
of the view manipulation tools are common to all environments.
34 Chapter 1: Getting Started

The following illustration shows the view manipulation tools that are available on the Navigation bar.
Navigation Bar Zoom Options Orbit Options
ViewCube
SteeringWheel
Pan
View Face
Zoom All
Free Orbit
You have different view manipulation tools available to you depending on how you want to change
where you are viewing and to what magnification. To efficiently change your view to see exactly what
you want or need to see, you need to know what view manipulation tools are available to you and how
to use them.
Icon View Tool Description
ViewCube In the 3D environment the ViewCube tool displays as a default

in the graphics window, enabling you to reorient your view of
the model. In the 2D environment the ViewCube enables the
definition of view orientations for a drawing view.
Free Orbit Enables you to freely rotate the view of your model on screen.

Icon View Tool Description
Constrained Constrained Orbit enables you to rotate around the vertical axis of
Orbit a model in a manner similar to the rotation of a turntable.
SteeringWheel The SteeringWheel tool is designed to be a common tool for

multiple Autodesk products. The SteeringWheel tool was
implemented to provide many different levels and types of control
over model and drawing navigation.
You can use the mouse to accomplish most pan and zoom tasks.
Roll the mouse wheel to zoom at the cursor location.
Click and drag the mouse wheel to pan.
Shift+click and drag the mouse wheel to free orbit.
Double-click the mouse wheel to zoom all.
Display Modes
This area of the toolbar displays appearance-related tools for controlling the appearance of your
model. Select a render style from the list to change the color and texture of your model.
Toggle the section views which graphically slice portions of an assembly so that you can visualize
other features.
Toggle between Orthographic and Perspective display modes.
Toggle between Shaded, Shaded with Hidden Edge and Wireframe displays.
Toggle between No Shadow, Ground Shadow, and X-Ray Shadow display modes.
In an assembly file, toggle between Transparency On and Transparency Off display modes.
Select a color/material to assign to a component.

3D Indicator
While using the assembly, part modeling, and presentation environments, the 3D Indicator is displayed
in the lower-left area of the graphics window. The Indicator displays your current view orientation in
relation to the X, Y, and Z axes of the coordinate system.
The 3D Indicator is positioned below and to the left of the assembly in this illustration.
Red: X-axis
Green: Y-axis
Blue: Z-axis

Orbit Tools
You have two options to rotate the views of models and assemblies. The Free Orbit tool is used to
rotate the model freely in screen space, while the Constrained Orbit tool is used to rotate the model
about axes in model space.
In the following illustration, the functionality of the Constrained Orbit tool is compared to that of a
globe. As you rotate a globe about the north-south axis, the angle at which you view the globe does
not change. The Constrained Orbit tool is similar in behavior.
Access
Free Orbit
Navigation Bar: Free Orbit
Ribbon: View tab > Navigate panel

Access
Constrained Orbit
Navigation Bar: Constrained Orbit
Ribbon: View tab > Navigate panel

Free Orbit
The Free Orbit tool enables you to dynamically change your view of the model. It is important to
remember that the model does not move, you change your viewing position with the Rotate tool.
The following illustration outlines the rotation modes available. The cursor provides feedback on the
rotation mode available. You click and drag to rotate the view and you can set the center of rotation by
clicking a location on the model.
Click and drag here to rotate the view about all axes.
Click and drag here to rotate the view about a vertical axis.
Click and drag here to rotate the view about a horizontal axis.
Click and drag here to rotate the view about an axis normal to the screen.
Position and click here to exit.

Axis Orbiting with Free Orbit
The illustrations below display the behavior of the Free Orbit tool. When the model view is orbited
using the horizontal cross hairs, the model rotates about an imaginary vertical axis based on the view.
The model does not stay in the same view orientation. When the view is orbited without the use of the
cross hairs, the rotation is about the center of the graphics area, or the center as assigned by the
SteeringWheel.
In the following example, using the Free Orbit enables you to view the top and bottom of the
assembly as it is orbited.
Axis Orbiting with Constrained Orbit

The Constrained Orbit tool places the axis of rotation on the vertical axis of the part or assembly.
This functionality enables users to orbit around the vertical axis of their models as they would on a
turntable.
In the following illustrations, the Constrained Orbit tool is started. The orbit starts from the right
horizontal cross hair. As the assembly is orbited, you can see the sides of the assembly, but your view
orientation remains the same.

About the ViewCube
The ViewCube tool displays by default in the graphics window. The ViewCube enables you
to be more efficient because it is accessible at all times, and provides intuitive access to
multiple view orientations.
In the following illustration, the front view of the assembly is restored by clicking Front on the
ViewCube.
Definition of the ViewCube

The ViewCube is a view manipulation tool that enables you to efficiently and intuitively change
the viewing angle of your parts and assemblies. The ViewCube uses faces, edges, and corners
as selection options to define viewing angles.
ViewCube Example
In the following illustration, the view of the monitor arm assembly is changed from the
current isometric view (1) to an angle view between the top and front views (3). The new
view orientation
was obtained by selecting the ViewCube edge (2) between the Top and Front panels on the
ViewCube.

Using the ViewCube
You can access the ViewCube tools by selecting the face, edge, or corner of the ViewCube. Each face,
edge, and corner of the ViewCube represents a different view orientation that corresponds to the
model. The model rotates to the selected view orientation when the ViewCube is clicked.
In the following illustration, the ViewCube is used to reorient the view of the assembly.
Access
ViewCube
Navigation Bar: ViewCube
Ribbon: View tab > Windows panel > Toggle Visibility of the User Interface Elements >
ViewCube
Access
ViewCube Options
Ribbon: Tools tab > Application Options > ViewCube > Options
Shortcut: Right-click the ViewCube > Options

Introduction to ViewCube Options
The ViewCube is displayed in the upper right corner of the graphics area of a new window by default.
However, there are many options associated with the ViewCube that enable you to control both its
appearance and behavior.
ViewCube Display Options

The following options control the display and appearance of the ViewCube.
Use this option to display the ViewCube. To hide the ViewCube, clear the check mark in the box
next to the Show the ViewCube on Window Create option. When a check is in the box for the
ViewCube option, you can choose to display the ViewCube in all 3D views or only in the current
view window.
Use this option to place the ViewCube in a corner of the graphics area. Options include: Top Right,
Bottom Right, Top Left, and Bottom Left. The default location is Top Right.
Use this option to set the ViewCube size. Options include: Small, Normal, or Large. The default
setting is Normal.
Use this option to control the ViewCube opacity. When the cursor is near the ViewCube, the
ViewCube is fully opaque. When the cursor is away from the ViewCube, the opacity of ViewCube
is reduced. Options include: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100%. The default setting is 50%.

ViewCube Behavior Options
The following options control the behavior of the ViewCube.
Use this option to snap the ViewCube to a common view position when dragging the ViewCube
through different view orientations.
When selecting a new view orientation using the ViewCube, use this option to fit the new view to
the screen.
Use this option to create smooth transitions from the current view to the selected view.
Use this option to apply additional calculations for view orientation.
Use this option to set the default orientation of the ViewCube.
Use this option to display a compass with the ViewCube.

Procedure: Using the ViewCube to View Models
The following steps describe using the ViewCube to change the view orientation of your models and
assemblies.
1. Select the panel on the
ViewCube to change the view
orientation.
2. Select the arrow to rotate the

view orientation.
3. Select a corner to change

the view orientation to an
isometric view of the panel
view. In this example, the
Bottom view is shown.
4. An isometric view based on

the Bottom view is displayed.

Procedure: Using the ViewCube to Orient Drawing Views
The following steps describe using the ViewCube to set the view orientation of your models and
assemblies for drawing views.
1. Start the Base View tool.
Click Place Views tab > Create
panel > Base View.
2. Select to change the view

orientation.
3. Select the desired ViewCube

face.
4. If necessary, rotate the model

orientation.
5. Accept the changes and place

the view.

Procedure: Resetting the Current View as Front
The following steps describe resetting the current view orientation to the Front view.
1. Select the panel on the
ViewCube to change the view
orientation.
2. Right-click the ViewCube,

click Set Current View as
Front.
3. The ViewCube updates the

orientation of the current
view to Front.

Using Home View
Using the Home View tool, you can manipulate your model to any orientation, then specify that view
as the home view. In addition to being able to quickly return to that view, the home view is also the
view that is shown each time you open the file.
In the following illustrations, the view orientation of the assembly is restored to the home view when
the Home View glyph next to the ViewCube is clicked.
Orthographic View Home View
Access
Home View
The Home View glyph displays as you move your cursor to the ViewCube.
In all modeling environments, you can quickly return to the home view using either of
the following methods.
Right-click in the graphics window background. Click Home View.
Press the F6 function key.

Home View Options
The following options control the model display when you use the Home View tool.
Use to define the direction of the view and the zoom magnification.
Use to define the direction of the view and automatically assign the zoom magnification as view
all.
Procedure: Setting the Home View

The following steps describe how to set any view orientation to the home view.
1. Use any view manipulation tools to orient
the model.

2. With the model in the desired orientation,
right-click anywhere in the ViewCube. Click
Set Current View as Home, and select Fixed
Distance or Fit to View.
3. With the model in a different orientation,

click the Home View glyph.
4. The view orientation returns to the specified

home view.

Exercise: Manipulate Your Model
Views
In this exercise, you use the ViewCube and Home
View tools to navigate through and restore different
view orientations.
1. Open INV_001_Getting Started.iam.

2. To switch to an isometric view, click the top left
corner of the ViewCube.
Your view is displayed as shown.
3. To view the current top view, on the ViewCube, click Top.

4. To rotate the view:
On the ViewCube, click and hold Top. 8. To redefine the Home view to the current view:
Drag the cursor toward the upper left Right-click the ViewCube.
corner of the ViewCube until the model is Click Set Current View as Home > Fit to
oriented as shown.
View.
5. To return the view orientation to the original

Home view:
Move the cursor to the ViewCube.
When the house image is displayed (1), click
the image.
9. To edit the options of the ViewCube:

Right-click the ViewCube. Click Options.
6. To redefine the current view as the Front view: In the ViewCube Options dialog box, under
Move the cursor to the ViewCube. Document Settings, place a check in the box
next to the Show the Compass Below the
Select the Left Face. ViewCube option.
Right-click the cube. Click Set Current View Click OK.
as Front.
7. To view the model in an isometric view, click

the upper left corner of the ViewCube.

13. To turn off the display of the ViewCube:
10. To orbit the model: Click View tab > Windows panel > Toggle
Click View tab > Navigate panel > Free Visibility drop-down > ViewCube.
Orbit. Click the option again to turn the ViewCube
Click the right quadrant line and drag the on.
cursor to the left until you can see the
bottom view of the computer housing.
Right-click anywhere in the graphics
window. Click Done.
14. To return to your previous view:

Press F5.
Your previous view is restored.
Press F5 again to return the view previous
to the current view.
15. To rewind to a specific view:

Press CTRL+W to activate the
11. On the ViewCube, click Home View. SteeringWheel.
Click Rewind and hold down the cursor.
12. To constrain orbit the model:
Drag your cursor over the views filmstrip
Start the Constrained Orbit tool. and release the mouse button over the
Click the right quadrant line and drag the specific view you want to restore.
cursor to the left. Continue to use the Rewind tool to restore
Right-click anywhere in the graphics other views.
window. Click Done.
Notice that the orbit pivots about the axis.
16. Close the SteeringWheel tool.


Lesson: Designing Parametric Parts
This lesson describes the characteristics of parametric part models and the overall process of their
creation.
Familiarity with the basic characteristics of parametric models simplifies the process of learning and
applying the tools to create such models.
A parametric part model is shown with dimensions displayed in the following illustration.
Objectives
Describe the characteristics of a parametric part model.
Identify guidelines for capturing design intent.
State the general workflow for creating parametric part models.
State the characteristics of the ribbon and browser when in the part environment.
Create a basic parametric part.

About Parametric Part Models
You can create and edit 3D geometry using parametrics. Parametrics use geometric and dimensional
constraints to precisely control the shape and size of a 3D model.
A typical parametric part is shown in the following illustration, consisting of both 2D sketch geometry
with dimensional constraints and the resulting 3D solid geometry.
Parametric Part Models

A parametric model is a 3D model that is controlled and driven by geometric relationships and
dimensional values. You typically create parametric models from a combination of 2D sketches and
3D features. With a parametric part model, you can change a value of a feature and the part model is
adjusted according to that value and any existing geometric constraints.
Sketched Features
Sketched features are features that add or remove material and are typically based on a 2D closed
loop sketch. The sketch can be composed of lines, circles, and arcs.
Sketched features are shown in the following illustrations. After the sketch is used by a feature, it is
considered consumed by the feature and is displayed nested below that feature in the browser.
60 Chapter 5: Autodesk Inventor Getting

Started
Placed Features
While sketched features start from a sketch, placed features have an internally defined shape for
adding or removing material. You need to determine only where and at what size the feature should
be created. Holes and fillets are two commonly used placed features.
Placed features are shown in the following illustration by the Fillet4 and Chamfer2 highlights.

Base Features
The first feature that you create is typically a sketched feature. This first feature is also referred to as
the base feature. All subsequent features either add material to or remove material from the part
model.
Extrusion1 represents the base feature of the part in the following illustration.
Base sketch and base feature
Progression of a Parametric Model

A parametric model progresses through the stages of its creation in the following illustrations. The
model is transformed after the size of the base feature is increased upon inclusion of sketched and
placed features.
Initial sketch is created Base feature is created

Started
Secondary sketch is added Secondary feature is created from secondary sketch
Fillets (placed features) are added Length is changed in initial sketch, causing part to update
Capturing Design Intent

Regardless of the type of design that you are creating, you should always aim to capture the intent
of the design as early in the process as possible. It is common for a design to change as a result
of inherent design problems or future revisions. The ability to capture design intent makes these
potential changes much easier to implement.
Design intent has been captured in the following illustration by using a simple formula (2) to calculate
the outside diameter of the part based on the inside diameter (1).

About Capturing Design Intent
When you capture your design intent, you add intelligence to your design. This intelligence can exist in
several different forms. It can reside in a simple geometric constraint that forces two lines to be
parallel or two circles to be concentric. Intelligence can also reside in dimensional constraints that
force a feature's dimension to remain constant or enable the dimension to change based on a built-in
formula.
Just as each part design is unique, so is the design intent for each part. Capturing this intent is a
process in which you match the design intent with a feature or capability that makes it possible to
create the design in the most efficient way while enabling you the maximum flexibility in making
changes.
Different examples of design intent are shown in the following illustration being captured at the
earliest stage of the design. The toolbars show constraint symbols (glyphs).
Toolbars displaying geometric constraints applied to the geometry. Each icon illustrates a specific
type of geometric constraint that has been applied to the sketch, and as a result captures a
portion of the design intent. For example, the right-most icon on the top toolbar indicates a
tangent constraint between the top horizontal line and the arc on the right side of the sketch.
Coincident constraints are displayed by a yellow dot at the coincident point between two
segments.
Dimensional constraints applied to the geometry. These types of constraints capture design
intent by defining the size of objects in the sketch.

Started
Guidelines for Capturing Design Intent
Consider the following guidelines when you begin a new part design. Each of the following points
indicates an area in which design intent can be captured.
Identify geometric relationships. For example, a feature's length may be directly related to its
width, or the width or length of another feature.
Identify areas of the design that may be prone to change as a result of design problems or
revisions.
Identify areas of symmetry or areas where features are duplicated or patterned.
Once you have identified the potential ways to capture your design intent, you can then match that
intent with a specific Inventor tool or capability.
Example of a Part Design Capturing Design Intent

A simple parametric design of a plastic indexer is shown in the following illustrations. Each one reflects
how a specific guideline of the design intent is captured and implemented into the design with a
parametric feature.
Capturing Geometric Relationships in Design Intent

Design intent for the indexer part dictates that the outside diameter should be equal to twice the
inside diameter in the following illustration. The design intent has been captured with the use of a
simple formula in the dimension parameter.
Inside diameter of the indexer part.

Outside diameter is determined by a formula equal to twice the inside diameter.

Capturing Design Intent for Features That Are Prone to Change
Design intent has been captured to allow for potential design changes in the following illustration. As
the thickness of the part changes, so does the depth of the slots. This result is achieved by setting the
depth parameter for the slot to All, ensuring the slot always extrudes completely through the part.
With a 3 mm part height, slot depth cuts though the entire part.
With a change in part height from 3 mm to 6 mm, the slot depth continues to cut through the
entire part.
Capturing Symmetry in Design Intent

Design intent for symmetry has been captured in the part design in the following illustration by using
a parametric pattern feature. By capturing the design intent in this manner, you can easily change the
number or angled spacing of slots by editing the feature.

Started
Original slot feature.
Circular pattern being created to duplicate the slot feature in a precise and easily editable
manner.
Creating Parametric Part Models

The overall process for creating parametric part models is very flexible. With this flexibility, you can
concentrate on your design, design intent, and essential design features instead of being limited by a
rigid modeling process.
In the following illustration, what begins as a simple circle is transformed into fully parametric model.
Process: Creating a Parametric Part

The following steps provide an overview of the process for creating a parametric part.
1. Create the initial sketch profile.

2. Capture the design intent by applying
constraints and dimensions.

3. Use the part feature tools to create
the base feature.
4. Continue to develop the design by

creating additional sketched and
placed features.
Part Design Considerations

When creating a parametric part model, try to determine the basic building blocks of the part; that
is, how the part can be designed and built in stages. Also determine which aspects of the model are
the critical aspects of the part. You create those aspects first in the order of their importance and
relationship.
Part Design Workflow

The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating parts.
Use one of the part templates provided to create a new part.
All new parts you create have a blank sketch automatically placed. Create the profile of your
geometry on the initial sketch.
Use sketched features such as Extrude and Revolve to create your base feature.
Create additional sketched and placed features as required to generate the necessary 3D
geometry.

Started
Part Design Environment
When you are editing a part file and the part environment is active, the ribbon and browser are
displayed with the tools and information relevant to this environment.
The part design environment is shown in the following illustration.
Part Features on Ribbon Model Tab: Displays part modeling tools while in part modeling mode.
Browser: Displays the feature history for the part or assembly.

Model Tab
The Model tab is displayed when you are editing a part model. You use these tools to create sketched
and placed features on the part.
Browser
When you use the browser in the part design environment, it displays the Origin folder containing the
default X, Y, and Z planes, axes, and center point. It also lists all features you use to create the part.
Features are listed in the order in which they are created.

Started
Exercise: Create a Parametric Part
In this exercise, you create a simple bracket by
extruding the predefined sketch. You then edit the
part by changing some of the parameters and add a
fillet feature.
1. Open INV_002_Parametric_Part.ipt.
The initial sketch profile has been created and constrained.

2. Right click sketch 1 in the browser > Select Edit
Sketch.
Click the check mark to update the value.
3. Add the dimension that will control the length

and height of the Simple Conveyor.
Click the Dimension Command. 4. Finish the Sketch.
Click the Finish Sketch Button.
Select the top line of the rectangle and then 5. Click Model tab > Create panel > Extrude.
click to place the dimension. If necessary, For Distance, enter Width=30 (1).
click the new dimension to edit the value. Click the Symmetric Extrusion Button (2).
Type in the new parameter value as shown Click OK.
below. Length=75
Click the check mark to update the value.
Repeat the Dimension process and add

another dimension to a vertical.
Type in the new parameter value as shown
below. Height=30

Started
6. In the browser, expand the Extrusion feature.
The initial sketch is consumed by the 3D
extrusion feature.
7. In the browser, double-click Sketch1.

Double-click the 30 mm vertical
dimension.
In the Edit Dimension dialog box, enter 35. 8. In the browser, right-click the Extrusion1
feature. Click Edit Feature.
Press ENTER.
On the Sketch tab, click Finish Sketch. For Distance, enter 40 mm.
The part is updated to reflect the new Click OK.
dimension value. The parametric part updates to reflect the new
parameter value.

9. Click Model tab > Modify panel > Fillet.
In the graphics window, select the
outside edges as shown.
For Radius, enter 6.
Click OK. The fillet feature is updated.

Started
Chapter Summary
By using the context-sensitive user interface and the tools that are available, you can quickly create
basic parametric geometry. This chapter introduced you to the Autodesk Inventor user interface and
concepts supporting parametric part design and capturing design intent.
Identify the main user interface components that are common to all Autodesk Inventor design
environments and describe how to access different tools.
View all aspects of your design by efficiently navigating around in 2D and 3D space.
Describe the characteristics and benefits of a parametric part model.

Chapter
Basic Sketching Techniques

The majority of the features that you create on your parametric part models start with constrained 2D
sketches. Intelligent and predictable part designs require a thorough understanding of how to create
2D sketches and how to capture design intent by applying geometric and dimensional constraints.
Objectives
Use sketch tools to create 2D sketch geometry.
Use geometric constraints to control sketch geometry.
Apply parametric dimensions to your sketch geometry.
Chapter 6: Basic Sketching Techniques 1

Lesson: Creating 2D Sketches
This lesson describes how to create 2D sketch geometry using sketch tools.
Nearly every parametric part begins with a 2D sketch, and every sketch you create defines a 2D plane
on which your sketch geometry is created. These sketches not only form the foundation of each part,
but are also used throughout the design process.
A basic parametric part for which several sketches were used to create its features is shown in the
Objectives
Describe the differences between standard 2D sketching and 2D parametric sketches.
Explain the options for aligning geometry in 2D sketches.
Reorient the initial sketch to a different plane.
Use sketch tools to create sketch geometry.
Describe guidelines for creating successful sketches.
2 Chapter 6: Basic Sketching Techniques

About Sketching
The sketch environment is where all 2D sketching takes place. When you create a new 2D sketch or
edit an existing sketch, the sketch environment is activated.
The sketch environment is activated as the sketch is edited, as shown in the following illustration.
When the sketch environment is active, the Sketch tab is displayed.

The active sketch is highlighted in the browser while all other elements are dimmed.
When you activate the sketch environment, the grid lines and X and Y axes are displayed by
default in the graphics window.
Parametric Sketching
A parametric sketch forms the base of each parametric part you create in Autodesk Inventor. Unlike 2D
sketches that you can create in a nonparametric 2D application, when you create a sketch in Autodesk
Inventor, you immediately begin to add intelligence to your part and capture design intent.

Constraints in Parametric Sketches
A parametric sketch consists of 2D geometry on which constraints are applied to control the size
and potential behavior of the 2D geometry. There are two different types of constraints, geometric
constraints and dimensional constraints. As you create geometry in Autodesk Inventor, some
geometric constraints are applied automatically.
The symbols next to the geometry in the following illustrations are known as "glyphs" and represent
2D constraints. Glyphs are displayed while a sketch tool is active and you are sketching. The use of 2D
constraints is one way in which design intent is automatically captured as you are creating your sketch
geometry.
Indicates a parallel constraint being applied to the bottom horizontal line.

Indicates a parallel constraint with the top horizontal currently being drawn.
Indicates a tangent constraint between the arc and the horizontal line being drawn.

You must add dimensional constraints to each element of the sketch for which you need to specify
a dimension. Both types of constraints applied to sketch geometry are shown in the following
illustration.
Geometric Constraints
Geometric constraints, which are applied to geometry, are represented by the symbols on the
following toolbar. Each type of constraint is represented with a unique symbol.
From left to right:

Perpendicular constraint that forces the line to remain perpendicular to the left-side vertical
line.
Tangent constraint, forcing the line to be tangent to the arc.
Parallel constraint indicating that the line must remain parallel to the lower horizontal line.
Horizontal constraint that forces the bottom line to be parallel the X-Axis of the sketch.
Coincident Constraints
These constraints force the endpoints of lines to remain coincident or connected.
Dimensional Constraints
These dimensions control the size of the objects. The diameter dimension controls the size of the
circle, while the linear dimension controls the length of the horizontal line.
Parametric Sketches Versus Precise Sketches

Precise sketches created with AutoCAD, by default have no parametric intelligence. A change in a
dimension does not force the geometry to update to reflect the new dimension value. Parametric
sketches in Inventor enable you to click and drag the geometry in directions allowed by the existing
constraints while all conditions controlled by the constraints are maintained. For example, if you drag
the outer arc to a different size, the horizontal lines remain tangent, horizontal, and one unit in length.

Example
The effect of 2D geometric constraints is shown in the following illustration, where an element of the
sketch is dragged to reshape the geometry.
Original position of line element being moved.

Centerline element used with symmetry constraints.
Cursor dragging line to a new location.
New location of the line as it is being moved. Notice the same movement on the opposite side of
the sketch.
Dimensional constraint positioning the edge of the part. A change in this dimension would be
reflected on both sides of the centerline.
To achieve the same modifications in a nonparametric sketch, you would have to duplicate each edit
on both sides of the centerline.
Fully Constrained Sketch Geometry

When you apply constraints to a sketch, each constraint removes degrees of freedom from the
geometry. By removing degrees of freedom, you limit the direction or amount a given part of the
sketch can be moved or resized. When a sketch has all degrees of freedom removed, it is considered
to be fully constrained.
While it is not necessary to fully constrain a sketch before creating 3D features, it is recommended. A
fully constrained sketch is predictable in the manner in which it can change, and reduces the number
of errors as changes are made to the parametric part.

Identifying the Constraint Conditions
Once the sketch is fully constrained, the profile will be a single color.
Inventor uses color differences and numerical feedback to identify fully constrained as opposed to
under constrained geometry. Represented in the following illustration, the lighter colored geometry
requires either geometric or dimensional constraints to fully constrain the sketch. You can use these
colors to identify which elements still require constraints. At the bottom right of the interface,
the application indicates "6 dimensions needed" to fully constrain the sketch geometry.
Colors used to show constraint conditions vary depending on your color configuration for
Inventor. Color differences occurring while using the Presentation configuration (white
background) are the least noticeable.
As your sketch increases in complexity, the number of constraints or

dimensions required to fully constrain the sketch also increases.
Point Alignment
When you are creating sketch geometry and you want to align to a point projected from existing
geometry, you have two different workflows you can follow depending on the current setting for point
alignment. To utilize and benefit from automatic point alignment, you need to understand what point
alignment is and where to toggle it on and off.
The following illustrations show different point alignments automatically occurring during the creation
of sketch geometry.

Point Alignment
The automatic alignment of points during sketch creation is an option that you can toggle on and off.
Point alignment during sketch geometry creation enables you to create your sketch geometry with the
alignment you require as you create it. You can have the endpoints of the sketch geometry align to an
extension, be perpendicular, or align to a virtual intersection of other sketch geometry. You achieve
these point alignment locations by the position of the cursor. You do not need to scrub the cursor over
the intended referencing geometry first.
The automatic point alignment option is set globally for the installation of Autodesk Inventor. You
toggle on and off point alignment by selecting or clearing the Point Alignment On check box on the
Sketch tab in the Application Options dialog box.

Reorienting the Initial Sketch
Each time you create a new part, the default configuration places a new sketch on the XY plane. In
some cases you may want to begin sketching on a different plane. You can either delete the initial
sketch and create a new one, or you can reorient the initial sketch including any geometry that might
have been drawn.
The initial sketch of concentric circles has been reoriented from the XY plane to the YZ plane in the
Procedure: Reorienting the Initial Sketch

The following steps describe how to reorient the initial sketch to a different plane:
1. If the sketch is active, exit the sketch environment.
2. In the browser, right-click the initial sketch and select Redefine.

3. In the browser, expand the Origin node and select a plane to reorient the sketch.
4. The sketch and any existing geometry are reoriented to the selected plane.

Basic Sketching Tools
A profile or path sketch can consist of objects such as points, lines, arcs, circles, and dimensional
geometry. When the environment of a sketch plane is active, the ribbon switches to display the
available sketch tools. The Sketch panel contains all the tools for creating, manipulating, and controlling
sketch geometry.
Sketch Tool
By default, the first sketch in a new part is automatically created on the XY plane. If you require
additional sketches, you use the Sketch tool to create them manually or to activate existing ones. The
Sketch tool prompts you to select a plane to create a sketch, or to select an existing sketch to edit. You
can select planes or sketches in the graphics window or in the browser. You can create a new sketch on
a part face, origin plane, or work plane.
Access
Create 2D Sketch
Ribbon: Model tab > Sketch panel
Shortcut Menu: Right-click a selected face or plane
Exiting a Sketch
To exit the sketch, use one of the following methods:
On the ribbon, click Finish Sketch.
Right-click in the drawing area and click Finish Sketch.

Procedure: Creating Lines
The following steps describe how to create lines in your sketch:
1. Start the Line tool. Select a start point for the line segment.
2. Drag in the direction you want to draw the line. Note that the constraint glyph (1) is displayed.
This glyph indicates the type of constraint being applied to the line segments.
Select a point to end the line segment.

3. Drag in the direction of the next line segment, again noticing the constraint glyph indicating the
automatic constraint.
Select a point to end the line segment.

4. Continue drawing line segments as required.
If the constraint glyph represents a constraint that you would like to change, brush the cursor
against the geometry on the sketch for which you want to apply the constraint and then
continue drawing the line segment.
5. Continue drawing line segments as required.
6. Right-click in the graphics window and select Done.

Procedure: Creating Circles
The following steps describe how to create circles in your sketch.

1. To create a center point circle, start the Center Point Circle tool. Select the center point of the
circle.
2. Drag to a location representing the outside perimeter of the circle. Select that point to create the
circle.

4. To create a three-point tangent circle, start the Tangent Circle tool.
5. Select three parts of the geometry for the circle to be tangent to.

Procedure: Creating Perpendicular or Tangent Arcs
The following steps describe how to create a perpendicular or tangent arc in your sketch using the
Line tool:
1. Start the Line tool.
2. Click and drag the endpoint of an existing line or arc. Temporary tangent and
perpendicular construction lines are displayed at the arc start point.
To create a perpendicular arc, click and drag in the direction of the perpendicular
construction line.
To create a tangent arc, click and drag in the direction of the tangent construction
line.

3. Continue to drag the endpoint to the final endpoint of the arc and release.
Procedure: Creating Three Point Arcs

The following steps describe how to create three-point arcs in your sketch:
1. Start the Three Point Arc tool. Select the start point of the arc.
2. Select a point for the endpoint of the arc.

3. Drag to size the arc. Depending on existing geometry and arc size, constraint glyphs may be
displayed.
Procedure: Creating a Two Point Rectangle

The following steps describe how to create a two point rectangle in your sketch:
1. Start the Two Point Rectangle tool.
2. Select a point representing the first corner of the rectangle.
3. Select a point representing the opposite corner of the rectangle.

Guidelines for Successful Sketches
You can use several methods to create closed shapes. You can use tools such as the rectangle, circle,
or polygon, or you can constrain sketch geometry so that separate sketch elements come together
to create a closed shape. At times you may need to create sketch geometry that is not closed, for
example, a path for a sweep feature or to create a surface; however, these guidelines focus on creating
closed profiles.
Sketch Guidelines
Follow these guidelines for successful sketching:
Keep the sketch simple. Do not fillet the corners of a sketch if you can apply a fillet to the edges of
the finished 3D feature and achieve the same effect. Complex sketch geometry can be difficult to
manage as designs evolve.
Repeat simple shapes to build more complex shapes.
Draw the profile sketch roughly to size and shape.
Use 2D constraints to stabilize sketch shape before setting size.
Use closed loops for profiles.
Example of Sketching Guidelines

In the following illustration, the same part results from two different sketches. In the image on the left,
the sketch contains no fillets. The fillet features are created on the 3D part as placed features.
In the image on the right, the fillet features were placed at the sketch level. While this results in the
same part shape, this method complicates the sketch geometry.
Correct: Sketch with no fillets Incorrect: Sketch with fillets

Exercise: Create 2D Sketches
In this exercise, you create a simple Support Bracket 2. Create a basic shape.
extrusion using the basic sketching tools.
Start the Line tool.
Select a point near the origin.
Drag the cursor to the right, making
certain the horizontal constraint glyph
displays
near the cursor.
Select the second point of the line
approximately 25 mm from the start
point.
Note: The line length is displayed as it is
drawn in the lower-right corner of the
application window.
Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of
chapters and exercises, click Chapter
2: Basic Sketching Techniques. Click
Exercise: Create 2D Sketches. 3. With the Line tool still active, create an
inline arc segment.
Drag the endpoint of the line segment to
1. Create a new part using the Standard (mm).ipt the right to define the direction of tangency
template. for the arc.
On the Quick Access toolbar, click New. Release the left mouse button when
the endpoint of the arc is directly
In the New File dialog box, click the Metric above the start point. Use the grid
tab. spacing in the following illustration to
Select Standard (mm).ipt. define the size of the arc.
Click OK.

4. With the Line tool still active, draw another line 8. Extrude the shape 5 mm.
segment to the left. Click Model tab > Create panel > Extrude.
Move the cursor to the left until it is In the Extrude dialog box, for
positioned vertically above the start point distance, enter 5 mm.
of and parallel to the first line segment. Click OK.
Ensure that the constraint glyphs are
displayed as shown in the following
illustration.
Click to create the line segment.
5. Complete the sketch by creating the last line

segment as shown.
9. To create a new sketch on the front face of

the part.
Right-click the front face of the part.
Select New Sketch.
6. On the ribbon, click Finish Sketch to exit the

sketch.
7. On the ViewCube, click the top-right corner to
view the sketch in an isometric view.

10. Draw a rectangle on the top surface. 12. Extrude the new sketch a distance of 10 mm.
Start the Two Point Rectangle tool. Start the Extrude tool.
Select point 1 as shown. Select a point inside the rectangle.
Select point 2 as shown. In the Extrude dialog box, enter 10 mm.
Note: When selecting the points for the Click OK.
rectangle, make sure the coincident constraint
glyphs appear. Depending on how your Sketch
Options are set, the edges on the face may not
be projected and thus the coincident
constraints will not appear. If this occurs, right-
click in the graphics window while sketching the
rectangle and select the AutoProject option.

sketch.

Lesson: Geometric Constraints
This lesson describes geometric constraints and how to apply them to sketch geometry. You use
geometric constraints to control sketch geometry. For example, a vertical constraint applied to a line
segment forces that line segment to be vertical. A tangent constraint added to an arc forces that arc to
remain tangent to the geometry that has been constrained.
Geometric constraints represent the foundation of all parametric design. Using these objects, you can
capture your design intent and force the geometry to follow the rules set by each constraint.
2D constraints on a part sketch are shown in the following illustration.
Objectives
Describe geometric constraints and their effects on geometry.
Explain how constraint inference and persistence provide complete control over when, where, and
which constraints are created in a sketch.
Apply geometric constraints to sketch geometry.
View and delete constraints using the Show Constraints tool.
State key guidelines for successful constraining.
Explain how to display sketch degrees of freedom and how they can assist in creating fully
constrained sketches.

About Geometric Constraints
Several different types of constraints exist, each with a specific capability and purpose. The selection
you choose depends largely on the design intent.
As you create sketches, some constraints are inferred (applied automatically). In most cases the
inferred constraints are sufficient for your initial constraints. As you continue to develop the sketch,
you may need to add additional constraints to properly stabilize the sketch geometry.
The effects of constraints on sketch geometry are shown in the following illustration. The sketch on
the left was purposely drawn using only some of the inferred constraints. The sketch on the right is
the result of adding additional constraints such as perpendicular, parallel, and collinear.
Initial inferred constraints only.

After applying constraints.

Definition of Geometric Constraints
Geometric constraints stabilize sketch geometry by placing limits on how the geometry can change
when you attempt to drag or dimension it. For example, if a horizontal constraint is applied to a line,
that line is forced to be horizontal at all times.
In the following illustration, the circle on the right is being resized. Tangent constraints have been
applied to the lines. As the circle is resized, the lines remain tangent to both circles.
Constraint Types
You can use the following constraint types to constrain your sketches:
Constraint Description Before Constraint After Constraint
Tangent: Use to make selected

elements tangent to one
another.
Perpendicular: Use to make

selected elements
perpendicular to one another.
Parallel: Use to make selected

elements parallel to one
another.
Coincident: Use to make two

points exist at the same point
location.
Concentric: Use to force two

arcs, circles, or ellipses to
share the same center point.

Constraint Description Before Constraint After Constraint
Collinear: Use to force two

lines or ellipse axes to lie on
the same line.
Horizontal: Use to force the

element to be parallel to the
X axis of the current sketch
coordinate system.
Vertical: Use to force the

element to be parallel to the
Y axis of the current sketch
coordinate system.
Equal: Use to force two

elements to be of the same
length. In the case of arcs or
circles, the radius becomes
equal.
Fix: Use to cause an element

to be fixed in location to the
current sketch coordinate
system.
Symmetric: Use to cause the

elements to be symmetrically
constrained about a line.
Smooth: Use to cause

a curvature continuous
condition (G2) between a
spline and another curve, line,
arc or spline.

Horizontal Constraint Example
In the following illustration, the application of a horizontal constraint is shown. The two circles are
constrained to the endpoints of the line. The design intent requires these two circles to remain
aligned. After the horizontal constraint is applied to the line, the line updates and the circle on the
right side moves with the line.
About Constraint Inference and Persistence

By default, when you create sketch geometry, that geometry can automatically have geometric
constraints applied to it. To control when geometric constraints are automatically inferred and applied
in a sketch, you must understand what it means to have constraints inferred and the meaning of
persistence, and where and how to change their related settings.
In the following illustration, a sketch is shown being created alongside the completed sketch with its
geometric constraints displayed. As the sketch geometry was being created, the geometric constraints
were automatically added to the geometry.
Definition of Constraint Inference and Persistence

As you are working in a sketch, several types of geometric constraints can be automatically applied to
sketch geometry as it is created. This includes constraints such as perpendicular, parallel, coincident,
horizontal, vertical, and tangent. The automatic application of geometric constraints is referred to as
constraint inference and persistence.
When you are sketching geometry and a valid geometric constraint to another sketch geometry is
identified, that constraint is said to be inferred. When a constraint is inferred, the constraint symbol
for that geometric type displays. If you click to create the sketch geometry when the constraint symbol
is displayed, and if the inferred geometric constraint is automatically applied to the sketch geometry,
then that constraint is said to be persistent. Depending on your settings, that inferred constraint may
or may not be automatically added to the sketch geometry.
The evaluation of sketch geometry for constraint inference occurs automatically based on the location
and relationship of the geometry being sketched to the existing geometry around it. You can have
aspecific piece of sketch geometry inferred by passing the cursor back and forth over the geometry.
Passing the cursor back and forth over the sketch geometry is referred to as scrubbing the geometry.

You can control the automatic application of geometric constraints through the use of the Constraint
Inference and Constraint Options settings or the CTRL key.
By changing the Constraint Inference and Constraint Persistence options, you control whether
constraints are automatically inferred and applied, only inferred but not applied, or neither inferred
nor applied. When you press and hold CTRL as you create sketch geometry, no geometric constraints
are inferred or applied.
Having geometric constraints automatically applied to the sketch geometry as you create it means you
decrease the number of constraints required later to control the sketch geometry's shape, size, and
position.
User-Controlled Constraint Inference and Persistence

As you create sketch geometry, the automatic inference of constraints is dependent on the setting of
the Constraint Inference option, and the settings for the Constraint Options, as set in the Constraint
Options dialog box. The actual creation of an inferred constraint in the sketch is dependent on the
Constraint Persistence option.
Icon Option Description
Constraint This setting controls whether or not sketch constraints are inferred.
Inference
Constraint This setting controls whether or not inferred sketch constraints are
Persistence created.
You change the settings for the Constraint Inference and Constraint Persistence options on the
Constrain panel of the ribbon. There are three different combinations of settings you can set for
constraint inference and persistence. You can have both settings off, only the inference setting on, or
both on. As you are creating sketch geometry, you can change the settings for Constraint Inference
and Constraint Persistence to match your requirements for the sketch geometry you are about to
create.
The following table illustrates the settings for Constraint Inference and Constraint Persistence and
describes the various behaviors associated with these options.
Option Description
Both Off: As you create sketch geometry, you do not infer geometric constraints other
than coincident constraints. Therefore, the sketch geometry does not automatically
have geometric constraints like horizontal, parallel, or perpendicular applied to its
geometry. Lines can still snap to horizontal and vertical, and point alignment can still
occur if it is enabled.
Inference Only: As you create sketch geometry, you can infer geometric constraints like
parallel, perpendicular, and tangent. However, the only geometric constraints
automatically applied to the sketch are coincident constraints. Use this setting to get
the initial sketch geometry aligned and positioned as you require without adding initial
geometric constraints.
Both On: As you create sketch geometry, you can infer geometric constraints such as
parallel, perpendicular, and tangent. Any inferred constraint is automatically added
and applied to that sketch geometry.

Constraint Inference Options
You access the Constraint Options dialog box by selecting Constraint Options in the shortcut menu
when a sketch is active for editing. Within the Constraint Options dialog box, there are two areas for
setting constraint inference: Selection for Constraint Inference and Scope of Constraint Inference.
In the Selection for Constraint Inference area, you select which geometric constraints you want to infer
as you are creating new sketch geometry. For these options to be selectable, the Constraint Inference
option must already be on.
In the Scope of Constraint Inference area, you set either to automatically evaluate all sketch geometry
to infer constraints from, or to use only the sketch geometry you preselect.
Example Settings and Uses for Constraint Inference and Persistence

The way you set the Constraint Inference and Constraint Persistence options depends on the sketch
geometry you are creating and the workflow you want to follow. For example:
If you are sketching geometry that needs to be at varying angles other than horizontal, vertical,
parallel, and perpendicular to other geometry, you should have both settings off so the geometry
does not align in that manner nor have geometric constraints applied.
If you want to create the sketch geometry and manually apply each geometric constraint so it has a
specific constraint scheme, then you should have both settings off or have only the Constraint
Inference option on.
If you want to infer constraints and apply the constraints to the sketch geometry as you create it,
then you should have both settings on.

In the following illustration, the progressive steps used to create the sketch are shown along the top.
The settings that were used for constraint inference and constraint persistence are shown at the
bottom with their respective constraint results.
Applying Geometric Constraints

Each type of constraint can be applied to certain types of geometry and in certain situations. Some
constraints such as perpendicular are relational constraints and must be applied to two elements
in the sketch. A relational constraint defines a geometric relationship between two objects. Other
constraints such as vertical can be applied to a single object or two points.
Accessing Constraint Tools

2D constraints are available on the ribbon, Sketch tab > Constrain panel.
Access
2D Constraints
Ribbon: Sketch tab > Constrain panel

Procedure: Applying a Horizontal Constraint
The following steps give an overview for applying a horizontal constraint.
1. Click Sketch tab > Constrain panel > Horizontal.
2. Select the geometry to be constrained.
3. Add more horizontal constraints, or right-click and select Done.
Procedure: Applying a Horizontal Constraint between Point and Midpoint

The following steps give an overview for applying a horizontal constraint between two points.
1. Start the Horizontal constraint tool.
2. Select a point such as the endpoint of a line or center of a circle.
3. Select the midpoint of an existing line.

The geometry is now constrained horizontally based upon the two points selected.
Procedure: Applying an Equal Constraint

The following steps give an overview for applying an equal constraint to two circles.
1. Click Sketch tab > Constrain panel > Equal.
2. Select a circle, line, or arc.
3. Select the circle, line, or arc to which you want to apply the equal constraint.
4. The selected geometry is now constrained to be equal in size.

Procedure: Applying a Symmetrical Constraint
The following steps give an overview for applying a symmetrical constraint.
1. Click Sketch tab > Constrain panel > Symmetric.
2. Select the first sketch element for the constraint.
3. Select the second sketch element for the constraint.
4. Select a sketch element to be used for the symmetry line.

Note: You only need to select the symmetry line once during the current session.

5. Continue selecting other sketch elements to apply the symmetric constraint.
Showing and Deleting Constraints

As you create and constrain your 2D sketches, you may need to view and possibly delete some
constraints. Using the Show Constraints tool, you can view the constraints applied to the selected
geometry and if necessary, select the constraint(s) and delete them. You can also use the Show All
Constraints tool to display the constraints on all the elements in your sketch.
The constraint glyphs for one piece of sketch geometry is shown in the following illustration. The
illustration also shows that selecting a constraint glyph highlights the geometry it is associated with.

Showing Constraints on Multiple Objects
In the following illustration, the Show Constraints tool has been started. A selection window is used to
select multiple objects in the sketch. The constraints for each object selected are displayed. The cursor
is then moved to a single object to review the constraints related to that object.
Constraint Glyph Features

You can use the Constraint Glyphs in the following ways.
Option Method
Viewing constraints Click the constraint glyph. The geometry referenced by the selected
constraint glyph is highlighted.
Hide constraints Right-click the constraint glyph, and click Hide.
Deleting constraints Select the constraint glyph and press Delete, or right-click the selected
constraint glyph and click Delete.
Show All Constraints

Using the Show All Constraints tool, you can see all constraints applied to the active sketch geometry.
When you select the Show All Constraints tool, Show/Delete Constraint toolbars are displayed next
to each sketch element. Pause over or select the constraint symbol to highlight the constrained
geometry. Select the constraint symbol and press DELETE to delete the constraint.

Access
You can use the following methods to access the Show All Constraints tool.
Option Method
Shortcut menu Right-click in the graphics window and select Show All Constraints (sketch
must be active).
Keyboard F8: Show all constraints.

shortcut
F9: Hide all constraints.
The constraint toolbars are displayed next to each sketch element. Click and drag the bars on the
toolbars to move them to another location.
Guidelines for Successful Constraining

As you create sketch geometry, constraints are automatically applied. However, those constraints do
not always completely represent your design intent. Therefore, you must add constraints or delete
existing constraints.
Constraint Guidelines
The following list represents some guidelines to consider when you are placing constraints.
Determine sketch dependencies: During the sketch creation process, determine how sketch
elements relate to each other and apply the appropriate sketch constraints.
Analyze automatically applied constraints: As you create sketch geometry, some constraints are
automatically applied. After the sketch is created, you should determine whether any degrees of
freedom remain on the sketch. If required, delete the automatically applied constraints and apply
constraints to remove the degrees of freedom.
Use only needed constraints: When you apply constraints to your sketch geometry, take into
account the design intent and the degrees of freedom remaining on the sketch. It is not necessary
to fully constrain sketch geometry in order to create 3D features. In some situations you may be
required to leave sketch geometry under constrained. You can use the constraint-drag technique to
see the remaining degrees of freedom on the sketch.

Stabilize shape before size: Before you place dimensions on your sketch elements, you should
constrain the sketch to prevent the geometry from distorting. As you place the parametric
dimensions, the sketch elements update to reflect the correct size. By stabilizing the geometry
with constraints, you are able to predict the effect the dimensions have on the sketch geometry. If
necessary, use the fix constraint to fix portions of the sketch.
Identify sketch elements that might change size: When constraining sketches, take into account
features that may change as the design evolves. When you identify sketch features that may
change, leave those features under constrained. When a feature is left unconstrained, the feature
can change as the design evolves.
Guideline Examples
The following list illustrates and describes some basic constraint guidelines.
Determine sketch dependencies: In this
illustration, the two short vertical line
segments must remain perpendicular
to the centerline, and the two diagonals
must remain parallel to each other.
Analyze automatically applied

constraints: In this illustration, the
automatically applied constraints on
the right-side vertical line and the
lower diagonal line are being analyzed.
The symbols (glyphs) on the toolbars
indicate the types of constraints that
have been applied. In this illustration the
perpendicular and parallel constraints
are highlighted.
Use only needed constraints: In this

illustration, the horizontal line has been
intentionally left under constrained.
This enables the designer to adjust the
position between the horizontal line and
the centerline.

Stabilize shape before size: In this
illustration, constraints are shown but no
dimensions appear on this sketch. The
constraints have been added to stabilize
the sketch shape before dimensions are
applied to control its size.
Identify sketch elements that might

change size: In this illustration, the
dimensions complete the constraint
requirements. Notice how the short
horizontal line below the centerline is
not dimensioned for its position away
from the centerline. This line's position
has been identified as an element
that may need to change, and thus is
intentionally not dimensioned.
Toggling Sketch Degrees of Freedom Glyph Display

When you are constraining a sketch, if you understand how sketch geometry is free to move and
rotate, it makes it easier to figure out your strategy for applying geometry and dimensional constraints.
By understanding the purpose of sketch degree of freedom glyphs and how to display them, you will
find that it is much easier to constrain the sketch geometry as you require.
In the following illustration, a sketch has all of its degrees of freedom glyphs being displayed for
its sketch geometry. Based on these glyphs, you get a visual understanding of how each object or
endpoint can move or rotate.

Sketch Degrees of Freedom
To visually identify how sketch geometry is under constrained, you can have degrees of freedom (DOF)
glyphs display for all or selected geometry in a sketch. As you constrain the sketch, the visible DOF
glyphs dynamically update to reflect the open degrees of freedom.
You toggle on and off the display of sketch geometry degrees of freedom glyphs in the active sketch by
clicking the corresponding option in the shortcut menu. When there is no sketch geometry selected,
the shortcut menu options are Hide All Degrees of Freedom and Show All Degrees of Freedom.
These options toggle on and off the DOF glyph display for all geometry in the active sketch. If sketch
geometry is selected when you right-click in the graphics window, you are then able to toggle on and
off the display of the degrees of freedom glyph for just that geometry by clicking the Display Degrees
of Freedom shortcut menu option.
In the following illustration, the same sketch is shown with sketch degrees of freedom glyphs before
and after adding three dimensions. After adding the three highlighted dimensions, much of the
geometry in the sketch had its degrees of freedom locked down. Degrees of freedom glyphs display
only for the geometry that still has open freedom. The degree of freedom glyphs that are displayed
update to show just the open freedom for the geometry.
Procedure: Toggling Sketch Degrees of Freedom Glyph Display

The following steps give an overview of toggling on or off the display of all sketch degree of freedom
glyphs in an active sketch.
1. Right-click in an open area in the graphics window.
2. In the shortcut menu, select Hide All Degrees of Freedom or Show All Degrees of Freedom.

Exercise: Constrain Sketches
In this exercise, you create and constrain sketch 3. Start the Two Point Rectangle tool. Sketch a
geometry. Using the concepts and procedures rectangle on the face as shown. Press ESC to
learned in this lesson, you create the slots on the exit the tool.
Pillow Block component.
Note: The XYZ Indicator has its text turned off in
the following image.
1. Open INV_003_Constrain_Sketches.ipt. 4. Start the Centerpoint Circle tool and create

circles centered on the edge of the rectangle
and coincident to the corners. Right-click in the
graphics window and select Done when
finished drawing.
2. In the Model tab, click Sketch panel > Create

2D Sketch. Select the face on the part as
shown.

Start the Vertical Constraint tool and select 9. Right-click anywhere in the graphics window,
5. select Hide All Degrees of Freedom.
the midpoint of the left edge and the
centerpoint on the circle.
10. Add dimension to constrain the size of the
sketch geometry as shown.
Horizontal Dimension is Length-7.
Diameter Dimension is 6.
6. Start the Horizontal Constraint tool and

select the midpoint of the face and the
midpoint of the slot sketch.

sketch.
12. Start the Extrude tool and select inside each

circle and the rectangle area of the sketch.
Adjust the options in the dialog box as shown.
Change the Extents Option to To Next.
Click the New Solid Command.
The slot sketch is now centered on the face.
7. Press ESC to exit the Horizontal Constraint

tool.
8. Right-click anywhere in the graphics window,

select Show All Degrees of Freedom.
Observe that while the slot is constrained
centered on the face, there are many
degrees of freedom remaining.
Note: The material is set to glass in the
following illustration to better display the
DOF symbols.
13. On the ViewCube, select the Home icon as

shown.

14. On the Browser, expand the Solid Bodies
folder and right-click on Solid 2. Select
properties and set the Body Color Style to
Black.
15. Close all files and do not save.

Lesson: Dimensioning Sketches
This lesson describes how to create and use various types of dimensions for your 2D sketch geometry.
Using dimensions for your sketches is a major aspect of constraining 2D geometry. While geometric
constraints stabilize the sketch and make it predictable, dimensions size the sketch according to your
design intent.
Objectives
Describe the function and properties of parametric dimensions.
Create linear, radial, angular, and aligned dimensional constraints.
Use additional options when applying dimensions.
Describe best practices for dimensioning your sketch.

About Dimensional Constraints
You create dimensional constraints by adding parametric dimensions to your sketch. This is the final
step in fully constraining your sketch geometry. When you apply a parametric dimension to a sketch
element, the sketch element changes size to reflect the value of the dimension.
Various types of dimensions that you can apply to sketch geometry are shown in the following
illustration.
Definition of Parametric Dimensions

A parametric dimension is a dimension that, when placed on sketch geometry, determines the size,
angle, or position of the geometry. Associative dimensions in nonparametric applications report the
size, angle, or position of an object, whereas changes to parametric dimensions affect the object's size,
angle, or position.
In the following illustration, when the dimension is placed, the initial value is 47.232. When the value
is changed to 50 in the Edit Dimension dialog box, the width of the shape updates to reflect the new
value. Note the d0 text in the title area of the Edit Dimension dialog box. This is the parameter name.
Each time you place a parametric dimension, a unique parameter name is automatically assigned.
Unlike 2D CAD applications in which dimensions are simply numeric representations of the size of
the geometry, in a parametric 3D modeling application, dimensions are used to drive the size of the
geometry. With this technology, you can quickly change a dimension and immediately see how the
change affects the geometry.

Example
Several types of parametric dimensions are available, but only one dimension tool is used to create
them. The application places the appropriate type of dimension based on the geometry that you
select. When you are placing dimensions, the shortcut menu displays additional options for placing
the dimension.
Parametric Dimensions
The following illustration displays horizontal and vertical parametric dimensions and the shortcut
menu, which enables you to choose the type of dimension to place.
Creating Dimensional Constraints

You use the General Dimension tool to place dimensions on your sketch. You can produce linear,
aligned, angular, radial, and diameter dimensions with this single tool.

Access
General Dimension
Ribbon: Sketch tab > Constrain panel.
Keyboard Shortcut: D
Access
General Dimension
Ribbon: Sketch tab > Constrain panel.
Keyboard Shortcut: D
Procedure: Applying Linear Dimensions

The following steps describe how to apply a linear parametric dimension.
1. Click Sketch tab > Constrain panel > General Dimension.
2. Select the sketch element for the linear dimension and place the dimension.
3. Select the dimension and enter a new value.

4. Press ENTER or click the green check mark on the Edit Dimension dialog box to have the
geometry change to reflect the new dimension.
5. Right-click in the graphics window and select Done on the shortcut menu or continue
placing additional dimensions.
Procedure: Applying Radial/Diameter Dimensions

The following steps describe how to apply radial or diameter parametric dimensions.
1. Start the General Dimension tool.
2. Select the sketch element for the radial/diameter dimension and place the dimension.

Procedure: Applying Angular Dimensions
The following steps describe how to apply an angular parametric dimension.
2. Select each element for the angular dimension and place the dimension.
Note: Select each element at any location other than their endpoints.

Procedure: Creating Aligned Dimensions
The following steps describe how to apply an aligned parametric dimension.
2. Select the sketch element for the aligned dimension. Position the cursor near the geometry. Click
when the Aligned Dimension icon is displayed.
3. Place the dimension.
Instead of positioning your cursor near the geometry to cause the Aligned Dimension
icon to be displayed, you can also select the element as you do when creating a linear
dimension. Before positioning the dimension, right-click and set the dimension type as
an aligned dimension by clicking Aligned on the shortcut menu.

Dimension Values and Units
You click a dimension to define its value. If required, you can include specific units of measurement
such as millimeter, centimeter, meter, inch, and foot. It is not necessary to enter the suffix of the
default unit.
If your part consists of multiple units of measurement you must enter the non-default unit suffixes. For
example, if the default unit of measurement is millimeters, you would enter a value of 50 millimeters
as 50 with no suffix. To specify a value of 50 centimeters in the same part, you would enter 50 cm.
The application evaluates the values as you enter them. Values shown in red indicate an improper
value or format, while values shown in black are considered to be valid.
Unit suffixes and parameters are case-sensitive. When you enter a unit suffix, it must be entered in
lowercase. For example, 50 cm would be evaluated correctly, while 50 CM is not valid.
Edit Dimension Flyout Menu Options

When applying parametric dimensions, the following options are available in the Edit Dimension
flyout.
Option Description
Measure Use to measure another sketch element or 3D feature. The resulting value is
placed in the Edit Dimension dialog box.
Show Use to select a feature on the 3D part to display the underlying dimensions.
Dimensions After the dimensions are displayed, you can select a dimension for use in the
existing dimension. The dimension being referenced can be used alone or in a
formula.
Tolerance Displays the Tolerance dialog box, which you can use to assign a tolerance to
the parametric dimension.
Recently Displays a list of recently used values. Select any value for use in the current
Used Values dimension.

Additional Dimension Options
The following list represents additional options available on the shortcut menu when you place
dimensions.
Option Description
Edit Dimension While placing a dimension, right-click in the graphics window, and on
the shortcut menu click Edit Dimension. With this option set, the Edit
Dimension dialog box is displayed automatically after each dimension is
placed.
Radial/Diameter When you place a dimension on an arc or circle, right-click in the graphics
Dimension Options window and on the shortcut menu click Diameter or Radius to switch the
default mode of the current dimension. When dimensioning an arc, the
default mode is Radius. When dimensioning a circle, the default mode is
Diameter.

Option Description
Linear Dimension When you place a linear dimension to a line or two points at an angle,
Options right-click in the graphics window, and on the shortcut menu click the
desired dimension type.
Dimensioning to When you need to place a dimension to the quadrant of a circle, place
Quadrants the cursor near the quadrant and look for the quadrant dimension glyph.
Select the arc or circle at the point where the glyph is displayed.
About Dimension Display and Relationships

When you apply dimensions to your sketch elements additional options are available that you can
use to control the display of the dimensions. Also available are tools designed to assist you in creating
dimensions referenced from other features and/or dimensions.
Dimension Display
After you apply dimensions to your geometry, you can control the visibility of all dimensions in the
sketch and control the visual formatting of the displayed dimensions.
Being able to turn on and off the display of dimensions in a sketch means you have the flexibility when
working with complex sketch geometry to decide how much information you see. Turning off the
display of dimensions makes it easier to select the sketch geometry and review its general shape.
When dimensions are not displayed and you make a sketch invisible, the dimensions remain off when
you make the sketch visible again.

Using the optional display formats of Value, Name, Expression, Tolerance, and Precise Value can
help you evaluate the structure of equations in relational dimensions, toleranced dimensions, and
dimensions that contain equations.
Menu Description
Value The default mode. Displays the current value of the dimension at the precision
specified in the Document Settings dialog box.
Name Displays dimension names only. Dimension names are assigned automatically, or
you can specify them in the Parameters dialog box.

Menu Description
Expression Displays the dimensions as expressions. An expression can be as simple as d0 =

26.4375; or a formula can be used, such as d0 = d1/2.
Tolerance Displays the dimensions in a format associated with the specific type of tolerance
applied. If a tolerance has not been applied to the dimension, there is no effect on
the dimension display.
Precise Value Displays the dimension using its exact numeric value, regardless of the Precision
setting in the Document Settings dialog box.

Procedure: Selecting the Dimension Display Mode
The following steps describe how to select the mode for displaying model dimensions.
1. With nothing selected, right-click in the browser or graphic window.
2. On the shortcut menu, select Dimension Display and then click the required option in the
cascading menu.
Referencing Other Dimensions

When you define the value of a dimension, you can reference an existing dimension by selecting the
dimension in the graphics window. The dimension parameter name is automatically entered in the Edit
Dimension dialog box.
The illustration shows dimension d18 being created equal to dimension d17. When you want to
reference other dimensions in a new dimension, with the Edit Dimension dialog box open, select an
existing dimension to reference. Your cursor changes to indicate that you are referencing an existing
dimension. When you select the existing dimension, the parameter name of the dimension you
selected is entered in the Edit Dimension dialog box. A dimension that references another dimension
has fx: preceding its value.
Dimension being created.

Dimension being referenced.

Dimensions Stored as Parameters
Each dimension you create is automatically named and stored as a parameter in the current part file.
Selecting the Parameters tool on the ribbon, Manage tab, displays the Parameters dialog box which
lists the model parameters.
Note the parameter names d0 and d1. These names are generated each time a dimension is placed. If
you delete a dimension, its parameter is also deleted and the original dimension name is not used again
in the current part file. You can rename the default dimension names and modify their values in the
Parameters dialog box. In the previous illustration the parameter d2 is renamed to SleeveDia.
Quickly Change Parameters

You can change parameters on the fly to improve your productivity. While creating
dimensions, for example, you can enter Length=20 and the current parameter is
renamed to Length and the value is set to 20.
Guidelines for Dimensioning Sketches

Applying parametric dimensions is straightforward because you use a single command.
Following these guidelines assures that dimensions are properly applied to your sketch.
Guidelines for Dimensioning Sketches

Consider the following guidelines when adding dimensions to your sketch:
Use geometric constraints when possible. For example, place a perpendicular constraint instead of
an angle dimension of 90 degrees.
Place large dimensions before small ones.
Incorporate relationships between dimensions. For example, if two dimensions are supposed to be
the same value, reference one dimension to the other. With this relationship, if the first dimension
changes, the other dimension changes as well.
Consider both dimensional and geometric constraints to meet the overall design intent.
These guidelines are not presented in any particular order and you do not apply all of them on every
sketch.

Example of Relationships Between Dimensions
Building relationships between dimensions captures your design intent. In this illustration, the intent
is for the circle to always remain centered on the part. Building this dimensional relationship ensures
that if the sketch width or length changes, the hole also moves in order to remain centered on the
sketch. The dimension display is set to expression for clarity.
In the following illustration, the length is changed. Notice how the hole moved to maintain its
centered position.
Without a dimensional relationship, a hole that was originally centered does not adjust if the length is
changed.

Exercise: Dimension Sketches
In this exercise, you apply dimensions to a sketch. 2. To rotate the view:
Using the techniques learned in this lesson, you On the ViewCube, click Front.
Click the arrow to rotate the
apply a variety of parametric dimensions to the view counterclockwise 90 degrees.
sketch geometry.
3. Constrain drag the sketch on various

elements to examine the constraint
conditions.
3. In the browser, double-click Sketch1 to activate

The completed exercise the sketch.
4. Place an overall parametric dimension.

1. Open INV_004_Dimensions.ipt. Start the General Dimension tool.
Select the top left and right corners of the
sketch.
Place the dimension and select it.
In the Edit Dimension dialog box, enter
Length=75.
Click the green check mark.
5. Set the Edit Dimension dialog box to automatic.

With the General Dimension tool still
active, right-click in the graphics window.
Click Edit Dimension.
The Edit Dimension dialog box is
displayed automatically as you place
dimensions.

6. Add a vertical dimension in relation to the Add the horizontal dimension to the other leg.
overall dimension just created. Instead of entering a numeric value, click the
Select the lower-left and upper-left corners previous dimension value to create a
of the sketch. parametric relationship.
Height=30.
8. Add additional dimensions as shown. Create

parametric relationships to ensure
symmetrical design intent. Do not be overly
concerned with placement as you create the
dimensions. You can drag the dimensions to
locations after all of them have been created.
Double-click each dimension and adjust its
value to those in the following illustration if
necessary.
7. Add a horizontal dimension the controls

the size of the legs. 9. On the ribbon, click Finish Sketch to exit
Check to make sure that the General the sketch.
Dimension tool is still active. 10. On the ViewCube, click the Home icon.
Select points as indicated.
Leg_W=4.

Chapter Summary
Properly constrained 2D sketches are the fundamental building blocks of parametric parts. By being
able to fully constrain the size and shape of your sketches, you can achieve the highest quality
parametric part designs.
Use sketch tools to create 2D sketch geometry.
Use geometric constraints to control sketch geometry.
Apply parametric dimensions to your sketch geometry.

Chapter
Basic Shape Design

In earlier lessons, you learned how to create and constrain 2D sketches. In this chapter, you are
introduced to the fundamentals of basic shape design by learning how to extrude, revolve, and sweep
2D sketches to create 3D features. This chapter also covers the proper techniques for adding multiple
sketched features to your 3D design, creating more intelligent sketches by referencing existing part
edges and using construction geometry, and modifying your parametric parts at any stage of the
design process.
Objectives
Create features using the Extrude and Revolve tools.
Use reference and construction geometry.
Use the browser and shortcut menus to edit parametric parts.
Create, locate, and utilize work features to perform modeling tasks.
Chapter 7: Basic Shape Design 1

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features
Two basic types of features exist: sketched features and placed features. The term sketched feature
refers to a 3D feature that is based on a 2D sketch. The term placed feature refers to a 3D feature that
you place on the existing faces and edges of the part, and which does not require a sketch. This lesson
describes sketched features and how to create them using the Extrude and Revolve tools.
Because most 3D models include some combination of extruded and revolved features, a basic
understanding of how to create them is essential to successful model creation.
The following illustration shows a 3D conveyor model that was created using multiple extrusion
features.
Objectives
Define sketched features and their attributes.
Use the Extrude tool to create extruded features.
Use the Revolve tool to create revolved features.
Use the Operation and Extent termination options when adding 3D features.
Orient sketch planes based on other planes or faces.
2 Chapter 7: Basic Shape Design

About Sketched Features
You create most 3D models by combining multiple extruded and revolved features. You start by creating a
2D sketch that represents the basic shape of the part and then use different feature creation tools to turn
that 2D sketch into a 3D feature.
Definition of Sketched Features

Sketched features are 3D features that are created from an existing 2D sketch. These features serve as
the basis for most of your designs. When you create a sketched feature, you begin by first creating the
sketch or profile for the 3D feature. For simple sketched features, this profile usually represents a 2D
section of the 3D feature being created. For more complex sketched features, multiple sketches can be
created and used within one sketched feature.
The first sketch feature you create is considered the base feature. After you create the base feature,
additional sketched and/or placed features are added to the 3D model. As you add the additional
sketched features, options are available that control whether the secondary sketched features add or
remove material from the existing 3D geometry.
Sketched Feature Attributes

The key attributes of sketched features include the following:
An unconsumed sketch is required (not used by another feature).
Sketches can be used for both base and secondary features.
The result of the sketched feature can add or remove mass from the 3D geometry.
Consumed and Unconsumed Sketches

When you create a new part, the initial sketch is used as the basis of your 3D geometry. After the
sketch is created, you can create a sketched feature, an extrusion for example, to create 3D geometry
from the initial sketch. When you create the 3D sketched feature, the sketch itself becomes consumed
by the 3D sketched feature. Prior to this time, the sketch is considered unconsumed and can be used
for any sketched feature.

Unconsumed Sketch
The following illustration shows the initial sketch before it is consumed by the sketched feature.
Consumed Sketches
The following illustration shows sketches consumed by the sketched features. In the browser, the
sketches are nested below the sketched feature in which they were used.

Typical Sketched Feature Creation
This illustration represents a typical workflow for creating a 3D part based upon sketched features. The
base sketch is created, which is used to create the base feature. Secondary sketches and features are
then added to the 3D model.
Creating Extruded Features

You use the Extrude tool to create extruded features from existing sketch profiles. Considered sketched
features, extruded features require an unconsumed and visible sketch to be available. If the sketch
contains a single closed profile, that profile is selected automatically when you start the Extrude tool. If
the sketch contains more than one profile, you are required to select the profiles to be included in the
extruded feature.

Examples of Simple Extruded Profiles
In this example, the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded
feature.
In this example, the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded
feature with holes.
Access
Extrude
Ribbon: Model tab > Create panel
Toolbar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: E

Extrude Options
The Extrude dialog box is displayed when you start the Extrude tool.
The following features and options are available in the Extrude dialog box:
Dialog Box Option Description

Access
Profile Use to select geometry to be included in the extrusion. A red arrow

indicates that no profiles have been selected for the extrusion feature.
Solids The Solids selection tool is only active when the part contains more
than one solid body. Use to determine to which solid body the feature
is going to be applied.
Output Use to specify the desired output option, Solid or Surface.
Direction Select the direction icon or click and drag the preview of the extrusion
in the desired direction.
Operation Use to create an initial feature or add volume to models with Join.
Remove volume from models with Cut. Create a new feature from
shared volume of two features with Intersect.
New Use to create the extruded feature as a new solid body instead of
Solid using boolean operations to join, cut, or intersect the feature with an
existing solid body.

Procedure: Creating an Extruded Feature
The following steps describe how to create an extruded feature.
1. Create a new sketch.
2. Click Model tab > Create panel > Extrude.

3. In the Extrude dialog box, adjust the options as required.
4. The extruded feature is created.

Creating Revolved Features
You use the Revolve tool to create revolved features from existing sketch profiles. You can revolve the
profile at a full 360 degrees or at a specified angle. The Revolve tool requires an unconsumed and
visible sketch to be available. When you start the Revolve tool, if the sketch contains a single closed
profile, that profile is selected automatically.
Examples of Simple Revolved Profiles

In the following illustration, the sketch contains a closed profile and one centerline. When you start
the Revolve tool, the centerline is automatically selected as the axis of revolution.
In the following illustration, the sketch contains a single closed loop profile, reference geometry, and
one centerline. The profile is revolved with the Cut feature relationship.

Access
Revolve
Ribbon: Model tab > Create panel
Toolbar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: R
Revolve Options
The Revolve dialog box is displayed when you start the Revolve tool.

The following features and options are available in the Revolve dialog box:
Dialog Box Access Option Description
Profile Use to select geometry to include in the revolved feature. A

red arrow indicates that no profiles have been selected for
the revolved feature.
Axis Use to select the line segment to use as the axis for the
revolve feature.
Tip: If the sketch contains a centerline, it is selected
automatically as the axis.
Solids The Solids selection tool is only active when the part contains
more than one solid body. Use to determine to which solid
body the feature is going to be applied.
Output Use to specify the desired output option, Solid or Surface.
New Use to create a new solid body from the revolved feature.
Solid
Angle Use to specify an angle and direction for the revolution.
Full Use to revolve the profile 360 degrees.

Facts About Revolved Features
If the sketch contains a centerline, it is selected automatically as the axis for the revolved feature.
If the sketch contains more than one profile, you are required to select the profiles to include in
the feature.
If the profile being revolved is closed, you can choose between a solid or surface for the result of
the revolution.
If the profile being revolved is open, the revolution results in a surface.
Procedure: Creating a Revolved Feature

The following steps describe how to create a revolved feature.
1. Create a new sketch containing a profile to revolve. If the profile is being revolved about a
centerline, consider using the Centerline style on the line segment.
2. Click Model tab > Create panel > Revolve. In the Revolve dialog box, adjust the
options as required.

3. Create additional sketch geometry as required.
4. Start the Revolve tool. Select the geometry to be included in the revolved feature. Adjust the
options as required.
Specifying Operation and Extents

You use the Join, Cut, and Intersect operations to control how the feature you are creating affects
existing features or Solid Bodies. By default, the Cut and Intersect operations are not available with
base features and the New Solid button is automatically activated since the base feature will by
default create a New Solid.
You use the Extents options to define the termination of a feature. For example, you can extrude a 2D
sketch a specific distance or you can terminate the feature on an existing face of the model.

Example of Operation and Extents
In the following example, multiple sketched features with different operations and extents were used
to define the shape of the part.
Specifying Operation: Join, Cut, and Intersect

When you create sketched and placed features, you can adjust operation options to control the effect
of the current feature on existing features. These operations are not available for the first feature of
the part.
The feature relationship options are available when using Extrude, Revolve, Loft, Sweep, and Coil. The
following illustration shows an example of these options in the Extrude dialog box.

Use the following options with the Extrude tool.
Dialog Option Description

Box
Access
Join This option joins the result of the extruded feature being created to
existing part geometry. Using this option results in material being added
to the existing part. A green preview indicates material is being added.
Cut This option cuts the result of the extruded feature being created from the
existing part. Using this option results in material being removed from the
existing part. A red preview indicates material is being removed.

Dialog Option Description
Box
Access
Intersect This option removes material from the existing part by comparing the
volume of the existing features and the feature being created and leaving
only the volume shared between the existing features and the new
feature. A blue preview indicates an Intersect relationship.
New Solid Best Practice for Factory Assets.

Using the New Solid option will create a new solid body from the feature definition.
Solid Bodies allow designers to create a single part model that represents multiple
components. The Conveyor part model in the following image uses multiple solid
bodies to represent the frame and belt of a conveyor in a single part file. This
practice will greatly reduce the overall number of parts in the final Factory
Assembly.

Specifying Extents
When you create extruded and revolved features, you can specify termination options for the feature
in the dialog box. Depending on the option you choose, different interface options are available. By
specifying termination options, you can control where the feature starts and ends.
The following illustration shows the Extents options that are available in the Extrude dialog box.
Option Description
Distance This option extrudes the profile according to the distance specified.
To Next This option extrudes the profile to the next possible face or plane. Use
the Terminator icon to select a solid or surface on which to terminate the
extrusion.

Option Description
To This option extrudes the profile to terminate on the selected face, plane, or
point. If the selected termination face does not completely enclose the
extrusion profile, select the Extended Face option to terminate the feature
on the extended face.
From To This option extrudes the profile by starting the extrusion at the face selected
with the From option and ending the extrusion at the second face selected.
If necessary, use the extend face option.

Option Description
All This option extrudes the profile all the way through the part. If the part
changes, the extruded feature continues to go all the way through the part.
Extended Face This option extends a selected face with the To and From To options. The
extrude does not build the extrusion if the sketched feature extends beyond
the termination face. With the Extend option selected, a termination face
becomes infinite in size.

Additional Extents Options for Revolve
The following options are available for the Revolve tool.
Option Description
Full This option revolves the profile a complete revolution around a specified
axis. If the part changes, the revolved feature continues to go all the way
around the part.
Angle This option revolves the profile a specified number of degrees around an
axis.

Procedure: Specifying Operations
The following steps describe how to specify operations.
1. Create additional sketch geometry on an existing feature.
2. Start the Extrude tool.

3. In the Extrude dialog box, adjust the operations as required. In this example, Join is selected.
4. The additional extruded feature is added to the part.

Procedure: Specifying Extents
The following steps describe how to specify extents.
1. Create additional sketch geometry on existing features as required.
2. Start the Extrude tool.

3. In the Extrude dialog box, adjust the options as required. In this example, All is selected.
4. The additional extruded feature is added to the part.

Orienting Sketches
When you create the first sketch for the base feature of your part, you usually use the default XY
origin plane. However, the sketches that you create to add new features to the part often need to be
oriented to other part faces.
The sketch plane has been oriented to the selected part face in the following illustration.
Procedure: Creating Sketch Planes on a Part Face

The following steps describe how to create a new sketch plane aligned to a selected face.
1. Right-click in a face of the part and select New Sketch.
2. The sketch plane is created on the selected face.

Procedure: Creating Sketch Planes Offset from a Part Face
The following steps describe how to create a new sketch plane offset from a selected face.
1. Start the Create 2D Sketch tool.
2. Click in the face and drag the sketch plane away from the selected face.
3. In the Offset dialog box, enter a value for the offset and click the green check mark. The sketch
plane is created offset from the selected face at the distance you specified.

Exercise: Create Extruded
2. Extrude the two top profiles.
Features Start the Extrude tool.
Select the two top profiles.
In this exercise, you build an Index Slide part file For Distance, enter Width=30 (1).
using several extruded features. Some initial Click the Symmetrical Option (2).
geometry has been created, but you are required to Click OK.
create other sketch geometry.
Create Extruded Features Specific Distances

3. Use the Shell command to remove the top and
In this portion of the exercise, you extrude an existing end faces, creating a 1 channel.
sketch to create a base feature. Then you create a
new sketch and extrude it a specific distance to create
Start the Shell command.
another sketched feature. Click the select the top and end faces
Enter 1 for the Thickness value.
1. Open INV_005_Extrusion.ipt. Click OK.

6. Cut out the leg openings.
4. Sharing a sketch.
In the Browser, expand Extrusion 1. Right click Start the Extrude tool.
on sketch 1 and select Share Sketch. Select the two leg profiles.
Enter Distance (Width-2)-Leg_W-Leg_W.
Click the Cut option.
Click the Symmetrical option.
Click OK.
5. Extrude the legs of the conveyor.

Start the Extrude tool.
7. Extrude the Belt Feature as a secondary Solid
Select the two log profiles. Body.
For the Distance, enter Width-2.
Start the Extrude tool.
Select the Symmetrical option. Select the Belt Profile
Click OK. Set the Extents option to Between (1).
Select the two interior faces of the
channel section.
Click the New Solid option (2).
Click OK.

8. Turn off the visibility of the Shared Sketch.
In the Browser, right click the shared
sketch and select Visibility.
9. Change the color of the belt feature.

Expand the Solid Bodies folder and selectSolid2.
Right click and select properties from the menu.
Change the Body Color Style to Black (1).

Exercise: Create Revolved
Features
1. Start a New English part.
In this exercise, you create a simple curved Draw the initial 2 point rectangle.
conveyor part file using the Revolve tool. The 2.
initial sketch will be created to start the Constrain the midpoint of the lower horizontal
exercise. The Frame and Belt will be line to the origin point of the file using a
constrained vertically in line with the origin of Coincident constraint.
the file. The axis of revolution is drawn to the
right of the initial profiles.
Note: If necessary, project the 0,0 center point

into the current sketch plane.
Select the 4 lines that make up the rectangle
Create Revolved Features that Add and then click the Construction tool on the
Material to the Part format panel.
Dimension the horizontal and vertical lines as
In this portion of the exercise, you will create a shown in the following image.
sketch and revolve it into the base feature. You
create another sketch and revolve it, creating Note: Dimensions are displayed as expressions
another sketched feature that adds material to the in this image.
part.

3. Create the 2 point rectangles shown in the 5. Use the Revolve tool to create the first revolve
following image. feature.
Draw the outer rectangle constraining the
two corners to the top of the construction Start the Revolve tool on the Create
outline. panel.
Use the Offset command to create the inner Select the two rectangular profiles.
rectangle. Select the Axis selector in the dialog box
Dimension the rectangle as shown. (1) and then click the axis line.
Note: A parametric relationship should be Set the Extents option to Angle (2) and
established between the dimensions that set the value to Angle=90 (3).
position the inner rectangle. Change the direction option as shown in
the image below (4).
4. Draw the revolution axis to the right of the

existing profiles as shown below.
Dimension the axis line with the value
Radius_Inside=36.
Finish the sketch.

6. Use the Shell tool on the modify panel to Set the Value to Angle (3).
create the channel feature. Change the direction option (4) as shown in
Start the Shell tool and select the top the image below.
and end faces. Click the New Solid option (5) to create a
Enter a thickness value of 1 separate solid body.
Click OK. Click OK.
7. Share the original sketch to create the

secondary revolve feature.
In the browser, expand the first
revolve feature.
Right-click on Sketch1 and select
Share Sketch from the menu.
9. Turn off the visibility of the shared sketch.

In the browser, right click on the shared
sketch and select Visibility from the menu.
8. Use the Revolve tool to create the Belt feature

as a new solid body.
Start the Revolve tool and select the inner
rectangular profile.
Use the Axis selector (1) and click the axis
line.
Set the Extents option to Angle (2).

10. Add full round fillets to the belt feature.
Start the Fillet command on the modify
panel.
Select the Full Round option (1).
Select the top, end, and bottom faces on
one end of the belt feature.
Click OK.
Add the opposite fillet using the same
process.

Note: The legs of the curve conveyor will be
created in another exercise.
11. Change the color of the Belt solid body.

Expand the Solid Bodies folder in the
browser.
Right click on Solid2 and select
Properties from the menu.
Set the Body Color Style (1) to black.
Click OK.

Lesson: Intermediate Sketching
This lesson describes the use of reference and construction geometry to add design intelligence to
sketches on your parts. As your part progresses, you add multiple sketched features. Each sketch may
require the use of reference and construction geometry to fully constrain your sketches.
In the following illustration, reference geometry and construction lines are used to constrain the
rectangle geometry on the face of the part.
Objectives
Describe sketch linetypes and their behavior.
Use the 2D sketch tools to create construction geometry.
Project part edges onto a sketch plane.

About Sketch Linetypes
As your part design progresses, you need additional sketching tools to capture design intent within
your sketch and to establish parametric relationships to existing faces and edges on your 3D part. As
you create 2D sketch geometry, such as lines, arcs, circles, and prismatic shapes, you can use different
linetypes for different purposes.
In the following example, several linetypes are used to define, position, and constrain geometry on
the part.
Normal sketch geometry

Construction geometry
Reference geometry
Centerline geometry
Definition of Sketch Linetypes

The following illustration shows the appearance of the different linetypes. Different linetypes display
in different colors in the sketch environment; however the exact color is based on the color scheme
you have selected. In the following illustration, using the Presentation scheme, lines 2 and 3 are
displayed orange, while the reference geometry (4) is green. The reference geometry consists of
projected edges of the solid model (arrows).

Sketch Linetypes
The following are the different linetypes and how they are used.
Linetype Description
Normal This is the default linetype in a sketch. Normal lines define the profile or
path that is used to define the shape of a sketched feature.
Construction Construction lines are used to aid in constructing and constraining

normal geometry. You use construction lines when you need additional
geometry to constrain a sketch but do not want that additional geometry
to participate in defining the profile for the feature.
Centerline The Centerline linetype is another type of Construction linetype. It can be

used to define the centerline about which to revolve a profile to create
a revolved feature. When you add dimensions between centerlines and
other sketch geometry, they are treated as diameter dimensions.
Reference Reference geometry is geometry that is projected onto your sketch from
existing part vertices, edges, and faces. You use reference geometry
to constrain normal sketch geometry to existing features on the part.
Reference geometry remains associative to the original part vertices,
edges, and faces. You can also use reference geometry to define the profile
or path for a sketched feature.

Normal Linetype Example
The notched rectangle sketch on the left, consumed in the block feature on the right, has been
created with the Normal linetype. While sketching, normal lines are represented as solid lines.
Construction Linetype Example

In the following example, the diagonal dotted line in the left image is a construction line. The
endpoints of the construction line are constrained to the opposite corners of the face. The midpoint of
the construction line is used to orient the center of the circle, which is defined with a normal linetype.
The circle is then extruded with the Cut option to define a shaft opening in this block.
Reference Geometry Example

The current sketch plane in this example is coplanar with the side of the base of the part. Reference
geometry is projected to the sketch plane from the perimeter of the part, from the hole through the
part, and from the spherical cutout on the top.

Centerline Linetype Example
The dashdot line on the left is a centerline. The circle is revolved around the centerline to create the
torus feature on the right.
Creating and Using Construction Geometry

You can use construction geometry to help you control and define a sketch by using geometric
construction techniques rather than complex dimensions and formulas. You can constrain and
dimension construction geometry like any other 2D sketch geometry. You can use construction
geometry as a reference for dimensions to other normal sketch geometry, as well as to constrain
normal sketch geometry.
In the following illustration, construction lines (1) are used to position the slot from the center of the
circle and along the angled construction line.

Tools for Creating Construction and Centerline Geometry
The ribbon contains two buttons for creating construction and centerline geometry. Unlike other
toolbar buttons, these buttons also indicate the current status of the selected geometry or drawing
mode. When you click a button, you activate that specific mode. The selected mode remains active
until you click the button again.
Access
Construction Geometry
Ribbon: Sketch tab > Format panel
You can use the following buttons to create or change existing geometry types.
Icon Option Description
Construction When this button is selected, all 2D geometry drawn is construction

Geometry geometry. To change existing geometry to construction, select the
geometry, then click this button.
Centerline When this button is selected, all 2D geometry drawn is centerline

Geometry geometry. To change existing geometry to centerline, select the geometry,
then click this button.
To convert normal geometry or dimensions, select the geometry or dimension and

then click the appropriate button on the ribbon.

Procedure: Creating Construction Geometry
The following steps outline the procedure for creating construction geometry.
1. On the ribbon, click the Construction tool.
2. Using standard sketching tools, create the required 2D geometry.
In the following example, a construction line was sketched between the opposite corners of a
rectangle. The lines defining the rectangle are normal sketch lines.
3. Click the Construction tool again to return to creating normal sketch geometry.
Procedure: Converting Existing Geometry to Construction Geometry

The following steps outline the procedure for converting existing sketch geometry to construction
geometry.
1. To change existing geometry to construction geometry, select the geometry in the graphics
window.
In the following example, a circle was selected.
2. On the ribbon, click the Construction button. The selected geometry is changed to construction
geometry.

Procedure: Creating Centerline Geometry
The following steps outline the procedure for creating centerline geometry.
1. On the ribbon, click the Centerline tool.
2. Using standard sketching tools, create the required 2D geometry.
In the following example, a vertical centerline was sketched to the left of the normal sketch
geometry.
3. Click the Centerline tool again to return to creating normal sketch geometry.
Procedure: Converting Existing Geometry to Centerline Geometry

The following steps outline the procedure for converting existing sketch geometry to centerline
geometry.
1. To change existing geometry to centerline geometry, select the geometry in the graphics
window.
In the following example, a horizontal line that bisects the slot shape is selected.
2. On the ribbon, click the Centerline tool. The selected geometry is changed to centerline
geometry.

Creating and Using Reference Geometry
Reference geometry is geometry that is created when existing vertices and edges of the part are
projected onto the active sketch plane. Reference geometry is not drawn; rather it is created when
you define a new sketch plane on a planar face of the part or by using the Project Geometry tool.
Without reference geometry, you cannot dimension or constrain sketch geometry to the existing
features on the 3D part.
New Sketches and Reference Geometry

When you create new sketches on a planar face of the part, the edges of the selected face are
automatically projected onto the sketch as reference geometry. You can use this reference geometry:
To dimension to other sketch geometry.
For relational constraints to other sketch geometry.
As the basis for defining the path or profile for a sketched feature.
The following example demonstrates how reference geometry is created and used when defining a
new sketch on an existing part face.
A new sketch is created on an Create additional sketch geometry and use the
existing part face. The coplanar projected reference geometry for dimensions or
edges of the existing part face are constraints.
automatically projected onto the
new sketch.

Project Geometry Tool
You use the Project Geometry tool to project additional part vertices and edges that are not coplanar
to the sketch plane onto the sketch as reference geometry. When you use the Project Geometry
tool, you are prompted to select geometry to project onto the current sketch plane. As you select the
geometry, it is projected onto the current sketch plane as reference geometry and is always associative
to the original source geometry. This means that if the source geometry changes, the reference
geometry also changes. However, after a reference geometry linetype is changed to another linetype, it
loses its associativity.
Projecting Part Edges

Following are some key attributes for projecting part edges:
Can be used as the basis for dimensions to new sketch geometry.
Can be used to apply relational constraints to new sketch geometry.
Cannot be dimensioned.
Cannot be trimmed.
Can be mirrored.
Cannot be drawn; can only be created by using Project Geometry tool or by selecting the
Autoproject Edges option.
Access
Project Geometry
Ribbon: Sketch tab > Draw panel
Toolbar: 2D Sketch Panel
Autoproject Options
You can use the Autoproject functionality to speed projection of geometry to the sketch plane.

Autoproject for Sketch Creation
When you check the box next to the Autoproject Edges for Sketch Creation and Edit option on the
Sketch tab in the Application Options dialog box, the edges of the selected planar face are
automatically projected onto the new sketch when you create a new sketch plane on an existing face.
Autoproject Edges
When the Autoproject Edges During Curve Creation option is selected, you can autoproject geometry
by hovering the pointer over the geometry to be projected while sketching.

Sketching Shortcut Menu
While sketching, right-click in the drawing area and select AutoProject. This enables you to hover
over geometry to automatically project onto the current sketch plane.
Procedure: Referencing Model Edge Geometry

The following steps outline how to create reference geometry during curve creation in a sketch by
autoprojecting model edge geometry.
1. Create a new sketch on the existing part.
2. Begin sketching the required geometry. Right-click in the graphics window and select
AutoProject in the shortcut menu.

3. Hover over the geometry to project. It is automatically projected to the current sketch plane.
4. Continue sketching the required geometry as required.

Tip: You may consider turning off the AutoProject option until it is needed again. This action
prevents the accidental projection of geometry while sketching over existing part features.

Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts
This lesson describes the various methods used to make changes to parametric part models. You can
edit sketches, modify features, and create and use parameters while making modifications to your
models.
Statistics show that designers spend more time making part modification and engineering changes
than they spend creating new parts. You need to be able to modify your existing part models
accurately and efficiently.
The following illustration shows a parametric part model before and after implementing changes to
existing features.
Objectives
Edit features from the browser.
Edit sketches from the browser or toolbar.
Create and modify parameters and equations.

Editing Features
After you create features on your parametric part, you can modify those features at any time.
Sometimes all you need to change is the size of the feature. Other times you may need to make a more
significant change. Autodesk Inventor provides multiple options for editing your designs.
The following illustration shows a part model before, and then after the extrusion distance was
modified.
Options for Editing Features

There are three basic ways to modify features on your parametric parts. With both sketched and
placed features, you can display and modify the dimensions to simply change the size of the feature,
or you can access the feature dialog box to make a more significant change, like changing an operation,
extrusion direction, or the extents of the feature. For sketched features you also have the option to
modify the sketch geometry. For example, you can add and delete dimensions or constraints, or you
can even modify the shape of the sketch by changing the sketch geometry.
In the following illustration, the left browser image shows the three options for editing a sketched
feature. The browser image on the right shows the two options for editing placed features.

Editing Features Using Show Dimensions
If you want to change the size of a feature, you can use the Show Dimensions option to change the
value of an existing dimension. All sketch dimensions are displayed as well as other dimensions that
are used to define the feature size, such as extrusion depth, revolution angle, or taper value.
Editing Features Using Edit Feature

When you use the Edit Feature option to edit a feature, you are presented with the same dialog box
that you used when you created the feature. You can change the parameters, such as distance,
feature relationships, and termination options. You can also reselect geometry to be included in the
feature.

Access
Show Dimensions
Browser: Double-click the feature. (Note: Dimensions are only visible on the underlying
sketch while the feature is being edited.)
Browser: Right-click the feature > Show Dimensions.
Access
Edit Feature
Browser: Double-click the feature.

Browser: Right-click the feature > Edit Feature.
Procedure: Modifying a Feature Using Show Dimensions

The following steps describe how to edit a feature using the Show Dimensions option.
1. Right-click the feature in the browser and select Show Dimensions. All the controlling
dimensions are displayed on the feature in the graphics window.
2. Double-click the dimension to modify and enter a new value in the Edit Dimension dialog box.
3. Click Update in the Standard toolbar to apply the changes to the part.
Procedure: Modifying a Placed Feature Using Edit Feature

The following steps describe how to edit a placed feature using the Edit Feature option.
1. Right-click the feature in the browser and click Edit Feature. The dialog box used to create the
feature is displayed.
2. Change the settings or values in the dialog box, then click OK. The part automatically updates.
Procedure: Editing Extruded Features

The following steps describe how to edit extruded features.
1. In the browser, right-click the feature. Click Edit Feature.
2. In the Extrude dialog box, adjust the options as required to edit the feature.
Procedure: Editing Revolved Features

The following steps describe how to edit revolved features.
1. In the browser, right-click the feature. Click Edit Feature.
2. In the Revolve dialog box, adjust the options as required.

Editing Sketches
As you build your parametric model, you create multiple sketches. When the sketch is used by a
feature such as Extrude or Revolve, the sketch becomes consumed by the feature and is displayed
under the feature in the browser. You can see each of the sketches in the browser by expanding the
particular feature(s). Even though this sketch is consumed by the feature, it can still be modified.
The following illustration shows how sketches are consumed by the feature for which they are used.
The Extrusion1 feature has consumed Sketch1 and Extrusion2 has consumed Sketch4.
Sketch2 and Sketch5 are unconsumed sketches.
Editing Consumed Sketches

One powerful way to modify a feature is to edit the sketch. Editing the sketch places the model in
a rolled-back state, where only the features existing at the time this sketch was created are visible.
When you edit sketches, you are returned to the sketch environment and the panel bar changes,
providing you with access to all the sketch tools initially used in creating the sketch. You can add,
replace, or delete dimensions or constraints and even modify the sketch geometry. To return to the
part modeling environment, click Return on the Standard toolbar.

In the following illustration, Sketch1 has been consumed by Extrusion1 in the browser. You can expand
the Extrusion1 feature to expose and edit the consumed sketch. Notice the browser background color
changes to indicate the active sketch.
Access
Edit Sketch
Browser: Double-click the sketch.

Browser: Right-click the feature > Edit Sketch.
Toolbar: Standard > Sketch > Select the sketch in the browser.

Procedure: Editing Sketches
The following steps describe how to edit sketches.
1. In the browser, right-click the feature or sketch and select Edit Sketch.
2. After the sketch has been activated for editing, you can make changes to geometry, dimensions,
and constraints.
3. Continue to make edits to the sketch as required.

4. When you have finished editing the sketch, on the ribbon, click Finish Sketch to exit the sketch
and return to the part model. The changes in the sketch are applied to the 3D features of the
part.

Lesson: Using Parameters
When you establish a relationship between one dimension and another, you can incorporate basic
design intent into your model and quickly modify a model. You can define and control complex
relationships by creating mathematical equations in a dimension or user-defined parameter.
Equations can range from simple equations to more complex equations that include complex internal
parameters.
The Parameters dialog box is shown here. The Key Parameters control specific design values. These
parameters are a crucial to the eventual publication of Autodesk Factory Design Suite assets.
Access
Parameters
Ribbon: Manage tab > Parameters panel
To establish a valid relationship to a parameter name, the spelling and capitalization

must exactly match the name displayed in the Parameters dialog box. Select a custom
parameter name from the list to ensure that spelling and capitalization match.

Parameters Dialog Box
The Parameters dialog box is displayed when you start the Parameters tool.
The following illustration shows the Parameters dialog box with model, reference, and user
parameters. Notice that some model parameters were renamed to clarify use and facilitate access.
The equations in this example range from a single numeric value to more complex equations that use
functions and parameters.
Managing Parameters
Every dimension that you add when you create or assemble parts is accessible in the Parameters
dialog box. You can manage parameters in the Parameters dialog box to accomplish the following
tasks:
Create new user parameters.
Change the name of model and user parameters to add meaning. For example, you can give
model parameters a generic letter d and an incremental number (d0, d1, d2, and so on).
Change the unit of measure to match your design data. For example, you can create a user
parameter to store a volume value and use it later in an equation to calculate the size of a part.
Establish a mathematical equation to calculate a value.
Add or adjust the tolerance or precision for a dimension.
Adjust a dimension with tolerances at the maximum, minimum, median, or nominal value.
Select a parameter to export to a custom iProperty value.
Add a general comment to explain the function or purpose of a parameter.
Mark Key Parameters for Factory Asset Publication.
Add multiple values for specific key parameters.

List Parameters
You can select an existing custom parameter name for any dimension value. Right-click the value
or click the arrow button on the right side of the value and click List Parameters to display a list of
available custom parameter names.
In this image, you right-click the value 10 This image shows the Parameters list that opens
or select List Parameters. when you select List Parameters.
Using Equations and Parameters

You can use equations wherever you can enter a numeric value. For example, you can write equations
in the Edit Dimension dialog box, feature dialog boxes, and the Parameters dialog box. Equations can
vary in complexity, and you can use them to calculate feature sizes, calculate assembly constraint
offsets or angles, or simulate motion among several components.
Equations can be simple or contain many algebraic operators, prefixes, and functions. For example,
here is a simple equation:
2 ul * (6 + 3)
The following complex equation uses internal parameters such as pi:
( PI rad /5 ul + (25 deg * PI rad / 180 deg ) )
Supported Algebraic Operators

The following table lists the algebraic operators supported by Autodesk Inventor.
Operator Meaning
+ addition
- subtraction
% floating point modulo

Operator Meaning
* multiplication
/ division
^ power
( expression delimiter
) expression delimiter
; delimiter for multiargument functions.
Supported Unit Prefixes

The following table lists the unit prefixes supported by Autodesk Inventor.
Prefix Symbol Value
exa E 1.0e18
peta P 1.0e15
tera T 1.0e12
giga G 1.0e9
mega M 1.0e6
kilo k 1.0e3
hecto h 1.0e2
deca da 1.0e1
deci d 1.0e-1
centi c 1.0e-2
milli m 1.0e-3
micro micro 1.0e-6
nano n 1.0e-9

Prefix Symbol Value
pico p 1.0e-12
femto f 1.0e-15
atto a 1.0e-18
When you use unit prefixes in an equation, enter the prefix symbol. Do not enter the prefix itself. For
example, an equation that includes the unit nanometer might look like this: 3.5 ul * 2.6 nm.
When you add the unit prefix for nano to the meter unit, your equation is calculated based on the
length of 2.6 nanometers.
Prefix symbols are case sensitive. You must enter them exactly as they appear in the
previous table.
Supported Functions
The following table lists the supported functions.
Syntax Returns Unit Type Expected Unit Type
cos(expr) unitless angle
sin(expr) unitless angle
tan(expr) unitless angle
acos(expr) angle unitless
asin(expr) angle unitless
atan(expr) angle unitless
cosh(expr) unitless angle
tanh(expr) unitless angle
acosh(expr) angle unitless
asinh(expr) angle unitless
sqrt(expr) unit^1/2 any

Syntax Returns Unit Type Expected Unit Type
sign(expr) unitless any (Return 0 if negative, 1 if positive.)
exp(expr) unitless any (Return exponential power of expression; for

example, return 2 for 100, 3 for 1000, and so on.)
floor(expr) unitless unitless (Next lowest whole number.)
ceil(expr) unitless unitless (Next highest whole number.)
round(expr) unitless unitless (Closest whole number.)
abs(expr) any any
max(expr1;expr2) any any
min(expr1;expr2) any any
ln(expr) unitless unitless
log(expr) unitless unitless
pow(expr1;expr2) unit^expr2 any and unitless, respectively
random(expr) unitless unitless
isolate(expr;unit;unit) any any
Function names are case sensitive. You must enter them exactly as they appear in
the previous table.

Unit Types
The unit type that you use with an equation depends on the type of data that you are evaluating. For
example, to evaluate a linear or angular value, you typically use a unit type of millimeters, inches, or
degrees (mm, in, or deg).
Some equations must return a unitless value, for example, an equation to solve the number of
occurrences in a pattern. You designate a unitless value with the characters ul. For example, 5 ul
means that the equation has been evaluated and returned the number 5, as in the number of
occurrences in a pattern.
Unit Types: Keep Them Consistent

Keep units consistent within equations containing parameters that represent different
unit types. You can do this using the Isolate function. For example, to calculate the
number of occurrences for a pattern that is based on one occurrence for each unit of a
parameter named Width, your linear equation would be:
isolate(Width;mm;ul)
The Number of Occurrences value in a dialog box requires a unitless (ul) result, but
you are referencing the unit width, which is a linear value. Therefore, you must
convert the Width parameter to a unitless value.
The following illustration shows how to break down the equation.

Order of Algebraic Operations
Equations are evaluated from the inside out, and evaluation precedence is given to functions. For
example, in the equation (15 * (25 + 3)), 25+3 is evaluated first, and the sum is multiplied by 15. The
result is 420.
The following table shows the algebraic operations in descending order.
Operation Symbol Example
parentheses () (abs( 5 * -2))
exponentiation ^ Length^2
negation - (-4.00 + Width)
multiplication or division * or / (Length * Width) or (Length / Width)
addition or subtraction + or - (-5.00 + Length - 0.50 * Width)
Equation Color
When you create equations, the equation text is displayed in red until it is considered
valid. At that point, the equation text turns black.
Procedure: Using Equations in Dimensions

The following steps outline how to use equations in dimensions.
1. On the ribbon, click the General Dimension tool.
2. Select the geometry that you want to dimension.
4. In the Edit Dimension dialog box, enter the equation.
5. Click the check mark icon to accept the value.

Procedure: Using Equations in a Dialog Box
The following steps outline how to use equations in a dialog box.
1. On the ribbon, click the feature type that you want to create.
2. Select the geometry required for the feature.
3. Enter the equation in any text box that requires a numerical value.
4. Click OK to create the feature and close the dialog box.

Exercise: Edit Parametric Parts
In this exercise, you implement changes to the clutch 3. Modify the 75 in dimension:
ever by editing sketches and features. You discover Double-click the 75 in dimension and
that changing one feature may create problems with change it to 80 mm and click the green
other features that you will then need to edit as checkmark.
well. On the Quick Access toolbar, click Update.
4. Edit a sketch.
In the browser, right-click Extrusion7.
The completed exercise Select Edit Sketch.
1. Open INV_007_Edit Feature.ipt.
2. Display the dimensions on the original base

sketch for editing:
In the browser, right-click Extrusion1.
Click Show Dimensions.

5. Change the Dimension that controls the Note: The holes are shown in this exercise for
motor extrusion location: instructional purposes only. Small holes are
Change the Value of the locating usually not included on factory assets. Factory
dimension from 10 to 15 and click the
green check mark. assets should be modeled with a minimal or
Click the Finish Sketch button on the simplistic form to save computing time.
Sketch ribbon. 7. Modify the depth of the main extrusion:
In the browser, double-click Extrusion1. The
Extrude dialog box is displayed.
Change the 30 in to 36 in.
Click OK.
6. Change the counterbore holes to

countersink clearance holes:
In the browser, right-click Hole1. Click Edit
Feature.
In the Hole dialog box, set hole type to
Countersink (1) and Clearance (2) by 8. Modify the motor size of Extrusion7:
clicking the option button as shown.
In the browser, expand Extrusion7.
Under Fastener, for Standard, select Ansi
Metric M Profile (3). Double-click Sketch7 to display its
For Fastener Type, select Flat Head dimensions on the model.
Machine Screw (4). Double-click the 10 in dimension and
For Size, select M2.5 (5). Click OK. change it to 12 in as shown.
On the Sketch Ribbon, click Finish Sketch.

9. Change the size of the chamfer on the
Channel:
In the browser, right-click Chamfer1. Click
Edit Feature.
Change the Distance value to 2 in to 1 in
and click OK to implement the change.

Exercise: Create Parameters
and Multi-Value Parameters
2. Parameters dialog box:
In this exercise you add additional values to the In the Parameters dialog box, select the
named parameters you created in the earlier model parameter d0. Change its name to
exercises. These values will be available when Length. Press ENTER.
placing the asset component on the factory layout. Note: In previous exercises you already
established the name of d0 as Length.
This step simply demonstrates an
alternative method of naming parameters.
1. Open INV_008_Parameters.ipt.
In the Parameters dialog box, review the
existing model, reference, and user parameters.
Notice any custom parameter names or
parameters with an existing equation instead of
a single numeric value.
Click Done.
3. Mark your Key Parameters.
Place a checkmark in the Key column for the
parameters you wish to modify when
placing the asset on the factory floor.
Place checkmarks in the Key column for
the Length, Height, and Width.

4. Add Multiple values to a parameter.
For this asset, the Length and Height might be 7. Test the functionality of the available
parameters
altered to any custom value. The Width of the
Conveyor must be one of three explicit values Modify the values for Length, Height, and
Width, and notice the effect on the model.
28 in, 30 in, or 36 in. Notice that the Width Value displays as a
Right-click on the Value cell for Width and drop down window with the alternative
select Make Multi-value. values listed for selection while the Length
and Height values allow any custom value
to be applied.
6. Enter the alternative values.

In the Value List Editor, add 28 in, and 36
in in the Add New Items window (1).
Click Add (2) and then OK. 8. Return the Parameters to the original values
and close the file without saving.

Lesson: Creating Work Features
In this lesson, you learn to create and use work planes, work axes, and work points. You use these
work features to assist in creating geometry, placing constraints, and completing other modeling tasks.
The construction of most part models requires the use of work features to complete. The more
complex your parts, the more work features you will likely use while creating it.
The following illustration shows how work planes, axes, and points are displayed in your parts. Work
features help define the connector point that will be added to the asset during publication.
Objectives
Locate, display, and use the default work features and create new work features on a part.
Use the Work Plane tool to create work planes on a part.
Use the Work Axis tool to create work axes on a part.
Use the Work Point tool to create work points on a part.

About Work Features
Every part contains a default set of work planes, work axes, and a center point. These default work
features are located in the Origin folder of the Part browser. You use these default work features to
define the initial orientation of your part design. You can use these default objects for the basis of
new sketches, for feature termination options, and as the basis for creating new work features. As
your part design progresses, you may need to create additional work plane, work axis, and work point
features that are based on faces, edges, and vertices of your part.
The following illustration shows the default work planes, axes, and center point located in the Origin
folder of the browser.
Definition of Default Work Features

There are three default work planes, each representing a different coordinate plane. The three
planes represented are the YZ plane, XZ plane, and XY plane. There are three default work axes, each
representing a different coordinate axis. The three axes represented are the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis.
There is a single Center Point work point, it represents the 0,0,0 coordinate. Work planes and work
axes extend outward from this point.
When you create a new part file, the initial sketch is created on one of these default planes. You can
create additional sketches or features using the model or the default work planes.

The following illustration shows the three default work planes and the center point.
The following illustration shows the three default work axes and the center point.
The default planes are not visible when starting a new part file. You can control their visibility in the
browser. The following illustration shows all of the default work features selected in the browser. By
clicking on Visibility, they will all become visible in the drawing.

Parametric Work Features
You create and use work features when physical geometry does not exist on the part for a specific task.
For example, as you develop your part design, you typically orient sketches for your features on
existing planar faces of the part. When a planar face does not exist, you can create one or more work
features to define and orient a plane for that sketch.
Example of Parametric Work Features

In the following illustration, two work axes were used to create a centerline work plane. This work
plane is then used to create a sketched feature on the end of the part.
Browser Appearance of Parametric Work Features

The following illustration shows how work features are displayed in the browser.

Work Feature Appearance
The appearance of work features is controlled in several different ways. You can turn on or turn off the
appearance of work features individually or globally. To turn off the visibility of a single work feature,
right-click in the browser and click Visibility.
Controlling Global Visibility

On the ribbon, click View tab > Object Visibility to turn the visibility of work features and sketches on
and off, as shown in the following image. Select the appropriate option. You can also use the keyboard
shortcuts.

Creating Work Planes
You use the Work Plane tool to create work planes in the current part. Work planes are used to
define planar surfaces when the existing geometry does not represent the required plane. When you
create work planes, you select geometry and/or other work features. Each selection defines either
orientation or position for the new work plane. Work planes are parametrically attached to the model
geometry or default work planes. When you create a work plane using features of existing geometry,
if the geometry changes, the work plane also changes. For example, if you create a work plane that is
tangent to a cylindrical surface with a radius of 2 mm, and that radius later changes to 5 mm, the work
plane moves to retain the tangent relationship with the cylinder.
Uses for Work Planes

The following list summarizes some potential uses for work planes:
Basis for new sketches
Feature termination options
Basis for new work features
In the following illustration, the work plane (1) is created at a 30-degree angle from a part face. The
circular extrusion (2) is created from the work plane extruding to meet the part face. As the angle
of the part face changes, the work plane updates to maintain the 30-degree angle, and the circular
feature changes with the work plane.
Access
Work Plane
Ribbon: Model tab > Work Features panel
Keyboard Shortcut: ]

Creating Work Planes: Process Overview
When you create work planes, the type of work plane is based completely on the geometry you select.
For example, there is no dialog box to create a planar offset work plane. All work planes are created
based on two or three selections. Each selection represents either an orientation or position.
Follow these steps to create a work plane that is aligned with the Origin XY plane and tangent to the
outside of the cylinder.
1. Select the feature or plane.
2. Select the second feature or plane.
The resulting work plane is created.

Procedures: Creating Work Planes
When you create work planes, the type of work plane is based completely on the geometry you select.
For example, there is no dialog box to create a planar offset work plane. All work planes are created
based on two or three selections. Each selection represents either an orientation or position.
Use the following approaches to create work planes.
Aligned to Origin Plane/Tangent to Cylindrical Surface

Selection 1 - Origin Work Selection 2 - Cylindrical Result
Plane Feature
Aligned to Face/Midpoint Between Two Faces
Selection 1 - Part Face Selection 2 - Part Face Result
Offset from Plane or Surface
Selection 1 - Click and drag Selection 2 - Release the Result

from plane or surface mouse and enter an
offset distance

Angle from Face/Along an Edge
Selection 1 - Edge on Part Selection 2 - Planar Surface Result
on Part, Enter Angle
Work Plane on Three Points
Selection 1 - Vertex on Geometry Selection 2 - Vertex on Geometry
Selection 3 - Vertex on Geometry Result

Parallel to Face/Midpoint of Edge
Selection 1 - Plane/Face Selection 2 - Midpoint of Result
Edge
Procedure: Resizing Work Planes

Place your cursor over the corner of the work plane. When the resize indicator appears, click and drag
the corner of the work plane to resize it.
Procedure: Moving Work Planes

Place your cursor over an edge of the work plane. When the move indicator appears, click and drag the
work plane to a new location within that same plane. In the following illustration, the move indicator is
displayed (1) and the work plane is moved to a new location (2).

Creating Work Axes
The Work Axis tool is used to create work axes in the current part. Work axes are used to define an
axis when the existing geometry does not represent the required axis. Work axes are parametrically
attached to the model geometry and/or default work features. When you create a work axis using
features of existing geometry, if the geometry changes, the work axis updates to reflect those
changes.
Uses for Work Axes

The following are some potential uses for work axes:
Axis of revolution for circular pattern
Basis for new work features
Representation of centerlines on sketches
Access
Work Axis
Keyboard Shortcut: /

Procedure: Creating Work Axes
When you create a work axis, the type of work axis is based completely on the geometry you select.
For example, there is no dialog box to create an axis at the intersection of two planes. All work axes are
created by selecting existing geometric features or other work features. Follow these steps to create a
work axis.
Procedures: Creating Work Axes

Use the following approaches to create work axes.
Work Axis at Center of Circular Feature

Selection 1 - Circular Feature Result
Work Axis at Intersection of Two Planes

Selection 1 - Plane or Selection 2 - Plane or Result
Planar Surface Planar Surface

Work Axis Through Point/Normal to Plane
Selection 1 - Plane or Selection 2 - Point Result
Planar Surface
Work Axis Through Two Points

Selection 1 - Point or Selection 2 - Point or Result
Midpoint Midpoint

Creating Work Points
You use the Work Point tool to create parametric construction points on part features. Several
methods are available for creating these work points. Each method creates a work point that is
parametrically attached to the geometry or other work features. If this geometry changes, the work
point changes accordingly.
Work points are used as construction geometry to assist in the creation of other geometry and
features.
Grounded Work Points are fixed in space and have no association to other geometry. In part files, you
place grounded work points at vertex points on the part. Once placed, you can modify the point using
options found on the short cut menu.
Uses for Work Points

The following are some potential uses for work points:
Projection onto sketches.
Basis for new work features.
Creation of 3D sketches by drawing lines between work points.
Access
Work Point
Ribbon: Model tab > Work Features

es panel
Keyboard Shortcut: .
Access
Grounded Work Point
Keyboard Shortcut: ;

Procedures: Creating Work Points
Use the following approaches to create work points.
Creating a Work Point on a Vertex

1. On the panel bar, click the Work Point tool and select a vertex on the part.
2. The work point is created on the selected vertex.
Creating a Work Point at the Midpoint of an Edge

1. On the panel bar, click the Work Point tool and select the midpoint of an edge.
2. The work point is created on the midpoint of the selected edge.

Creating a Work Point at the Intersection of an Edge and Plane
1. On the panel bar, click the Work Point tool and select an edge or axis.
2. Select a plane or surface.
3. The work point is created at the intersection of the edge and plane.

Work Point at the Intersection of a Line or Axis and a Surface
Selection 1: Line or Axis Selection 2: Surface Result
Work Point at the Intersection of a Plane and a Curve

Selection 1: Plane or Face Selection 2: Curve Result

Exercise: Create Work Features
In this exercise, you create work features that
will define the connection points for the 3. Mirror the Motor feature to the other side.
conveyor asset. On the ribbon, click the Mirror tool.
Select the motor feature (Extrusion5).
Click the Mirror Plane button.
Select the XY origin plane as shown here.
Click OK.
1. Open INV_008A_Work_Features.ipt.
2. Turn on the visibility of the default XY plane. 4. Create an Axis that runs along the center of
the conveyor belt.
In the browser, expand the Origin folder. On the ribbon, click the Work Axis tool.
Right-click XY Plane. In the browser, select XY Plane.
Click Visibility. Select the top face of the belt as shown

5. Create a workpoints at the intersection of the
Axis and the end faces.
On the ribbon, click the Work Point tool.
Click axis and then the right end face as
shown in the following image.
Repeat the process creating a workpoint on

the left face.
6. In the graphics window, right click the work

plane. Click Visibility on the shortcut menu to
turn off the work plane visibility.
Repeat this process for the work axis and

work points.

Chapter Summary
the design process.
Create features using the Extrude and Revolve tools.
Use reference and construction geometry.
Use the browser and shortcut menus to edit parametric parts.
Use the 3D Grips tool to edit part geometry in the context of an assembly and in a stand-alone
part.

Chapter
Detailed Shape Design

This chapter enhances your basic part modeling skills by providing additional tools and recommended
workflows for detailed shape design. Common industry practice dictates the use of chamfers and
fillets to break sharp corners and relieve stress. Holes and threaded features often must be added
for fasteners. Some parts, such as stampings or molds, must be designed as thin-walled shapes.
Additionally, most parts include some shapes or features that are patterned or mirrored.
Highly detailed models are usually not used during the Factory Layout Process. Factory assets
are created to be a simplified representation of the finished product. As a result the use of the
detailed features demonstrated in this section is generally discouraged as a best practice. The
placed features outlined and demonstrated in this chapter are provided in case they are
required during the simplified asset creation process.
The lessons in this chapter cover the tools required to meet each of these design requirements.
Objectives
Create both chamfers and fillets on a part.
Use the Hole tool to place hole features on your part model.
Create rectangular and patterns and mirror existing features.
Chapter 8: Detailed Shape Design 1

Lesson: Creating Chamfers and Fillets
This lesson describes how to create both chamfers and fillets on your part. Fillets are commonly used
on a part to reduce the potential of stress cracking, and for aesthetic reasons. Chamfers are used for
angled faces, relief clearance, and also for aesthetic purposes.
Chamfer and fillet features are standard on most manufactured components and are among the most
widely used placed features on any 3D part.
The following illustration shows a part where all sharp edges have been replaced with fillet or chamfer
features.
Objectives
Describe the difference between chamfers and fillets and give an example of how they are used.
Use the Chamfer tool to create chamfers.
Use the Fillet tool to create constant radius fillets.
State the guidelines for creating chamfers and fillets.
2 Chapter 8: Detailed Shape Design

About Chamfers and Fillets
A fillet creates a radius edge on an interior or exterior corner of your part, whereas a chamfer bevels
an edge. Cast and molded parts rarely have true sharp edges. Chamfer and fillet features are applied
to almost all the edges of your part designs. When completing a machined part on the shop floor, you
always remove all sharp edges. You also apply this same principle to your parametric part designs.
The following illustration shows a cast part with fillets and rounds on edges and then chamfers placed
on the holes to represent the machining process.
Definition of Fillets
A fillet is defined by a single constant radius, or in the case of a variable radius fillet, by more than one
radius. Consider a fillet to be an interior shape, placed between faces of less than 180 degrees, which
adds material to your part. A round is an exterior shape placed between faces of any angle, which
removes material from your part when created.

Fillet
Round
Full round
Definition of Chamfers
A chamfer is defined using equal distances, a distance and an angle, or two different distance values.
Chamfers are used to break sharp edges and as lead-ins on holes or bosses. Most angles faces in
parametric parts are created using chamfers.

Distance
Distance and Angle
Two Distances
Example of Using Chamfer for a Lead-in

In most circumstances, placing a fastener into a hole is aided through the use of a chamfer. In the
following illustration, it is easier to assemble the parts on the right that have a chamfer used as a lead-
in.
Creating Chamfers
You use the Chamfer tool to add chamfer features to edges on your part. These features, like other
features, are fully parametric and easily editable after you create them. When you create chamfer
features, you can choose from three different methods which determine how the chamfer is specified.
With any of the methods, the end result is the replacement of the selected edge(s) with a face(s) at an
angle specified either directly or indirectly through the use of distances.

The following illustration shows a part before and after adding chamfer features.
Access
Chamfer
Ribbon: Model tab > Modify panel
Keyboard Shortcut: CTRL+SHIFT+K
Chamfer Dialog Box

The Chamfer dialog box is displayed when you start the Chamfer tool.

Option Description
Distance Specify a distance for the chamfer. The distance is applied to both sides of the
selected edge, resulting in a 45-degree chamfer.
Distance Select a face adjacent to the edge you are chamfering. The angle is measured from
and this face. Select the edge(s) to be chamfered. This option is disabled until you
Angle select a face. The edge(s) selected must be adjacent to the selected face. Specify a
distance for the chamfer. The distance is measured from the selected edge along
the selected face. Enter an angle for the chamfer. The angle is measured from the
selected face.
Two Select the edge to be chamfered. When you use this method, only one edge can
Distances be chamfered at a time. Specify the first distance of the chamfer. This distance
is measured along one of the adjacent faces. Specify the second distance of the
chamfer. This distance is measured along the opposite adjacent face.
Procedure: Creating Chamfers

The following steps describe how to create chamfer features.
1. On the ribbon, click the Chamfer tool.
2. In the Chamfer dialog box, select the desired method to create the chamfer.
For a single distance chamfer, select the edge(s) to be chamfered. Enter a distance for the chamfer.
The resulting chamfer is created.

For the distance and angle method, select the Distance and Angle option. Select the face, and then
select the edge(s) to be chamfered. Enter a distance and angle for the chamfer.
For the two distances method, select the Two Distances option. Select the edge to be chamfered.
Enter distance values in the Distance1 and Distance2 fields.
Click OK to create the chamfer.


Creating Fillets
You use the Fillet tool to create fillets and rounds on existing 3D geometry. You can create both
constant radius and variable radius fillets with the Fillet tool.
The following illustration shows a block before and after adding fillet features.
Access
Fillet
Keyboard Shortcut: F

Constant Radius Fillet Options
The Fillet dialog box is displayed when you start the Fillet tool.
The following creation methods and options are available in the Fillet dialog box.
Option Description
Edge Adds fillets or rounds to one or more edges of a part. All fillets and rounds created
in a single operation become a single feature.
Face Adds fillets or rounds between two selected face sets. The face sets do not need to
share an edge.
Full Adds fillets or rounds that are tangent to three adjacent faces. The center face is
Round replaced by the fillet.
Select Mode selection enables easy selection of objects to fillet. Select Edge for edge
Mode selection priority; Loop for face selection priority; and Feature for feature priority
selection.
Solids This button is only available when multiple solid bodies exist in the part file. When
this is the case, the user can click the solids button to select one or more solid
bodies to use with the All Fillets and All Rounds selection options.
Options Use the All Fillets or All Rounds check boxes to quickly select all fillet edges or all
round edges on the part. Select them both to have all edges on the part selected.

Procedure: Creating Constant Radius Fillets
Follow these steps to create constant radius fillet features.
1. On the ribbon, click the Fillet tool.
2. With the Fillet dialog box displayed, in the graphics window, select the edges to be filleted and
specify a radius for each edge set. Create an edge set for each different radius. In the following
illustration, two edge sets have been created. The first edge set contains two edges to receive a
2 mm fillet and the second set contains three edges to receive a 1 mm fillet.
3. Click OK to create the fillet feature. Notice that in the browser only one fillet feature is displayed
even though five edges were filleted in this example.

Guidelines for Creating Chamfers and Fillets
Although both fillets and chamfers are relatively simple shapes, they are often a challenge to create
with consistency where multiple edges intersect. Following the guidelines presented here can improve
your success in creating these features.
Chamfer and Fillet Creation Guidelines

Avoid creating all of your fillets and chamfers with a single feature. You will have greater success
creating and changing features with less edges selected.
Create these features on parallel edges of a part first. When you create additional features, you can
select the resulting face to complete the remaining edges at the same time.
Remember that using the Two Distances option with the Chamfer tool limits you to creating the
feature on one edge at a time.
Pressing CTRL while clicking removes geometry from the selection.
Because fillets and chamfers are considered finish features, consider creating them toward the end
of the design process after all other features have been defined.
Avoid including fillets and chamfers in your sketch geometry and instead create them as part
features.
Example of Creating Separate Features

In the following example, by creating your side fillets first, you can select the continuously tangent
edge as a single selection rather than having to select all the edges individually. Creating your fillet
features in this way gives you more flexibility for possible changes to the part later.

Exercise: Create Chamfers
In this exercise, you add chamfer features to an
existing part.
3. Create a .5 in chamfer on the outside edge of

1. Open Inv_009_Chamfer.ipt. the motor housing.
Restart the Chamfer tool.
Select the outside edge of the motor
housing.
For Distance, enter .5 in. Click OK.
2. Create a chamfer on 4 sharp corners as

shown in the following image. 4. Close the file without saving.
On the ribbon, click the Chamfer tool.
Select the 4 corner edges shown.
For Distance, enter 2 in . Click OK.

Exercise: Create Fillets
In this exercise, you create constant radius fillets on
2. Create fillets on the 4 sharp corners as shown
an existing part. in the following image.
On the ribbon, click the Fillet tool.

Select the 4 corner edges shown.
For Distance, enter 4 in . Click OK.
1. Open INV_010_Fillet.ipt.
3. Create a .5 in fillet on the outside edge of the
motor housing
Restart the Fillet tool.
Select the outside edge of the motor
housing.
For the distance, enter .5 in. Click OK.
4. Close all files without saving.

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads
This lesson describes how to use the Hole tool to create parametric hole features and the Thread tool
to create threads on existing model features. You use hole features to create parametric holes on
parts. Although hole features are considered to be placed features, you can use unconsumed sketch
geometry to represent the center point locations for the holes.
The most common method of joining two or more components together is with threaded fasteners.
You should master the use of both the hole and thread features to produce the best models possible.
The following illustration shows a part that contains a combination of hole and thread features.
Objectives
Define a hole feature.
Use the Hole tool to create holes on your part.
Use the Thread tool to create external thread features.

About Hole Features
Hole features are parametrically created features that are placed on existing part geometry. You can
create hole features with a number of different options, such as counterbore, countersink, flat bottom,
spotface, threads, tapered threads, and fastener clearances.
The following illustration shows a part with various types of holes. The enlarged view (1) shows the
bitmap thread representation.
Definition of Parametric Holes

There are many different ways to fasten parts together and most require a hole. Although you can
create holes by extruding a circle with a cut operation, the Hole tool provides greater flexibility in
the variations and types of holes that you can create, such as counterbore, countersink, and threads.
Using the Hole tool, you can create the various hole types in a single dialog box, rather than having to
manually edit or create geometry.
A primary benefit of using the Hole tool is the ability to annotate holes in the drawing environment
with the Hole Note and Hole Chart tools. A sample of the automatic hole note callout is shown in the

Example of Fastening Parts
Two metal components are often fastened together using a socket head cap screw. The following
illustration shows the clearance hole for the screw in one part and the threaded hole in the mating
part.
Benefits of the Hole Tool

Benefits of using the Hole tool include the following:
You use a single tool to create holes with various options.
You can annotate holes created with the Hole tool in the drawing with the Hole Note and Hole
Chart tools.
You can determine hole size by specifying the fastener thread type or clearance.
Options such as the counterbore, countersink, and spotface enable you to add features in a single
operation.

Creating Holes
When you use the Hole tool, different options are available for defining the location of the hole as
well as for the type of hole to be created. You can define hole locations based on sketch geometry or
existing planes, points, and edges on the part. You can create standard drilled holes, counterbored
holes, and countersunk holes. Additional options are available for the drill point and thread options.
Access
Hole
Keyboard Shortcut: H

Hole Dialog Box
The Hole dialog box is displayed when you start the Hole tool.
Hole Placement Options

You can use any of the following options in the Hole dialog box for placing a hole feature.
From Sketch
Select this option to create holes based on locations on a sketch. Hole locations can consist of Point/
Hole Center objects, endpoints of lines or curves, or centers of projected circular geometry.

The following option is available when you select From Sketch placement.

Access
Centers Select the center points for the holes. Use this option to create a
series of identical holes with one feature.
Solids This option is only available when the part contains multiple solid
bodies. When available, you can use this option to select the solid
body that the hole feature will apply to.
Linear
Select this option to position the hole relative to two selected edges.
The following options are available when you select Linear placement.

Access
Face Select a face on the part to orient the hole.
Reference 1 Select a part edge as the first reference. A dimension is placed

from the selected edge to the center of the hole. The dimension
can be edited as a standard parametric dimension.
Reference 2 Select a part edge as the second reference. A dimension is placed

from the selected edge to the center of the hole.
Flip Side Select this option to position the hole on the opposite side of the
selected edge.

Concentric
Select this option to position the hole concentric to another circular part edge.
The following options are available when you select Concentric placement.

Access
Plane Select a part face to orient the hole.
Concentric Select a circular edge or face to position the hole concentrically.

Reference
On Point
Select this option to position the hole on a work point.

The following options are available when you select On Point placement.

Access
Point Select a work point to position the hole.
Direction Select a plane, face, edge, or work axis to define the direction of
the hole. If you select a plane, the hole direction is normal to the
face or plane.
Hole Type and Size Options

You can use any of the following options in the Hole dialog box to define the type and size of the hole.
Hole Type
Use the following options to define a standard drilled hole, counterbore hole, spotface, or countersink
hole.
Hole Parameters
Depending on the hole type selected, enter the hole parameters in each available field.

Drill Point
Select flat or angled drill point. If you select angled, either enter an angle for the drill point or accept
the default value.
Termination
Select the termination option for the hole from the drop-down list.
Option Description
Distance The depth of the hole is based on the distance that you entered in the hole
parameters area.
Through All The hole is created through the entire part, even if the part depth at the location
of the hole changes.
To Select a face or plane to calculate the depth of the hole.
Additional Hole Type Options

Use the additional hole type options to define a simple hole, tapped hole, or clearance hole.
Option Description
Creates a simple hole with no thread features.
Creates a tapped hole based on the thread designation and options entered in the
Threads area of the dialog box. The Threads area appears only when this option is
selected.

Option Description
Creates a clearance hole based on the fastener selected. Available clearance options
are Close, Normal, and Loose. The Fastener area appears only when this option is
selected.
Creates an NPT tapped or Taper threaded hole based on the thread designation and
options entered in the Threads area of the dialog box.

Procedure: Creating Hole Features Using the Linear Option
Follow these steps to create hole features using the Linear placement option of the Hole tool.
1. On the ribbon, click Hole and select Linear from the Placement list.
2. Select the face to orient the top of the hole, then select two reference edges to locate the
hole. The edges that you select do not need to be on the same plane as the face that you
select.
3. Select each dimension and enter its precise value in the Edit Dimension dialog box.
4. Adjust the options in the Hole dialog box. Click Apply to create the hole and continue
placing other holes.

Procedure: Creating Hole Features Using the Concentric Option
Follow these steps to create hole features by using the Concentric placement option of the Hole tool.
1. On the ribbon, click Hole and select Concentric from the Placement list.
2. Select the plane or face (1) to orient the hole, then select a curved surface (2) as the concentric
reference.

3. Adjust the options in the Hole dialog box. Click Apply to create the hole and continue placing
other hole features.
Procedure: Creating Hole Features Using the From Sketch Option

Follow these steps to create and edit holes using sketch geometry for the hole locations.
1. Create a new sketch that contains the center point location for the hole features.
2. On the ribbon, click Finish Sketch to exit the sketch.

4. On the ribbon, click Hole and select the From Sketch placement option. If you use the Point/Hole
Center sketch object, the hole centers are automatically selected. Adjust the options in the dialog
box depending on the type of hole you need to create. Click OK to create the hole.
Procedure: Creating Hole Features Using the On Point Option

Follow these steps to create hole features using the On Point placement option of the Hole tool.
1. Create a work point (1) at the location of the hole.

2. On the ribbon, click Hole. Select On Point from the Placement list and then select the work
point.
2. Select a face, edge, or axis to define the direction of the hole. If you select a face or plane, the
direction is normal to the face or plane.
3. Adjust the options in the Hole dialog box. Click Apply to create the hole and continue placing
other holes, or click OK to create the hole and end the process.

Exercise: Create Holes and
Threads
2. Create a Concentric Hole thru the conveyor
In this exercise, you use the Hole tool with end.
multiple placement options to create tapped, On the ribbon, click the Hole tool.
countersink, counterbore, and clearance
holes. You also use the Thread tool to create In the Hole dialog box, select Concentric
an internal and external thread. from the Placement list.
Click Face.
Create Holes 3. Select the outside face of the channel near the
right end of the conveyor.
In this portion of the exercise, you use the Hole tool
To create simple holes on the conveyor asset
model.
1. Open INV_011_Holes.ipt.
4. Select the circular edge of the channel as a

concentric reference.

5. Select the settings for the hole feature: 6. Repeat the process to create the concentric
Enter a diameter value of 2 in (1). hole at the opposite end of the conveyor.
Set the termination (2) to Through All.
To include the Belt body in the hole feature,
click the Solids selector (3) and click the Belt
body.
Click OK.

Lesson: Patterning and Mirroring Features
This lesson describes how to mirror features, and how to reuse existing features in rectangular and
circular patterns. Mirroring and patterning can save you time in creating the geometry, as well as in
editing the features when the design changes.
When you create patterns or mirror existing geometry, you reduce the need to manually draw and
edit these duplicate features.
Objectives
Identify situations in which you should pattern or mirror part features instead of creating new
ones.
Use the Rectangular Pattern tool to create rectangular patterns.
Use the Circular Pattern tool to create circular patterns.
Use the Mirror tool to create symmetric features.

About Feature Reuse
Many designs require patterns of features or geometry that consist of features that are symmetric
about a given plane. Instead of creating these features independently, you can use the Pattern and
Mirror tools to populate your parts with existing features.
Definition of Patterns
You use patterns to duplicate existing geometry according to parameters that you specify. When you
create patterns, occurrences of the original features are created. You can create these occurrences in
a circular or a rectangular pattern. When you create these patterns, the occurrences are associative to
the original feature, so any changes in the original feature are automatically reflected in the pattern
occurrences.
Definition of Mirroring Part Features

Parts often include features that can be considered symmetric about a plane of symmetry to other
features on the part. You can use the Mirror tool to mirror this geometry.
In the following illustration, Rectangular (1) and Circular (2) patterns have been created based on
individual features.

Features That Can Be Reused
The following features can be patterned or mirrored:
Most sketched and placed features
Entire solids
Work features
Benefits of Reusing Features

Benefits associated with patterning and mirroring features include the following:
You need to create only one of the patterned or symmetric features.
Changes that you make to the original feature are automatically applied to the patterned or
mirrored features.
Appearance of Rectangular and Circular Patterns in the Browser

The way that patterns are displayed in the browser is different from the way that other features are
displayed. When you expand a rectangular or circular pattern, the difference is immediately apparent.
Any sketches used as a path, along with a folder containing the features used in the pattern, are
displayed under the pattern feature. Beneath that is an Occurrence item for each occurrence in the
pattern. The first Occurrence item represents the initial feature used in the pattern, followed by an
Occurrence item for each occurrence created.
Right-click an occurrence and click Suppress on the shortcut menu to suppress the selected
occurrence. This option is not available on the first occurrence.

Example of Mirrored Features
In the following illustration, the part consists of several features that are symmetric about a plane of
symmetry. The symmetry planes are identified, along with the features that have been mirrored about
them.
Symmetry Plane A
Features mirrored about Plane A
Symmetry Plane B
Features mirrored about Plane B
Creating Rectangular Patterns

You use the Rectangular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a rectangular pattern.
You can pattern a feature along one or two directions and/or paths, with options to control feature
spacing.
Access
Rectangular Pattern
Ribbon: Model tab > Pattern panel
Keyboard Shortcut: CTRL + SHIFT + R
Rectangular Pattern Dialog Box

The Rectangular Pattern dialog box is displayed when you start the Rectangular Pattern tool.
Pattern Type Options

The following pattern types are available in the Rectangular Pattern dialog box.
Individual Click this button to pattern individual features.

Feature
Entire Click this button to pattern the entire solid.

Solid

When the Pattern Individual Features button is selected, you have the following selection option.
Features Select one or more features to be patterned.
Solid This button is only available when multiple solid bodies exist. You
use this button to determine to which solid body the feature is
going to be applied.
When the Pattern Entire Solid button is selected, you have the following selection option.
Include Select the work features to include in the pattern.

Work/
Surface
Features
Direction Pattern Options

The following options are available in the Direction 1 and Direction 2 areas of the Rectangular Pattern
dialog box.
Path Select the path for Direction 1. This can be the edge of a part or a
2D sketch that represents the path for the pattern. Valid selections
include 2D and 3D lines, arcs, splines, part edges, axes, and
trimmed ellipses. Click the Flip button to flip the path direction.
Mid Creates a pattern where the occurrences are distributed on both

Plane sides of the original feature.
Count Enter the number of occurrences for the pattern. This number
includes the original feature.
Length Enter a value for the pattern distance. This value represents either
the total distance of the pattern or the spacing between the
features.
Method Specifies the total distance and direction of the pattern, the
spacing between occurrences, or if the pattern is equally fitted to
the length of the selected curve.

Compute Options
The following options are available in the Compute area of the Rectangular Pattern dialog box.
Optimized For pattern occurrences of 50 or more, increases pattern

performance.
Identical With this method, each occurrence uses an identical termination

method, regardless of where it intersects other features.
Adjust Enables each occurrence termination to be calculated.

This method requires more processing and can increase
computational time on large patterns.
Orientation Pattern Options

The following options are available in the Orientation area of the Rectangular Pattern dialog box.
Identical Occurrence orientation is identical to that of the first feature.
Adjust Specifies which direction controls the position of patterned

Direction features. Rotates each occurrence so that it maintains its
orientation to the 2D tangent vector of the path.
Procedure: Creating an Optimized Rectangular Pattern

Follow these steps to create an optimized rectangular pattern.
1. Create a part with one or more features to be patterned.

2. On the ribbon, click the Rectangular Pattern tool and select the feature to be patterned. Click the
Path button under Direction 1 and select a path, part edge, or origin axis for the pattern. Enter
the number of occurrences and distance values and adjust the spacing method as necessary.
Optionally include information for Direction 2 and then click OK.
3. As soon as the total number of occurrences is equal to or greater than 50, you are prompted to
consider using the Optimized Compute option. Click OK to close the message box.

4. In the Rectangular Pattern dialog box, click the More button to expand the dialog box, and then
select Optimized.
5. Click OK to create the optimized pattern.

Creating Circular Patterns
You use the Circular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a circular pattern. When you
start the Circular Pattern tool, you first choose to pattern individual features or the entire solid.
You then select a rotation axis, which serves as the center of the pattern. Next you set the pattern
properties, such as number of occurrences and angle. There are also options for controlling the
creation method and positioning method.
The following illustration demonstrates a circular hole pattern being created.
Access
Circular Pattern
Keyboard Shortcut: CTRL + SHIFT + O

Circular Pattern Dialog Box
The Circular Pattern dialog box is displayed when you start the Circular Pattern tool.
Pattern Type Options

The following pattern types are available in the Circular Pattern dialog box:
Individual Click this button to pattern individual features.

Feature
Entire Click this button to pattern the entire solid.

Solid
Feature-Axis Selection
When the Pattern Individual Features button is selected, you have the following selection options.
Rotation Specifies the axis, or pivot point, about which features are rotated.
Axis Click Flip to reverse the direction of the pattern.

When the Pattern Entire Solid button is selected, you have the following selection option.
Include Select the work features to include in the pattern.

Work/
Surface
Features
Pattern Placement Options

The following placement options are available in the Circular Pattern dialog box:
Count Specify the number of occurrences for the pattern. This number
includes the original feature.
Angle Specify the angle for the pattern. The result of this angle is based
on the positioning method you select.
Mid Creates a pattern where the occurrences are distributed on both

Plane sides of the original feature.
Creation Method Options

The following options are available in the Creation Method area of the Circular Pattern dialog box:
Optimized For pattern occurrences of 50 or more, increases pattern

performance.
Identical With this method, each occurrence uses an identical termination

method, regardless of where it intersects other features.
Adjust Enables each occurrence termination to be calculated.

This method requires more processing and can increase
computational time on large patterns.

Positioning Method Options
The following options are available in the Positioning Method area of the Circular Pattern dialog
box.

Access
Incremental Sets the angle value to represent the angle between occurrences.
Fitted Sets the angle value to represent the total rotational angle of the
pattern.
Mirroring Features
When you mirror part features, you must first have the features to be mirrored and a plane to use as
the symmetry plane. The symmetry plane can be any of the following:
An existing face on the part.
Any one of the origin work planes.
A new work plane.
With these conditions met, click the Mirror tool, select the features to be mirrored, then select the
face or work plane to use as the mirror plane. The features are mirrored about the selected plane and
displayed in the browser, with the included features and occurrences nested underneath the mirror
feature.
The features to be mirrored are highlighted in the browser.
Access
Mirror
Keyboard Shortcut: CTRL + SHIFT + M
Mirror Dialog Box

The Mirror dialog box is displayed when you start the Mirror tool.
Mirror Type Options

The following mirror types are available in the Mirror dialog box.
Individual Click this button to mirror individual features.

Feature
Entire Click this button to mirror the entire solid.

Solid

When the Mirror Individual Features button is selected, you have the following selection options.
Mirror Select a face or work plane to be used as the plane of symmetry.

Plane
When the Mirror Entire Solid button is selected, you have the following selection option.
Include Select the work features to be included in the mirror.

Work/
Surface
Features
Mirror Select a face or work point to be used as the plane of symmetry
Plane
Remove Placing a check in the box next to this option will delete the
Original original solid that was originally used to pattern the feature.
Creation Method Options

The following options are available in the Creation Method area of the Mirror dialog box.
Optimized Optimizes pattern performance.
Identical The default; creates the mirrored occurrences identical to the

original features.
Adjust to Enables the new mirrored occurrences to adjust to changes in

Model model geometry. For example if you are mirroring a cut feature
that extrudes through the part, using this option enables that cut
feature to extrude the part on the opposite side, even if the part's
thickness changes.
Note: Use this option only when necessary, because additional
processing resources are required to calculate the new
occurrences.

Example: Creation Method = Identical
Original hole features with through all termination option.

Mirrored hole features.
Example: Creation Method = Adjust to Model
Original hole features with through all termination option.

Mirrored hole features.

Procedure: Mirroring Part Features
The following steps give an overview of mirroring part features.
1. Open or create a part that contains the geometry intended to be symmetric.
2. On the ribbon, click the Mirror Feature tool and select the features to be mirrored.

3. In the Mirror Pattern dialog box, click the Mirror Plane button and select a plane or face that
represents the plane of symmetry for the mirrored features. Click OK.
4. The mirrored features are created.

Exercise: Create Mirror and
Pattern Features
2. Turn on the Visibility of the XY and YZ workplanes.
In this exercise, mirror the motor housing
to the opposite side and end of the
conveyor. You also pattern the legs and link
the number of legs to the overall length of
the conveyor.
1. Open INV_012_Mirror_Pattern.
3. Mirror the motor feature to the opposite side of

the conveyor.
On the Pattern panel start the Mirror tool.
Select the motor feature (1) and then click
the Mirror Plane selector (2).
Click the XY Plane (3) and then click OK.

4. Mirror the motor features to the opposite Click the Direction 1 selector and then
end of the conveyor. select a horizontal edge of the channel.
On the Pattern panel start the Mirror tool. Enter 2 for the number of legs and 60 in
for the spacing. Click OK.
Select the Mirror feature from the browser
(1) and then click the Mirror Plane selector
(2).
Click the YZ Plane (3) and then click
OK.
Turn off the visibility of the work
planes.
7. Modify the Number of Legs.

On the Quick Access toolbar start the
Parameters tool.
5. Change the value of the Length Find the parameter that controls the
parameter. number of legs (d33).
On the Quick Access toolbar, click the Change the value to the following
Parameters tool (1). formula.
Change the value of the Length parameter (2)
floor(( isolate(Length;in;ul))/60)
to 200 in and then click Done. Click Done.
8. Modify the value of the Length parameter and

notice the legs update to suit.
Note: This example assumes that a valid length
of 120 between legs is allowed but a leg every
60 is preferred. If you want a leg every 60,
change the floor function to ceil.
6. Pattern the left set of legs.
Note: In this example, the legs were Optional
created with separate extrusion features. Change the floor function in the formula to ceil
On the Pattern Panel, click the and notice the difference.
Rectangular pattern tool.
Select Extrusion 2 and Extrusion 3 Close the file without saving.
from the Browser.

Exercise: Create a Work Plane
and Mirror Feature
In this exercise, you create the legs on the 3. Extrude the leg profiles to the XZ plane.
curved conveyor section and then mirror On the Pattern panel start the Mirror tool.
them to the opposite end of the curve
conveyor. Select the motor feature (1) and then click
the Mirror Plane selector (2).
Click the XY Plane (3) and then click OK.
1. Open INV_013_Workplane_Mirror.ipt.
4. Create a Work Axis at the center of the

conveyor arc.
On the Work Features panel, start the
Work Axis tool.
2. Turn on the Visibility of Sketch 2 and reorient Select the inside curved face of the
the model to view Sketch 2. conveyor.
Click the Axis selector.
Select the inside curved edge of the
conveyor channel.
Note: the image below shows the constraints

that were applied to the 2 rectangular profiles
that will be used to create the legs.

5. Create a work plane with that bisects 7. Open the Parameters tool and modify the Angle
the conveyor. parameter.
On the Work Features panel, start the Note: Use values between 90 and 20 degrees.
Work Plane tool
Notice how the second set of legs are tied to the
Select the Axis created in the previous step
angle parameter.
(1).
Close the file without saving.
Select the left end face of the conveyor (2).
Enter Angle/2 in the heads-up display.
Click the green checkmark on the heads up
display.
6. Mirror the leg feature to the opposite end of

the conveyor.
On the Pattern Panel, start the Mirror
tool.
Select the leg extrusion feature.
Click the Mirror Plane selector and then
select the work plane created in the
previous step.
Click Ok.

Chapter Summary
This chapter enhanced your basic part modeling skills by providing additional tools and recommended
workflows for detailed shape design. Understanding how to create chamfers and fillets, place hole and
thread features, pattern and mirror features, and create thin-walled parts greatly extends your 3D part
modeling capabilities to cover most part design requirements.
Create both chamfers and fillets on a part.
Use the Hole and Thread tools to place hole and thread features on your part model.
Create rectangular and circular patterns and mirror existing features.
Create thin-walled parts using the Shell tool.

Chapter
9
Autodesk Factory Design Utilities
Creating Layouts and Placing
Assets
Autodesk Factory Design Utilities are integrated with the standard Inventor environment. This
means that the interface you will be working with is the same as the Inventor interface. Some
additional tools have been added to incorporate Factory Layout functionality. The Autodesk
Factory Design Utilities gives Inventor users a factory specific work environment that helps factory
layout designers spend more time innovating rather than drafting. This chapter introduces the tools
and interface options you will use as you start laying out your initial factory design.
Objectives
Review the Factory Specific Ribbons
Create a New Factory Layout.
Add a DWG Overlay to the Factory Floor.
Place Assets on the Factory Floor using the Asset Browser
Insert Existing Models onto the Factory Floor.
Modify Factory assets with the Factory Properties Browser
Chapter 9: Autodesk Factory Design Utilities 1

Lesson: Factory User Interface
Getting Started
This lesson describes the application interface. You are introduced to the Layout Assembly
Template you work with as you create and document your factory designs. As you start Autodesk
Inventor with the Autodesk Factory Design Suite Utilities loaded, you will notice a different
Getting Started Ribbon. This ribbon is specifically designed to work with and support the factory
layout users. Several commands are familiar to veteran Inventor users while some are new and
offer access to support and community features.
As with all computer applications, the User Interface (UI) is what you use to interact with the program.
While the Autodesk Inventor UI shares many common themes and elements with other Microsoft
Windows applications, it also has some unique elements and functionalities that may be new to you,
even as an experienced CAD user.
In the following illustrations, the Autodesk Factory Design User Interface is shown. The first illustration
shows the default Getting Started ribbon that is displayed when you start the program. The second
illustration is the default Factory ribbon used to create and develop your factory design.
Objectives
Review the Factory Specific Ribbons.

2 Chapter 9: Autodesk Factory Design Utilities

The Factory User Interface Getting Started Ribbon
The Getting Started Ribbon is the first ribbon you encounter when you start the application. The
contents of the getting started ribbon are documented below.
Item Command Function

1 New Layout Starts a new Factory Layout document based on the
default template.
2 Create Asset The Autodesk Inventor Factory Design Utility

provides users with predefined system content that
is included with the product. The Create Asset
command enables you to create new, or use,
existing data. The data is authored and published
into a User Assets library, with the provided system
content.
3 Projects Provides access to existing or new project

workspaces.
4 Factory Options Drawing layer visibility for DWG overlays, selection
of template files, and snap settings are all managed
using the Factory Options dialog box.
5 Factory Help A specific help system supplied that supports the
Autodesk Factory Design Utilities.
6 First Experience Provides access to online content reviewing the

Videos basic operations and commands unique to the
Factory Design Suite.
7 Community Access Provides access to popular online communities

when additional content, communications, and
discussions, are available.

The Factory User Interface Factory Ribbon
The Factory Ribbon is the primary ribbon you use while designing your factory layout. Several
commands from the Getting Started ribbon are also included on this ribbon. The contents of the
Factory Ribbon are documented below.
Item Command / Panel Function

1 Insert Model Inserts and external model into the factory. A Factory Layout can be
populated with component data from multiple sources. You can insert
components from the System Assets and User Assets content libraries,
or you can insert external content. External content represents any
data that has not been customized and placed in the Factory Assets
library. This data includes standard Inventor part and assembly files, or
files from other CAD products.
2 Create Asset The Autodesk Inventor Factory Design Utility provides users with
predefined system content that is included with the product. The
Create Asset command enables you to create new, or use, existing
data. The data is authored and published into a User Assets library,
with the provided system content.
3 Set Landing Allow users to define a different landing surface other than the default.
Surface The default landing surface is usually defined when an asset is authored.
The component is oriented so the landing surface is positioned against
the floor. If the component has not been authored, define a landing
surface so the component snaps to the floor. Also, some assets can be
placed in more than one orientation. Although the primary orientation is
defined, you might have to rotate it for certain applications.
4 Add DWG Overlay Allows users to paint 2D lines on the factory floor for reference. A 2D
drawing of a factory floor layout showing all factory components and
personnel in their proper locations can be created in AutoCAD. The
drawing can also be created in another CAD program capable of
outputting a file in DWG format. Using the Add DWG Overlay command,
the drawing can then be overlaid onto the factory floor in Inventor
Factory to serve as a snap-to guide in the precise placement of 3D factory
assets.
5 Layout Tools Panel Contains various tools that aid in the specific placement and
orientation of Factory Assets.
6 Options Panel Provides access to Floor settings and default Snap options.
7 Learn about Provides access to a specific help system supplied that supports the
Factory Panel Autodesk Factory Design Utilities and also provides access to online
content reviewing the basic operations and commands unique to the
8 Community Panel Provides access to popular online communities when additional
content, communications, and discussions, are available.

The Factory User Interface Factory Options
The Factory Options dialog box contains four tabs. The DWG tab lets you display a layer dialog box listing
all the layers present in a DWG overlay. Using this dialog box, layer visibility may be toggled on or off as
required. It also includes a setting to enable a drawing preview of the DWG overlay. The Templates tab
lets you specify the template file to be used for new factory layouts and for the creation of both part and
assembly assets. The Snap tab controls whether snaps are enabled and sets the active distance for snaps.
The Assets tab contains the default locations for assets download from the Autodesk Cloud. These assets
are not locally available unless the user chooses to download them from the Cloud via the Asset Browser.
The DWG tab lets you display a Layer dialog box

listing all the layers present in a DWG overlay. Using
this dialog box, layer visibility may be toggled on or
off as required. It also includes a setting to enable a
drawing preview of the DWG overlay.
The Templates tab lets you specify the template file

to be used for new factory layouts and for the
creation of both part and assembly assets.
The Snap tab controls whether snaps are enabled

and sets the active distance for snaps.
The Assets tab contains the default locations for

assets download from the Autodesk Cloud. These
assets are not locally available unless the users
chooses to download them from the Asset Browser.

The Factory User Interface Floor/Grid Settings
You can manage floor and grid settings using the Floor/Grid Settings dialog box. The settings enable you
to customize the floor size and style, as well as the grid that appears on the floor.
The preference settings only affect the current document. Settings such as floor size and grid spacing can
vary depending on whether you are designing a work cell or an entire factory. For example, you would
want a small section of floor for designing a work cell. The floor size usually matches the building for
laying out an entire factory. If you change the settings in the template, all new documents use those
settings. For existing documents, you have to change the settings in each document if you want the new
behavior.
In the Floor Settings area, uncheck Visible to

turn off the floor display. Select Auto Size to
have the floor dynamically change size based on
component placement, or User Defined to
specify a fixed size for the floor.
Note: To change the minimum floor size for
Auto Size, select User Defined and enter the
floor dimensions, then select Auto Size again.
In the Floor Style area, uncheck Floor Border to

turn off the display. To change the Floor Color,
click the drop-down arrow to display the color
palette. You can select one of the basic colors or
click Select Color to display the Color dialog
box, where you can define a custom color.
In the Grid Settings area, uncheck Visibility to

turn off the grid display. You can individually
control whether Major Grids, Minor Grids, XY
Axes, and the Coordinate System Triad are
displayed.
The Minor Grid Spacing controls the distance
between grid lines. By default, every other grid
line is displayed as a major grid line. You can
enter an integer from 1 through 512 to change
the frequency of the Major grid lines.
In the Grid Style area, you can set the Major

Grid Color and the Minor Grid Color. Click the
drop-down arrow to display the color palette.
You can select one of the basic colors or click
Select Color to display the Color dialog box,
where you can define a custom color.

The Factory User Interface Resize Floor
You can use Resize Floor to change the floor size by manually dragging the borders. When you click
Resize Floor, grips display at the corners and midpoints of the floor edges. When you drag a grip, a value
input box displays the floor dimension.
The new floor size is saved in the Floor/Grid Settings dialog box. If Auto Resize is enabled, Resize Floor
also changes the minimum floor size settings.
A spherical grip also appears at the 0,0 factory floor origin. You can drag this grip up or down to change
the Z-axis elevation of the factory floor (Shown in the image below).

The Factory User Interface Snap Types
You can quickly enable or disable snap types by using the Snap Types drop-down menu on the Options
panel of the Factory tab. The snap options are synchronized with the settings in the Factory Options
dialog box.
Snap to Floor Snaps to the floor plane.
Snap to Grid Snaps to the intersection of any major or

minor grid lines.
Snap to Sketch Snaps to endpoints, midpoints, or along any

Inventor sketched entity.
Snap to Connector Snaps to predefined connection points that

have been defined in assets.
Snap to DWG Overlay Snaps to endpoints, midpoints, or along any

drawing entity on the DWG overlay.
Note: If the Snap Types drop-down list is

disabled, open the Factory Options dialog
box, click the Snap tab, and activate the
Enable check box.

Getting Started DWG Overlay
A 2D drawing of a factory floor layout showing all factory components and personnel in their proper
locations can be created in AutoCAD. The drawing can also be created in another CAD program capable
of outputting a file in DWG format. Using the Add DWG Overlay command, the drawing can then be
overlaid onto the factory floor in Inventor Factory to serve as a snap-to guide in the precise placement of
3D factory assets.
After placement, right-clicking the DWG overlay node in the assembly browser displays a pop-up context
menu with various options. The drawing may be repositioned, scaled, rotated, or deleted. The visibility of
drawing layers may also be toggled on and off.
On the ribbon, click Factory tab >Layout Tools panel>Add DWG Overlay to
display the Select DWG file dialog box.
Reposition DWG You can reposition a DWG overlay after placing it onto the factory floor.
Overlays Using a 3-axis triad, you can move the overlay in the X and/or Y directions.
The Z-axis of the triad lets you rotate the overlay into a new orientation. The
translations or rotations are performed from the 0, 0 origin of the DWG
overlay. To access the reposition option, right-click over the DWG overlay
node and select Reposition from the shortcut menu.
Transform DWG A DWG overlay can also be repositioned, as well as scaled, using the
Overlays Transform command. Unlike the Reposition command which moves the
overlay relative to the 0,0 origin of the drawing, the Transform command
moves the overlay relative to the 0,0 origin of the factory floor.

Control Layer Upon initial placement of a DWG overlay, you have the option to toggle on or off
Visibility the visibility of any layers defined in the 2D drawing. This capability, as well as a
drawing preview in the Layer Settings dialog box (if both are enabled using the
Factory Options command) updates to reflect any changes you make to layer
visibility. To access the Layer Control, Right-click over the DWG overlay node and
select Layer Settings from the pop-up context menu.
You can return to the Layer Settings dialog box at any time if you wish to change the
on/off visibility status of any of the layers.
Update DWG There is associativity between the 2D drawing from which the DWG overlay
Overlays originated and the 3D factory layout. If any revisions occur to the original drawing
file, you can read the changes back into Inventor Factory using the Update
command. Right-click over the DWG overlay browser node and select Update from
the pop-up context menu.
Delete DWG A drawing overlay may be deleted at anytime. Right-click over the DWG overlay
Overlays node and select Delete from the shortcut menu.

Getting Started Make Layout
You can create an Inventor based layout sketch for the floor of the Factory Layout assembly that
provides a 2D representation of the factory floor design. The layout uses 2D, Inventor based, sketch
geometry to represent design components and their locations. The geometry can be created using
standard Inventor sketch tools or you can import data from an existing DWG file.
On the ribbon, click Factory tab > Layout Tools panel >
Make Layout.
In the Make Layout dialog box, enter a name for the layout
file, select its template file, and define its storage location.
Click OK. The Sketch tab becomes the active tab.
Use the standard Inventor sketching tools to define the

layout or click ACAD in the Insert panel and import an
existing AutoCAD DWG file.
As an alternative, you might consider using the Add DWG

Overlay command if you have an existing 2D layout of a
factory floor.
Click Finish Sketch to complete the layout and exit the

sketch environment. The layout is automatically placed on
the floor of the Factory Layout assembly. Multiple layouts
can be created.

Exercise: Creating a 2. Start a New Factory Layout.
On the Factory Launch panel, click the
Factory Layout. New Layout tool.
In this exercise, you set your default

factory options and start a new factory
layout. Once the Layout is created,
Floor and Snap settings are adjusted
and a DWG Overlay is placed on the
Factory Floor.
Note the presence of the Floor object

(Unique to the Factory Design Suite).
Notice the Factory Ribbon active by
default in this environment.
3. Review the Factory Floor Settings.

On the Options Panel, click the Resize
Floor command.
1. Set your factory options

On the getting started ribbon click the
Factory Options tool. Drag the Grips at the edge of the floor
to resize the floor manually.
Note: Numeric values may also be
entered.
Set the DWG Overlay Options as

shown below.
Right-click and select Done from the

menu.
Review the other tabs available in the

dialog box and then click close.

4. Review the Floor Display Options 6. Click OK on the Warning that some
On the Options Panel, click the Floor graphical elements are not supported.
and Grid Settings tool.
Toggle the visibility option in the Floor

Settings area off, then click Apply. 7. Set the Layer Settings for the DWG
Toggle the visibility option in the Floor Overlay.
Settings area back on, then click In the Browser Right click on the DWG
Apply. node and select Layer settings from
the menu.
Repeat the previous step toggling the

visibility of the Grid Settings Area On
and Off.
Set the Layer settings according to the

following image and Click OK.
Return the Floor settings to the

default settings and click OK.
5. Add a DWG Overlay to the Factory

Floor.
10. On the Layout Tools Panel, Start the
ADD DWG Overlay tool.
11. In the Select DWG Dialog box, navigate

to the exercise files and select
ACA_012_Complete.dwg and Click OK.
8. Close the file without Saving

Lesson: Placing Factory Assets
A factory design can be populated with component data from multiple sources. You can insert
components that exist in the Factory Assets library or you can insert external content. The
Factory Assets library contains part and assembly models for use in a Factory Layout assembly.
The System Assets directory contains content provided with the Inventor Factory Design Utility
and the User Assets directory is for content that you publish. You access the Factory Assets
library from the Assets Browser.
Objectives
Review the Contents of the Factory Asset Browser.

Place Assets on the Factory Floor.
Connect Assets together to form a conveyor line.

Placing Factory Assets - The Asset Browser
The System Assets directory contains content provided with the Inventor Factory Design Utility and the User
Assets directory is for content that you publish. You access the Factory Assets library from the Assets
Browser.
1. The main pane of the Factory Asset

Browser displays a folder structure of
common and custom factory assets. This
pane allows the users to manually
navigate thru the directory structure to
locate the desired factory asset.
2. The Search window allows users to easily
find a factory asset by entering the full or
partial name of the asset. A list of valid
search terms is dynamically displayed.
You can click one of the terms to
populate the search field.
3. Common Directory Navigation tools are
available at the top of the asset browser.
To return to the top level to access the User
Assets content library, click the Folder up
button . From this location, you can
double-click folders to move lower or use the
Folder up button to move higher in the tree
structure.
At the top of the Assets Browser, you can
switch to display contents in a Tree View. You
can then navigate through the Factory Assets
library by expanding directories
The refresh button offers a manual method of
updating the Asset Browser display after
custom assets have been published.
4. The Cloud Asset Enabled/Disabled icon
displays the whether the ability to download
Cloud based assets is Enabled or Disabled.
This functionality is controlled by the Factory
Options.

Placing Factory Assets Factory
Once a component from the Assets Browser is placed, you can select it and change the available Model
parameters or Miscellaneous parameters.
Once an asset is selected, any of the values

displayed in the Factory Properties
Browser can be edited. Only the Model
parameters that were specified as Key
parameters when it was published are
listed in the Properties Browser. Only a
select few iProperty parameters are also
listed in the Properties Browser. These
iProperty parameters include Name, Title,
Author, Company, Catalog, Keywords, and
Comments.
At the top of the Factory Properties

browser there are several tools that assist
in the organization and updating of the
asset parameters.
The first icon on the left is the Alphabetical

tools, it allows you to sort the properties
alphabetically.
The Refresh Tool allows you to restore a
modified value.
The Update button allows you to finalize a
change and update the model at the same
time. You can also use the enter key on
the keyboard to update the component
after modifying a parameter value.
The Update Other Instances button allows
you to modify multiple instances of the
same asset at one time.

Placing Factory Assets Factory Asset Preview
After locating the content you want in the Assets Browser, you can right-click over the asset to display a pop-
up context menu. The context menu for a System Asset offers two options - Explore and Preview.
Clicking Explore opens Windows Explorer and navigates to the Factory Library folder location so you can
verify where the asset resides.
The Preview option launches a separate preview window displaying the selected asset. The preview window
allows the users to zoom and rotate the asset prior to placement.

Exercise: Place Factory 3.

Preview the Factory Asset
Right Click on the Straight Belt
Assets Conveyor and select Preview from the
menu.
In this exercise, you place various
factory assets as you complete a
conveyor line.
Using the Left Mouse Button, Drag

and orbit the asset preview.
Using the Scroll Wheel, Zoom in and
Out of the asset preview.
Close the Preview Window.
The Completed Exercise
1. Open the Exercise file.

AFDS_001_Place_Assets.iam.
Right Click on the DWG overlay
node and click update if necessary.
2. Navigate to an Asset using the Asset

Browser. 4. Place the first asset.
Activate the Asset browser if Using the Left Mouse Button, Drag from
the Straight Belt Icon into the model
necessary
pane.
View ribbon / User Interface. Release the Left Mouse Button and
notice that the conveyor moves freely
across the factory floor.
Zoom into the DWG overlay and Left
Click to place the conveyor at the snap
point shown in the following image.
Manually navigate thru the

default directory structure to
the Straight Belt Conveyor
System Assets / Conveyor / Belt
/ Straight Belt.

5. Specify the rotation angle. 7. Continue placing the second asset with
Move the mouse around to specify the connection points.
the rotation angle Sub Step 2 Move the new asset closer to the
previous conveyor and the green
connectors will snap together.
Lock the rotation angle by moving the

cursor over another line in the DWG
Overlay as shown in the following
Left Click to place the second
image.
conveyor asset as shown in the
Left Click to Place the define the
following image.
rotation angle at 0.00.
Right Click and select Done from the

menu.
6. Add another instance of the conveyor

using the connection points.
Another instance of the conveyor asset
is automatically available for placement.
Slowly move the new asset near the
conveyor that was placed previously.
Notice the green connector dots at the
end of each conveyor. When the assets
come close to one another, a yellow line
signifies that they are being drawn
together.

8. Using the process described above TIP
place the rest of the conveyor assets in Disassembling Factory Assets
the line.
Note: All Assets use default lengths and During the course of this exercise, it may be
widths. necessary to disconnect a factory asset after
Note: The height of the legs will placing it.
automatically adjust on the high end of To disconnect a factory asset:
the incline conveyor.
Hold the F7 button down
Use the image below to determine the
Drag the desired asset away from the
proper asset.
connected asset.
When the line is complete, close the
Release the mouse button.
file without saving.
Release the F7 Key.
Left Click to Place the define the
rotation angle at 0.00.

Lesson: Inserting a Model
The Factory Assets library will not contain all the required components for Factory Layout assembly. For
example, infrequently used components are not usually published into the library. For these situations,
you can add a model directly to the layout
A Factory Layout can be populated with component data from multiple sources. You can insert
components from the System Assets and User Assets content libraries, or you can insert external content.
External content represents any data that has not been customized and placed in the Factory Assets
library. This data includes standard Inventor part and assembly files, or files from other CAD products.
1. In the Insert Model dialog box, browse to the folder location, select the file to
insert into the layout, and select Open.
Drag the selected component to the required location in the layout and press the
left mouse button to insert the component. The component is displayed inside a
bounding box. The sides of the bounding box are parallel to the component origin
planes. The insertion point is the corner of the bounding box that aligns with the
origin coordinate system.
2. When locating the component in the Factory Layout assembly you can snap to the
following:
Grids: Drag the component to the intersection of two gridlines on the
factory floor and select once using the left mouse button. The Snap to Grid
Snap Type must be enabled to allow grid snapping.
Sketch: Drag the component to a sketch entity on the layout and select
once using the left mouse button. Components can be snapped to
endpoints, midpoints, and along an entity. The Snap to Sketch Snap Type
must be enabled to allow sketch snapping.
DWG Overlay: Drag the component to a 2D entity on the drawing overlay
and select once using the left mouse button. Components can be snapped
to endpoints, midpoints, and along an entity. The Snap to DWG Overlay
Snap Type must be enabled to allow overlay snapping.
3. The component is placed in a default orientation in the XY plane. To adjust the
orientation, select the XY, ZX, or YZ, mini-toolbar options that appear below the
component.

Lesson: Reposition Components
The Reposition command helps you accurately position single or multiple components on a factory floor.
A triad is provided for selecting axes or planes to reposition components by translation or rotation.
1. On the ribbon, click Factory tab >Layout Tools panel >Reposition

2. Select the component you want to reposition. A triad appears next to the
component. The triad position and orientation vary depending on where
you click on the component.
To select additional components, click the triad and then click a

component. The triad moves to a position between the components. You
can repeat the process to add additional components to the selection set.
The triad position updates after each component is added.
3. Use the triad to move or rotate the components. Depending on where
you click on the triad, you can make planar (2D) translations, axial
translations, or axial rotations.
o On the Triad, select a plane for 2D repositioning of the
component.
o
To dynamically reposition the component, click and drag the
plane.
To manually reposition the component, click the plane once and

enter the translation values in the Heads-Up Display. Press Enter
to move the component and close the HUD.
o On the Triad, select the shaft of an axis for linear repositioning of
the component.
To dynamically reposition the component, click and drag the shaft
of the axis to move the component.
To manually reposition the component, click the shaft of the axis
and enter the translation value in the Heads Up Display. Press
Enter to move the component and close the HUD.
o On the Triad, select the end of an axis to rotate the component.
To dynamically rotate the component, click and drag the end of

the axis to move the component.
To manually rotate the component, click the end of the axis and
enter the translation value in the Heads Up Display. Press Enter to
rotate the component and close the HUD.
4. Right-click and select Done to accept the changes and exit the Reposition
command. Right-click and select Cancel to exit the Reposition command
without moving the components.
Note: The Reposition command can position the component off the floor,
regardless of whether the Snap to Floor Snap Type is on

Exercise: Insert Model 3.

Modify the Landing face.
Move the model around the floor
In this exercise, you insert an existing noticing the bounding box that
model onto the factory floor. surrounds the component.
Place the model close to the outline of
the DWG Overlay shown below.
1. Open the exercise file

AFDS_002_Insert_Model.iam
Left Click to Place the model.
Select the XY, ZX, or YZ buttons on the
2. Fourth Objective heads up display to change the default
On the Factory Asset Panel, start the landing position.
Insert Model tool.
On the Insert Model Dialog, expand
the Files of Type drop down and
review the possible file types
supported by the Factory Design Suite.
When the correct landing position is

displayed, click the green checkmark.
Navigate to the Components directory

and select Blower.ipt.
Click Open

4. Reposition the inserted model. 6. Use the methods demonstrated in this
On the Layout Tools Panel, start the exercise to position the Robot_Table.ipt
Reposition tool. on the second Conveyor Line, as shown
If necessary, select the inserted in the following image.
model.
Click on the vertical Blue (Z) axis as
Enter the value -90 in the heads up

display.
End of Exercise
Press the Enter button.

menu.
5. Move the Model into position.

Use the View Cube to reorient the
assembly to the Top View as shown.
Drag the model to the desired position.

Note: for this exercise the asset location
will not be fully defined. Autodesk
Inventor offers several methods for
positioning components accurately.

Lesson: Aligning Components
Using the Align dialog box, you can align multiple components in various directions and orientations based on
a selected reference component. The dialog box consists of two tabs - one for aligning components and the
other for distributing components.
Selection: Assigns a reference component and components to align to it.
Align Position: Moves selected components to a location defined by another component without
changing their orientation. The components can be aligned horizontally or vertically based on the left,
right, top, or bottom edges of their respective bounding boxes relative to the reference component. They
may also be aligned horizontally or vertically based on the centers of their respective bounding boxes.
Align Orientation: Aligns selected components to a reference component without changing their position.
Orients the X or Y axes of the selected component to the X or Y axes of the reference component.
Distribute: The Distribute tab lets you align components horizontally or vertically based on their left
edges, center points, or right edges. The alignment occurs between the selected components, and does
not use a reference component. Distribute also aligns components so that they can be equally spaced
along horizontal or vertical intervals.

On the ribbon, click Factory tab > Layout Tools panel > Align. The Align
dialog box opens with the Align tab active.
Use the Align dialog box to orient the X or Y axis of selected components to
the X or Y axis of a reference component.
You can choose from among the following:
Align Position Horizontal Left

Align Position Horizontal Center
Align Position Horizontal Right
Align Position Vertical Top
Align Position Vertical Center
Align Position Vertical Bottom
Click the Distribute tab and using the Components selection tool in the
Selection section, select the components you want to distribute.
You can choose from among the following:
Align Distribution Horizontal Left

Align Distribution Horizontal Center
Align Distribution Horizontal Right
Align Distribution Horizontal Interval
Align Distribution Vertical Top
Align Distribution Vertical Center
Align Distribution Vertical Bottom
Align Distribution Vertical Interval

Exercise: Align Components
In this exercise, use the Align
command to align components and
distribute components across the
factory floor.
1. Open the exercise file 3. Align the 4 Crates.

AFDS_003_Align.iam. Start the Align command again.
2. Align the Forklift and Crate with the Select the 3 crates on the right as
Roller Conveyor. shown in the following image.
On the Factory Tools Panel, start the
Align tool.
Select the Crate and the Forklift as

Click the Reference selector in the

dialog box and select the left Crate.
Select Align Position Vertical Top.
In the Align Dialog box, click the

Reference selector
Select the Straight Roller Conveyor
nearest the Crate.
Click the Align X button at the bottom
of the Align Dialog Box.
Click Apply
Click OK.
Drag the Crate and Forklift into
position as shown in the following
image.

4. Distribute the Crates evenly.
Start the Align command if necessary
Click the Distribution tab.
Select the 4 crates as shown in the
following image.
Click the Align Distribution Horizontal

Left option.
Click OK.
End of Exercise

Lesson: Modify Asset Properties
Values for any of the parameters listed in the Factory Properties browser can be selected and edited to
change the properties of the component. Any changes made to the selected component only reflect in
that specific instance of the component. Changes do not affect the Factory Assets library.
The Properties Browser becomes populated with component Model and Miscellaneous parameter data
when a parameterized component is selected in the Factory Layout assembly. Model parameters
represent the modeling parameters that have been specified as Key Parameters within a component. The
Miscellaneous parameters represent specific iProperty parameters that can be modified.
At the top of the Factory Properties browser there are several tools
that assist in the organization and updating of the asset parameters.
The first icon on the left is the Alphabetical tools, it allows you to sort
the properties alphabetically.
The Refresh Tool allows you to restore a modified value.
The Update button allows you to finalize a change and update the
model at the same time. You can also use the enter key on the
keyboard to update the component after modifying a parameter value.
The Update Other Instances button allows you to modify multiple
instances of the same asset at one time.
The Model section of the Factory Properties browser provides access
to the modeling parameters that have been specified as Key
Parameters within the asset.
Only a select few iProperty parameters are listed in the Factory

Properties browser. These iProperty parameters include Name, Title,
Author, Company, Catalog, Keywords, and Comments.

Exercise: Modify Asset Modify the Length Parameter with the
Value of 196.
Properties
In this exercise, place and modify assets
using the Factory Properties browser.
Press Enter or click the Update tool at

the top of the Factory Properties
browser.

Drag the updated asset into the
proper position as shown in the
1. Open the exercise file following image.
AFDS_004_Modify_Asset_Properties.iam
2. Place a Straight Belt Conveyor on the DWG

Overlay as shown in the following image.
4. Add a Y Merge Belt Conveyor (Left) as

3. Modify the Length Parameter of the new

asset.
Activate the Factory Properties browser
if necessary. The option is accessed on
the View Tab under the User Interface
tool.

5. Add and modify a Curved Belt Conveyor.
Add a Horizontal Curve Belt Conveyor
as shown in the following image.
Select the new asset and modify the

angle value in the Factory Properties
browser. Change the Angle value to
45.
Click the Update tool on the Factory
Properties browser.
End of Exercise
Lesson: Creating Basic Swept Shapes 31

Exercise: Challenge Tips to complete the Challenge Exercise
Use the Copy / Paste method to quickly
In this exercise, you practice the create copies of assets. After pasting the
processes learned in this chapter. asset into the factory layout, drag it into
position as normal.
Copy multiple assets by holding the shift
button down while selecting.
All Long Conveyors are 196 in Length.
The Storage Rack assets are located in the
System Asset folder, in the Material
Handling directory.
When Placing the Storage Racks, modify
the ColumnNumber value to 2, and the
The Completed Exercise RowNumber value to 1.

AFDS_005_Challenge.iam
2. Place and modify the necessary assets to

complete the second conveyor line.
Use the diagram provided below to

determine the correct asset or model to
place on the factory floor.
Note: Unless otherwise noted, use the
default Parameters.

Chapter Summary
the design process.
Use the Factory Specific Ribbons

Place Assets on the Factory Floor using the Asset Browser
Insert Existing Models onto the Factory Floor.
Modify Factory assets with the Factory Properties Browser
Lesson: Creating Basic Swept Shapes 33

Chapter
10
Factory Asset Publishing

One of the main keys to success and productivity with the Autodesk Factory Design Suite, is the
ability for each users to establish and maintain a custom library of factory assets unique to the
products and processes of individual customers. In previous chapters, we have demonstrated the
process of creating Inventor components that will be used as factory assets. In this chapter we will
demonstrate the process of establishing Landing Surfaces and connection point. We will also
explore the process of publishing these assets to a user library that is accessible from the Factory
Asset browser.
Objectives
Use the Asset Builder to Create Factory assets.
Establish a Landing Surface for a new factory assets.
Establish Connection Points for new factory assets.
Identify Key Parameters for use during factory asset placement.
Publish Assets to a custom user library.
Test new Factory Assets.
Chapter 10: Factory Asset Publishing 1

Lesson: Asset Creation
The Autodesk Inventor Factory Design Utility provides users with predefined system content that is
included with the product. The Create Asset command enables you to create new, or use, existing
data. The data is authored and published into a User Assets library, with the provided system
content. Standard Inventor parts and assemblies can be created and used as content for a factory
library, or you can import existing Inventor part and assembly files.
Content in the Factory Assets library can be parameterized to capture its intent in the Factory Layout
assembly. Therefore, the data that drives it must contain the necessary parameters. The import
process creates base features in Inventor that are representative of the geometry and topology in
the source file. You can use Inventor commands to adjust the base features and add new features;
however, you cannot modify or parameterize the base feature. If secondary Inventor features
contain all required parameters necessary, you can use the imported data.
Objectives

2 Chapter 10: Factory Asset Publishing

Asset Creation
The Autodesk Factory Design Utility provides a content library of System Assets that you can use to
create factory layouts. You can author and publish additional assets into the library. You can create the
models in Inventor, or you can use models from other CAD systems.
The Asset Builder environment provides tools to author and publishes the models into the library. The
authoring tools define the interface geometry and the key parameters. The publishing tool saves the
file to the library.
The Create Asset tool is located in multiple locations. It is available

in the following locations.
Getting Started ribbon > Factory Launch panel

Factory ribbon > Factory Asset Panel
With an Inventor Part Open, The Environments ribbon
The Model as part option allows the users to create a factory asset
from scratch using a new Inventor part file.
The Model as Assembly option allows the user to create a factory

asset from scratch using a new Inventor assembly file.
The Import Asset option allows the user to create a factory asset
from an existing model file. The user can choose to use an existing
Inventor model or select from various model formats for import.
This image shows the various file types available for import as
factory assets.

Asset Builder
After all model features and parameters are created, the Asset Builder is used to convert the model to
an asset. The Asset Builder environment provides tools to author and publish the models into the asset
library. The authoring tools define the interface geometry and the key parameters. The publishing tool
saves the file to the asset library.
The Asset Builder tool is available on the Factory ribbon in the Inventor
part and assembly environments. Click this tool to launch the Asset
Builder environment.
1. Set Landing Surface Defines a landing surface and insertion points on a Factory Asset.
2. Define Connector Defines Connection points on a Factory Asset.
3. Measure Panel The Measure tools are provided for the asset authoring process.
4. Work Features Panel The Work Features are provided for the asset authoring process.
5. Parameters Panel Provides access to the Parameter table.
6. Publish Asset Starts the Publish Asset process.
7. Finish Asset Builder Exits the Asset Builder Environment.

Asset Creation
Setting a Landing Surface

Components in a Factory Layout assembly design are usually placed onto the floor. For the component
to orient itself properly relative to the floor, it requires a defined landing surface. The landing surface
defines the plane on the component that is positioned relative to the floor. When authoring content, it
is important to use the Landing Surface command to establish how the component is located relative to
the factory floor.
Note: Establishing a landing surface on a component is not required for publishing to the Factory Assets
library.
All components provided in the System Assets content of the Factory Assets library have predefined
landing surfaces.
The Landing Surface tool is the first Icon of the

Asset Builder ribbon.
The Placement section of the Landing surface

dialog box helps define the position and direction
of the landing plane.
Click this button to select the landing plane in the

model. You can select a planar face, a work plane,
or a 3D sketch plane.
Click the Flip direction button to flip the positive
side of the current landing plane.
Click the Insertion point button to select one or
more insertion points for the model. You can select
a vertex, work point, or sketch point.
Enter a value to place an offset for the landing
plane.

The Options section of the Landing Surface dialog
box provides options for visual feedback for the
landing surface.
Click the Show coordinates button to display or

hide the coordinate system.
Click the Preview button to view a preview of the
landing surface.
Asset Creation - Defining Connector Points

Connectors can be used to help assemble components on the factory floor. Connectors allow snapping
between specific points on each component and aligning them based on the axes of the connector
points.
The Define Connector tool is located on the Author
panel of the Asset Builder.
Connector Points may be created on the following:

A planar face
A vertex
A midpoint
An endpoint
A hole center
A work point
A work plane
After you select the Connector location, the The red axis on the triad represents the X
connector point triad appears at the point direction for the object as seen from the
you selected. plan view (Looking down from the top).
This is the direction in which the
connection is to be made.
The green axis indicates the side of the
connection
The blue axis indicated the top, or up,
side of the connection.
The origin ball of the triad may be selected
and moved to a different location.

Exercise: Create Asset 3. Define the Landing Surface.
On the Asset Builder ribbon, Click
Landing Surface and the Set Landing Surface tool.
Connector Points.
In this exercise, you begin the process
of authoring a factory asset. You will
import an existing Inventor model
and define a Landing Surface,
Insertion points, and Connector
points.
Select the planar face as shown in the
following image as the landing
surface.
1. Close all Inventor Files.

On the Getting Started ribbon, click
the Create Asset > Import Model tool. In the Landing Surface dialog box,
click the Insertion Point selector and
select the 4 bottom outside corners of
the conveyor legs.
In the Import Asset dialog, select the

AFDS_006_Conveyor_Straight.ipt
part file.
Click Open.
2. On the Factory ribbon, click the Asset Click OK.

Builder tool.

4. Define the Connector Points To define the Z direction (UP) select
On the Author panel, start the Define the Blue axis of the triad.
Connector tool.
Click the work point at the top end of

the conveyor as shown in the
following image.
Select the top face of the belt as
To define the X direction of the

connector, click the red arrow of the
triad.
Right Click and select OK from the
menu.
Select the left end face of the

conveyor channel.
The Green sphere indicates the

connector point.

5. Define the opposite Connector Point.
Repeat the Connector Point process
to define the connector point at the
opposite end of the conveyor.
Note: If the Blue Z (UP) axis points
down after selection a vertical edge,
select it again and use another vertical
edge.
Click the Finish Asset Builder tool and

Save the file.
End of Exercise
NOTE: Please save the file for future use.

Lesson: Defining Key Parameters.
Various parameters can be created during the model creation process. Only specific parameters, marked
as Key parameters are available for edit during asset placement. The Properties Browser becomes
populated with component Model and Miscellaneous parameter data when a parameterized component
is selected in the Factory Layout assembly. Named model parameters that have been specified as Key
Parameters within a component and miscellaneous parameters representing specific iProperty
parameters can be modified.
Note: Parameters can be marked as Key at any point in the modeling process.
In the Asset Builder environment, the Key

Parameters browser is displayed. The Key
Parameters Browser displays all named
parameters. Check marks are placed by
parameters that will be available for modification
when the asset is selected in the factory layout.
The Parameters command on the Asset Builder

ribbon provides access to the model parameter
table.
Parameters in the table can be marked as key by

placing a check mark in the Key column.

Lesson: Publishing Assets
Publishing the asset adds the model to the User Assets Folder of the Factory Asset library. Once an asset
is published it can be inserted from the Asset Browser into the factory layout.
The Publish Asset tool is located on the Asset

Builder ribbon. This command launches the
Publish Asset dialog.
Note: A model or assembly cannot be published if
it has a pending save.
1. The upper left portion of the Publish Asset

dialog allows the designer to select an
existing destination folder from the tree
list or create a new sub-folder.
2. Specific iProperty values are available to
modify in the upper right portion of the
Publish Asset dialog.
3. The Preview portion of the Publish Asset
dialog allows the designer to view the icon
that will represent the asset in the Asset
Browser.
The Replace Preview button allows users
to substitute the automatic image with
another image file.
Note: Supported Image Files include
.PNG, .BMP, and .JPG.

Exercise: Select Key 3.

Publish the Asset.
On the Asset Builder ribbon, start the
Parameters and Publish Publish Asset tool.
Asset
In this exercise, you verify that the
desired parameters are marked as
Key and then publish the conveyor
asset to the Factory Asset library. In the Publish Asset Dialog, select the
User Assets folder as shown in the
following image.
Fill out the iProperty information

similar the following image.
1. Continue using the file from the

previous exercise or open the exercise
file AFDS_006_Conveyor_Straight_.ipt.
If necessary, click the Asset Builder
tool to activate the Asset Builder
environment.
2. Review the Key Parameters

Review the contents of the Key
Parameters browser. Click OK to Publish the Asset.
Notice the available parameters. All Close the file without saving.
Named parameters are listed in the
Key Parameters dialog.
Place a check mark beside the 4. Locate the Published Asset in the Asset
following parameters. Browser.
Start a new Factory Layout.
Click Refresh on the Asset Browser.
In the Search window type AFDS and
click the search button.

5.

Test the Factory Asset.
Place the new asset on the factory
Challenge Exercise
floor. Using the processes described in this
Place a second instance of the asset chapter, complete the Asset
and connect it to the first. Authoring process for the Curved Belt
Select one of the assets and modify Conveyor.
the Length parameter in the Factory
Properties browser. Change the
Length value to 200.
Click the Update button on the
Factory Properties browser.
Close all files without saving.

AFDS_007_Conveyor_Curved.ipt
2. Using the processes from the previous
exercises, Author and Publish the
Curved Conveyor Asset.
3. Hints for this exercise.

End of Exercise Define the Landing surface
Use the supplied work points to
define the connectors.
Make sure to mark the Key
Parameters as shown in the following
image.
Publish the Asset to the User Asset

Folder.
Start a new Layout and test the both
assets created in this chapter.

Chapter Summary
This chapter presented the tools and recommended workflows for asset authoring and publishing.
Using these techniques, you can now create factory assets and publish them to the factory asset
library.
Use the Asset Builder to Create Factory assets.


Chapter
11
Workflow and Best Practices

Designing a complete factory layout with all architectural elements and thousands for factory assets
is quite a lot for a single computer program to handle. Autodesk Factory Design Suite allows factory
designers and system integrators to work with factory that are beyond the capability of most
computer applications. In order to work with so many components efficiently, it is important to
understand the Project settings, Workflows, and Best Practices for using the Autodesk Factory Design
Suite.
Objectives
Create a Project file for a typical factory design.
Understand the supporting file directories for Autodesk Factory Design Suite.
Understand the Best Practice for dividing a factory design into sub-layout.
Understand the Best Practice for modeling a Simplified form for factory assets.
Chapter 11: Workflow and Best Practices 1

Lesson: Using Project Files for Factory Design.
This lesson describes the characteristics and implementation of Autodesk Inventor project
files. You use project files to resolve path locations. When an assembly file is loaded, the
location of the part files must be resolved. The same is true when loading a drawing or
presentation file.
It is important to understand how Autodesk Inventor accesses and stored files used to design the
factory layout. It is also important to develop and utilize libraries of custom data to support the
common components to all designs. This section will outline the process of creating an Inventor
project file for factory design. It will also explore the supporting directories used by the project file.
Objectives
Create an Inventor Project file for factory layout design.

Understand the supporting settings and directories used by the project file and the
application.
2 Chapter 11: Workflow and Best Practices

About Project Files
Before you start any layout, you will want to create a project for your parts/layouts to be saved in. This
will help you to keep your files organized, and help prevent incorrectly saving over your parts with
modifications for another project. Not only will each project be able to help you clarify what job you are
working on, but models provided from different vendors, or created for a specific line, can be placed in
libraries specific for each project.
If you are a veteran Inventor user, you will notice that the typical Inventor project practices are used to
work for factory layouts. The Autodesk Factory Utilities provide additional options for the following.
Asset Creation Templates
Factory Asset Library Location
Factory Asset Storage Directories
File Relationships
When you use Autodesk Inventor software to create designs, each one consists of multiple files and
file types. The design and documentation of a single part file require at least two separate files: (a) a
part file and (b) a drawing file. The design and documentation of assembly models require a minimum
of three different file types: (a) assembly files, (b) part files, and (c) drawing files.
Using separate files for each file type is critical for performance and is common among most
parametric modeling systems. By storing path information for each project, the application can search
for the required files when opening an assembly, presentation, or drawing file. The need to search in
different path locations for files is the primary purpose of project files.
The following illustration shows file dependencies in a typical assembly design.
Assemblies reference parts.

Drawings reference parts.
Drawings reference assemblies.
Drawings reference presentations.
Presentations reference assemblies.
When you open an assembly, drawing, or presentation file, the active project file is used to resolve
path locations to the referenced files.

Definition of Project Files
A project file is an ASCII text file that is stored with an *.ipj file extension. The file contains information
about paths and other options that enable Inventor to resolve the file references of other files when
you open an assembly, presentation, or drawing file.
When you create designs you probably organize them in different folder locations. The same is true
for Autodesk Inventor project files. You generally create one project file for each design you create.
While there is no limit to the number of project files you can create, only one project can be active at
a time.
In the following illustration, the active project is identified by the check mark.
Example of a Project File

It is recommended that you store your project file in the upper level folder of your project design
folders. This keeps your project file organized with your designs and simplifies portability issues.
The following illustration shows the folder structure for a project and where the project file is located.
A typical project might have assets and assemblies unique to the project, standard assets unique to
your company, and purchased components such as fixtures, fittings, or electrical components.
To reduce the possibility of file resolution problems, set up a folder structure before you create a
project and start saving files. To help organize your design files, it is a good idea to set up subfolders
under your project workspace or workgroup folder. You can keep all your design files for a project
in the subfolders, making it a logical way to organize the files used in a design project. Because
references are stored as relative paths from project folders, if you change the folder structure, move,
or rename files, you are likely to break file references.
Always save new files in the workspace or workgroup defined for your project or one of its subfolders.

Projects Folder Option
Because you can store your project files in several different locations, you need an efficient way of
locating them. Rather than search every folder on your computer or network, Autodesk Inventor uses
Microsoft Windows shortcuts to point to the project files that have been accessed on your computer.
Click Tools tab > Application Options, then click the Files tab in the Application Options dialog box. The
default Projects Folder option is set to your Documents\Inventor folder. If you want to use a different
path for your project files, enter or browse to a new location.

In the following illustration, the Documents\Inventor folder is selected to list all files. The Project file
shortcuts in the right pane of the Explorer window are not the actual project files. They are Microsoft
Windows shortcuts to the actual project files.
Project File Configuration

Each project file contains a series of categories and options. To successfully design a project file, you
must understand how to use these categories and options, to ensure proper file referencing when you
design assemblies.
Projects Dialog Box

You use the Projects dialog box to create, edit, or set a project file to current. The dialog box is divided
into two panes. The top pane lists the currently available projects, while the lower pane shows the
settings and configured options for the selected project.

Option Description
Select Project Select a project to edit it, or double-click a project to make it active.
Pane
Note: You cannot edit the active project or activate a different project if there
are files open in Autodesk Inventor.
Edit Project Select the category or right-click the option you want to change. When you
Pane edit search paths they are divided into two sections: (a) Named Shortcut and
(b) Category Search Path.
Named Enter the shortcut name as you would like it to appear in the Open dialog box.
Shortcut This enables you to navigate easily to the search path.
Category Enter the path name or click the browse button to define the path location.
Search Path

Open Dialog Box: Location Shortcuts
When you open files, the Locations area of the dialog box displays all of the named shortcuts
contained in the active project.
Project File Categories

Each project file is divided into separate categories in which you define different paths. A typical
design makes use of some or all of these categories depending on the structure of your assembly and
the environment in which you are working.
Category Description
Type Defines the type of project. Unless you also have Autodesk Vault installed,
you only create single-user project files.
Location Displays the physical location of the project file.
Use Style Libraries Defines whether or not the project uses a style library. Options are Yes,
Read Only, and No.

Category Description
Workspace A personal location where you edit your personal copy of design files. Only
one designer should have access to the files in the folder called out in the
workspace.
Workgroup Search Within this group you can define multiple search paths for accessing files.
Paths You do this when you want to add levels of organization to your design
files or access files from another designer.
Libraries You use this category to define search paths for part libraries. Part libraries
can consist of standard off-the-shelf components that you use in your
designs or can also include common parts that you design. Common
factors in all libraries include that the path is considered by the application
to be read-only, and parts stored within a library search path rarely, if ever,
change. If library folders are defined, each needs a descriptive name that
should not change. Because the library name is stored in the reference,
changing the library name later breaks library references.
Frequently Used This group is used to define paths of frequently used subfolders within the
Subfolders project folder structure.
Folder Options This group contains options for setting the folder locations of style
libraries, templates, and Content Center files.
Options You use these properties to set specific options for the project file.
Project Categories: Search Order

Knowing and remembering the category search order is critical to properly implementing and
managing project files. The following illustration represents a typical project file with path locations
defined in each category. When the application needs to locate referenced files, it searches for files
using paths contained in each category using the following order.
1. Libraries
2. Workspace
3. Workgroup Search Paths

A simple way to remember the search order is to remember libraries first, and then the order that
each category is displayed in the project window.
Relative Paths in Your Project Files

When you add paths to each category, the application stores only the relative path. The relative path
is created by removing the project file location from the path text and leaving only the remaining path
information. Using relative paths enables greater portability of your project files and data sets. When
you view the paths under each category, the path settings begin with . followed by the folder location
relative to the physical location of the project file. In the following example, the Robot-Assembly.ipj
file is stored in the folder C:\Designs\Robot Assembly.
By storing only relative paths in your project file, it is possible to physically move the entire folder
structure to another location or storage device. As long as the folders maintain their relative location
to the storage location of the project file, the application can resolve the files as required.
Location of project file

Relative path
Full path
Full path

Project File Folder Options
Folder options identify where project level files such as templates and styles are stored.
Option Description
Design Data Identifies where the project-specific style definitions are stored.
Templates Specifies the location of the Autodesk Inventor document templates for
the project.
Content Center Files Specifies the location of the Content Center files used in the project.

Project Options
The following options can be set for each project.
Option Description
Old Versions to Keep Specifies the number of versions to keep when you save changes. Older
on Save versions of each file are stored in an Old Versions subfolder of the file
location.
Using Unique File Specifies whether all files in the project have unique file names. Not
Names applicable for library locations.
Yes: Indicates that no duplicate file names are used in the project. The
application searches through all editable project locations to find the file
name, even if it was last accessed from a different folder.
No: Indicates that duplicate file names exist in the project. If duplicate file
names are found when resolving files, the Resolve Files dialog box opens
so you can browse to the correct file to manually reestablish the link.
Name Indicates the name of the project file.
Shortcut Indicates the name of the project file shortcut.
Owner Identifies the project owner, typically the lead engineer or CAD
administrator.
Release ID Identifies the version of the released project data. If a project is used as
a library by another project, the release ID may be useful in identifying
which project to use.
Imported Identifies the name of the folder where imported components are stored.
Components Folder
Name
Imported Top Level Identifies the name of the folder where imported top level assembly data
Assemblies Folder is stored.
Name

Creating a Project File
You begin to create project files through a wizard. You are prompted to fill in relevant information
such as project name, workspace folder, and libraries to import from other projects. After the initial
creation is complete, you proceed to add the required paths to the categories you will use.
Access
Create or Edit Projects
Ribbon: Get Started tab > Launch panel
Open or New Dialog Boxes: Projects

Procedure: Creating a Single-User Project File
The following steps describe how to create a single-user project.
1. Access the Projects dialog box by clicking File menu > Projects.
2. Select the New Single User Project type and click Next.

3. In the Name field, enter a name for the project. In the Project (Workspace) Folder field, enter a
path location for storing the files for this project. Click Next.
4. If you have any projects with libraries defined, they are displayed in this list. You can use this
information to copy library paths from other project files.
Click Finish to create the project.
If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.

Lesson: Factory Templates
It is important for you to define which templates you want to use as defaults when starting a new
project. This will keep you from accidently working in different unit systems when working with
multiple vendors. The Factory Design Utilities determine the default template for asset creation in the
Factory Options dialog.
You access the Factory Options on the Getting Started

ribbon and the Factory ribbon.
The Default Layout Temple setting determines the

default assembly template used to create new factory
layouts.
Note: A factory layout template is different than a
typical Inventor Assembly template. Special settings
and parameters are in place to support factory layout
processes.
The Default Part Asset Template setting determines

the default part template used to create new factory
assets.
Note: The default setting uses a typical Inventor part
template.
The Default Assembly Asset Template setting

determines the default assembly template used to
create new factory assets.
Note: The default setting uses a typical Inventor
assembly template.

Lesson: Supporting Directories
Each time a factory asset is added from the Asset Browser, an independent instance of it is created in
the local workspace. A Factory Asset directory is added to the local workspace when the first asset is
placed into the factory layout. All factory assets placed from the Asset Browser are stored in this
location. Each asset is stored in a unique sub folder with a unique file name.
Supporting Library Directories

The supporting System Asset Library that ships with Autodesk Factory Design Suite is stored in the
following location.
C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor 2011
Supporting User Library Directories

The supporting User Asset Library for Autodesk Factory Design Suite is stored in the following location.
C:\Users\username\Documents\Factory Library

Exercise: Project File and In the Inventor Project Wizard enter
R&D as the name of the new Project.
Supporting Directories
In this exercise, you create an
Inventor Project file and review the
supporting directories used by
Autodesk Factory Design Suite.
Set the Project Workspace by clicking
the button and navigating to the
directory created in the first step.
1. Create the Workspace.

In Windows, create a directory called Select the Workspace directory and
C:\R&D. click OK.
Note: In this example, this directory In the Inventor Project Wizard dialog,
will be used as the Workspace. Click Finish
2. Create the Project File.

In Inventor, make sure all files are
closed.
Click the Projects Tool on the Getting
started ribbon. 3. Set your active Project File
In the Projects Dialog, double click the
R&D Project File listed in the upper
pane.
Note: The check mark denotes the
active project file.
On the Projects Dialog, click the New

Button.
In the Inventor Project Wizard, select Click Done.

the New Single User Option.
Click Next

4. Create and Save New Layout. 7. Review the location of assets placed in
Create a New Layout. the factory layout.
Save the Layout in the default Select a system asset.
workspace. During the Save
operation notice that the file is saved
to the workspace by default.
Note: Please note that there are no
other directories located in the
workspace at this time.
Right Click and select iProperties

Notice the default storage location for
assets placed on the factory floor.
5. Add Several System Assets from the

Asset Browser.
Using the System Assets create a
small conveyor line as shown in the
image below.
Close the iProperties dialog.
8. Review the contents of the Factory

Asset folder in the Workspace.
Use the file open command and
review the contents of the Factory
Asset folder now located in the
Workspace.
Close the File Open dialog without
6. Add several User Assets from the Asset opening any files.
Browser.
Using the User Assets create a small
conveyor line as shown in the 9. Review other supporting directories.
following image. To easily navigate to the location of a
system asset, Right Click on a system
asset in the Asset Browser and click
Explore from the menu. Notice the
supporting directory for System
Assets.
To easily navigate to the location of a
user asset, Right click on a user asset
in the Asset Browser and click Explore
from the menu. Notice the
supporting directory for the User
Assets.
Save the File.

10. Copy custom assets to the User Asset 13. Reset the Project File.
Library. Close all files.
Navigate to the Components folder in Set the Active Project back to
the AFDS_Training_Files directory. Learning Autodesk Factory Design
Copy the AFDS_Sample_Assets folder. Suite.
Right Click on a User Asset in the
Asset Browser and select explorer. End of Exercise.
In Windows Explorer, navigate up one
level to the Factory Library.
Paste the AFDS_Sample_Assets folder
into the Factory Library folder.
Close Windows Explorer.
11. Refresh the Asset Browser.

On the Asset Browser Click the
Refresh tool.
12. Review and Place some sample factory

assets.
In the Asset Browser, navigate to the
User Assets.
Review the new assets available in the
directory.
Place several of the sample assets in
combination with the conveyor assets
placed earlier as demonstrated in the
image to the right.

Lesson: Workflow Divide and Conquer
Designing a complete factory layout with all architectural elements and thousands for factory
assets is quite a lot for a single computer program to handle. Autodesk Factory Design Suite
allows factory designers and system integrators to work with factory designs that are beyond the
capability of most computer applications. In order to work with so many components efficiently,
it is important to divide the layout into logical sections and reference each section back into the
overall factory design.
There are various reasons to store your factory lines in separate files instead of a single layout.
By dividing the lines into multiple assemblies, you increase your computer resource efficiency.
Dividing the layouts also offers the ability to reuse the asset configuration in other factory
layouts. This workflow allows multiple designers to work together on a single project. The final
reason is very straight forward; factory layouts often require thousands of assets to make up the
overall design. Loading all these assets into a single file will require more computer resources
than are available in most computers.
For all these reasons, the best practice recommendation for handling large factory layouts is to
break up the layout into logical spaces. Each space becomes a separate sub-assembly in the
overall design.
Objectives
Understand the basic process of dividing an entire Factory Layout into logical
subassemblies.
Place the subassemblies into the overall Factory Layout at the proper location.

Workflow Divide and Conquer
A factory layout is normally divided into logical sections or subassemblies. Each section usually performs
a specific task essential to the overall mission of the facility. Each section is created as a separate layout
using the practices outlined in previous chapters. The layout subassemblies are then placed into the
overall Factory Layout assembly.
DWG Overlay Common Reference Lines

The first step in creating a Sub-Layout is to place the DWG Overlay in the proper position. Each Layout
will utilize the DWG Overlay of the overall facility. These reference lines are crucial to the placement of
the factory lines in the final overall assembly.

Placing Factory Line Sub-Layouts into the Final Factory Layout
The final factory layout will reference all the individual Factory Lines or Subassemblies. Each Sub-
Layout is placed into the overall Factory Layout at the original coordinates established by the DWG
Overlay.
The first Sub-Layout will report to it designed coordinated automatically but the following
subassemblies will need to be moved into position manually. There are several simple methods of
placing components into an assembly based on their design coordinates. The simplest is to set the
occurrence location in the iProperties to 0 for the X, Y, and Z values.
To access the iProperties for a part or assembly,

select the desired component and Right Click.
Select iProperties from the menu.
On the iProperties dialog, select the Occurrence

tab.
On the Occurrence Tab, Set the Values for X

Offset, Y Offset, and Z Offset to 0 (Zero).
Click Close to finish the process.
22 Chapter 11: Workflow and Best

Practices
Exercise: Build the Main 3.

Place the Second Sub-Layout.
On the Assembly ribbon, click the
Factory Assembly Place Component tool.
Select AFDS_008_Robot_Line.iam
In this exercise, you create The main Click Open.
Factory Assembly and place the The second component placed into an
subassemblies for each factory line assembly does NOT report to any
into the overall design. location. Left Click to place the
component anywhere.
menu.
1. Start a New Factory Layout.

Add the DWG Overlay 4. Set the location of the second Sub-
AFDS_008_2D_Factory.dwg Layout.
Right Click on the second Sub-Layout
and select iProperties from the menu.
2. Place the first Sub-Layout.
On the Assemble ribbon, click the
Place Component tool.
On the iProperties dialog, click the

Occurrence Tab.
On the Occurrence Tab, set the values
for X Offset, Y Offset, and Z Offset to 0
(Zero).
Select AFDS_008_Conveyor_1.iam
Click Open
The first component in an assembly
automatically reports to its original
location
Right Click and select done from the
menu. Click OK.

5. Place the remaining subassemblies.
Repeat the previous 2 steps for the
following subassemblies.
AFDS_008_Inspection_Line.iam
AFDS_008_Packaging_Line.iam
AFDS_008_Machining_Line.iam
3. Close All Files without Saving.

End of Exercise
24 Chapter 11: Workflow and Best

Practices
Lesson: Best Practices
The Autodesk Factory Design Suite simplifies the factory layout process using a simple, easy to understand
workflow. This section covers several recommendations for maximizing your design productivity while using the
Clearance Zones
Objectives
Understand the Simplified Model practice.

Create Access and Maintenance zones with separate solid bodies.
Use the Shrinkwrap tool to convert an assembly into a single part.
Understand how to handle multi-level designs.
Objective 4

Simplified Model Design
The more features your assets contain, the more graphic resources they require. In addition, your factory
design could contain hundreds or thousands of assets. For this reason, it is a recommended practice to
generate assets in a simplified form with a minimal amount of detail. Assets should represent the design
envelope of the actual component and deliver the necessary design information for the layout drawing.
Several general practices should be followed to simplify the design representation and reduce the model file
size. Please note these practices are general guidelines and may need to be adjusted or ignored in certain
situations. The best practices for modeling simplified representations are as follows.
Fit, Form, and Function Asset components must be modeled as accurately as possible. They must also
be modeled to the simplest representation possible. The general guideline of Fit, Form, and Function
should be followed. This term is sometimes referred to as F3. In manufacturing and design industries the
term refers to the description of an items identifying characteristics. If the specifications and criteria of
an items Fit, Form and Function are met; all other attributes are extraneous.
Eliminate Fillets, Chamfers, and Tapers whenever possible.
Eliminate Holes whenever possible. Some holes are necessary for proper attachment and location in the
final factory design.
Eliminate Shells Remove all inner features that are not necessary.
All Contact faces and edges should be modeled to the simplest form possible.
Clearance and Maintenance spaces can be modeled as separate solids bodies using a transparent color.
Assemblies should be modeled or converted to single components if possible.
All Adaptive features should be removed from equipment models.
Do not include fasteners in assembly designs
The following examples illustrate the realistic view of a component or assembly, and the recommended
simplified form that should be modeled for the Factory Asset Library.

Create Clearance Zones as Separate Solid Bodies
Clearance and maintenance spaces can be modeled as separate solid bodies and displayed with a
transparent color. The appearance of the clearance zones can be controlled by establishing a simple
on / off parameter.
Creating a simple On / Off

Parameter
Define A User Parameter
Create a Numeric
Parameter setting the unit
to unitless and the number
to one.
Make the value a Multi-
Value and add 0 as an
alternative.
Set Suppression for a Feature by
Parameter.
In the Browser, Right Click
the desired feature and
select Properties from the
menu.
In the Feature Properties
dialog, set the Suppress
option to IF.
Select the On / Off
Parameter from the drop
down list.
Set the argument to Not
Equal.
Enter the value of 1.
Click Ok.
Chapter 11: Workflow and Best 27

Practices
Converting an Assembly into a Single Part - Shrinkwrap
One of the primary methods of saving computer resources is to minimize the number of files
referenced into the main assembly. Subassemblies can be converted to a single part saving many file
references in the overall factory layout. The Shrinkwrap command can be used to convert an
assembly into a single component. Holes and interior features can be removed simplifying the form
of the component.
Note: The single part representation of multiple bodies is critical to reducing the overall part count in
the overall factory assembly. The Pump shown below is a good examples of converting (Shrinkwrap)
an assembly into a single component.
Shrinkwrap an Assembly to a Single Component.

Open the desired Assembly.
From the Assembly ribbon, click the Shrinkwrap

tool.
In the Create Shrinkwrap Part dialog

Enter a name for the new component (1).
Specify the New File Location (2).
Click Ok.

Assembly Shrinkwrap Options
1. Style - Specify how multiple bodies are to be
handled during the shrinkwrap operation.
Single solid body merging out seams
between planar faces Select to
produce a single solid body without
seams between planar faces. When
you merge seams between faces, the
face assumes a single color.
Solid body keep seams between planar
faces Select to produce a single solid
body with seams between planar faces
retained.
Maintain each solid as a solid body
Select to produce a multi-body part
that contains a unique body for each
part in the assembly.
Single composite feature This is the
default selection. Select to produce a
single surface composite feature. This
selection produces the smallest file.
Colors and seams of the original
components are retained. The mass
properties of the original assembly are
cached. and retained.
2. Remove geometry by visibility Select the
check box to enable the options to remove
geometry based on visibility. The check box is
selected by default.
3. Hole Patching
None - Does not remove any holes.
All - Removes all holes that do not cross
surface boundaries. Holes do not need to be
round to be included. It is the default setting.
Range - Specifies the circumference or
perimeter of the holes to include or exclude.
Holes do not need to be round to be included.
4. Break Link - Permanently disables any updates

from the source component.
Click OK.

Creating a Multi-Level Factory Design
Multi-Level factory designs require a separate layout assembly for each floor. As described in the
Divide and Conquer Workflow section, a separate assembly will be created for each level of the
factory design. Unlike the previous examples, the new factory layouts are created in context of the
main factory using the Create command located on the Assemble ribbon.
To Add a Second Level to the Factory Layout

On the Assembly ribbon, Start the Create tool.
In the Create In-Place Component dialog

1. Enter a name for the new layout.
2. Select the StandardFactoryLayout.iam template
from the template dropdown list.
Click OK.
Select the face or work plane that represents the landing

surface of the second level.

Use the Resize floor command to alter the size of the
new floor.

Chapter Summary
This chapter presented the recommended best practices for working with Autodesk Factory Design
Suite. The Project settings and supporting directory structure was also discussed. Knowing the
supporting directories and following the best practice workflow will allow you to successfully design
your factory layout.
Create a Project file for a typical factory design.
Understand the supporting file directories for Autodesk Factory Design Suite.
Understand the Best Practice for dividing a factory design into subassemblies.
Understand the Best Practice for modeling a Simplified form for factory assets.

Chapter
12
Basic View Creation

Now that you understand the basics of factory design, you need to learn how to create production-
ready drawings of those designs. Basic view creation with Autodesk Inventor is quite simple when
you understand tools and recommended workflows. Within only a few minutes, you can easily create
plan, elevation, section, detail, and even isometric views of your 3D factory Layouts.
Objectives
Navigate the Autodesk Inventor user interface when creating and editing drawing sheets.
Create base and projected views of 3D parts and assemblies.
Create and edit section views.
Create and edit detail views.
Create and edit cropped views.
Add Annotations to Drawings.
Review the AutoCAD Interoperability with Inventor DWGs.
Chapter 12: Basic View Creation 1

Lesson: Drawing Creation Environment
This lesson describes the main interface components in the drawing environment related to creating
production-ready drawings. When you create, annotate, and edit a drawing sheet, you have the same
tools that you have when working on an assembly or part. However, the tools and information that
display on the ribbon and browser may vary.
Being able to navigate the user interface when creating and editing drawing sheets has a direct impact
on your ability to complete your work efficiently.
The following illustration shows the drawing creation environment.
Objectives
Describe a production-ready drawing and its purpose.
Describe the process for creating production-ready drawings.
Recognize the different areas of the drawing creation environment.
Navigate the drawing creation environment.
2 Chapter 12: Basic View Creation

About Creating Drawings
A drawing that can be used to produce a factory assembly as specified is referred to as a production-
ready drawing. When creating a production-ready drawing, you work in the drawing environment.
Within this environment you create the drawing views of the factory assemblies and add annotations
to fully communicate your design requirements and intent.
The following illustration shows a production-ready factory drawing.
Definition of Production-Ready Drawings

A production-ready drawing contains all the necessary views, annotations, notes, revisions, and title
block information, required to manufacture the objects displayed in the drawing.
In the following illustration, the final view, an isometric view, provides additional information for
collaborators who cannot read conventional 2D drawings.

Example of Drawing Views
Production-ready drawings communicate design requirements for manufacturing. To communicate
these requirements, a production-ready drawing contains the required combination of views and
annotations. A drawing can contain any of the following views:
1. Base views
2. First or third angle projection views
3. Isometric views
4. Section views
5. Detail views
6. Draft views
Example of Annotations
A drawing can also contain the following annotations:
1. Dimensions
2. Hole notes
3. Chamfer notes
4. Centerlines and center marks
5. Notes
6. Parts list
7. Balloons

Creating Drawings
You create drawings to convey information. Depending on the type of parts or assemblies required
for production, you create different views and add annotations to define every aspect of the design.
A production-ready drawing contains all the necessary views, annotations, and notes to complete the
manufacturing or assembly process.
In the following illustration, a detail view is created to simplify the annotation process.
Process: Creating Drawings

The following steps outline the process for creating drawings.
1. Determine the critical aspects of the design.
2. Determine the views required to show the
aspects of the design.
3. Create the drawing views.
4. Add drawing annotations.
5. Add any notes or other information needed
to manufacture the design.
6. Enter title block data.

About the Drawing Creation Environment
The drawing creation environment enables you to create production-ready drawings by creating the
necessary views, annotations, notes, and other information needed to produce a part or assembly.
The drawing creation environment has four main areas that you use in the creation of a drawing:
drawing sheets, standard tools, panel bars, and the browser.
The following illustration shows the drawing creation environment.
Option Description
Ribbon The ribbon contain the tools that you use to create views and annotations
and the standard tools.
Drawing The primary, and typically largest, area of the drawing environment is
Sheet the drawing sheet. The drawing sheet represents the paper on which the
drawing is created.
Browser The browser tracks the history of the drawing file and has access to
drawing resources such as title blocks, borders, and sheet sizes.

Project Files
When you create designs, each one consists of multiple files and file types. The design and
documentation of a single part file require at least two separate files: (a) a part file and (b) a drawing
file. The design and documentation of assembly models require a minimum of three different file
types: (a) assembly files, (b) part files, and (c) drawing files.
Using separate files for each file type is critical for performance and is common among most
parametric modeling systems. By storing path information for each project, the application can search
for the required files when opening an assembly, presentation, or drawing file. The need to search in
different path locations for files is the primary purpose of project files.
The following illustration represents file dependencies in a typical assembly design.
When you open an assembly, drawing, or presentation file, the active project file is used to resolve
path locations to the referenced files.

Definition of the Drawing Creation Environment
You use the drawing creation environment to create 2D representations of your 3D models and
assemblies.
In the following illustration, the drawing creation environment is used to create the necessary views
and annotations for a conveyor line.
Using the Drawing Environment

The drawing environment contains a number of tools that you can use to create drawing views and
add annotations to the view or drawing sheet. The tools on the ribbon are split between the Place
Views tab, the Annotate tab, and the browser.
In the following illustration, the ribbon is being switched to the Place Views tab for the addition of
drawing views to the sheet.

Drawing Tabs
In the drawing environment, on the ribbon, two tabs are available for creating production-ready
drawings. You use the Place Views tab to create the various drawing views required to document your
parts and assemblies.
You use the Annotate tab to add dimensions, notes, and symbol annotations to the drawing views.
You can switch between the tabs by clicking the tab name on the ribbon.
Drawing Environment Browser

In the drawing environment the browser displays the Drawing Resources folder, which contains sheet
formats, borders, title blocks, and sketched symbols. It also displays each sheet in the drawing, along
with the views that you create for each.
In the following illustration, the cursor is moved to the browser and a new title block is being inserted.
Process: Navigating the Tabs

Navigating the drawing environment is an iterative process. When a drawing has been started, and a
base view placed, annotations can be added. Subsequent views can be placed as needed, making
additional annotation or even a different sheet size necessary. The following steps outline the general
process when navigating the drawing environment.
1. Start or open a drawing file.
2. Select the expected drawing size.
3. Create a base view.
4. Create projected views.
5. Click the Annotate tab.
6. Add drawing annotations.
7. Enter title block data.

Exercise: Use the Drawing 3. Left click on the drawing sheet to place the
base view.
Creation Environment
In this exercise you navigate the drawing creation
environment to create projected views and change
the sheet size.
4. Place the Top and Right Side View.

Left click directly above, and directly right
of the base view to create the Top and
The completed exercise Right side views.
1. Start a New ANSI(in).dwg

On the Quick Access toolbar, click File New.
Click the English Tab.
Select the ANSI (in).dwg drawing template.
5. To create an isometric view, click above and to

2. Place the Base View: the right of the view that you just placed.
On the Place Views ribbon, click the Click Create.
Base View tool.
On the Drawing View dialog, click

the browse button and select:
INV_014_Create_Views.iam
Click OK

6. Change the size of the Sheet: 9. Click Annotate tab > Dimension panel
In the browser, Right Click on the Sheet node
and select Edit Sheet from the menu. > Dimension:
Click the largest radius on the main
machine.
On the right end of the Annotate
ribbon select the Architectural (ANSI)
style form the style drop down list.
In the edit sheet dialog, change the sheet

size to D size.
Click next to the radius to place the

Click OK dimension.
Right-click above the dimension.
Click Done.
7. Click and drag the border of each drawing view If the Edit Dimension dialog box
to position them as shown.
appears, click OK.
8. To access annotation tools, click the Annotate

tab.
10. Close All Files

End of Exercise.

Lesson: Base and Projected Views
This lesson describes creating projected views of your part or assembly files.
After you complete the 3D design of your factory layout, manufacturing requires dimensioned
drawings in order to build your design. The first step in creating production drawings is to create the
required orthographic and isometric views.
Objectives
Create base views of 3D factory assemblies.
Create and edit exploded drawing views.
Create projected views.
Edit orthographic views and describe how other projected views may be affected.

Creating Base Views
You create a base view to begin creating orthographic views. The base view establishes the original
view orientation and scale upon which projected views are based. When you create the base view,
you specify the file to be used for the view, the view orientation, scale, and style. After you specify this
information, the view is placed onto the sheet and an associative link between the drawing and the
part, assembly, or presentation file is established. If the part geometry changes, those changes are
reflected in the drawing.
Access
Base Views
Ribbon: Place Views tab > Create panel > Base
Toolbar: Drawing Views Panel

Shortcut Menu: Base View

Drawing View Dialog Box
The following options are available in the Drawing View dialog box.
Option Description
File Determines the part or assembly file to create its view. If you have a part,
assembly, or presentation file open, it is the default file listed. If multiple
files are open, you select them from the drop-down list.
Orientation Determines orientation for the base view. Move your cursor away from the
dialog box to see a preview of the view before it is created. The standard
view orientations are based upon the origin planes of the file you select.
Change View
Orientation Opens the model's 3D viewing window. You use standard view tools
to define a custom view orientation.
View / Scale Label Enables you toggle the display of the view and scale label, select a preset
scale value, or enter a custom value for the view. Additionally, you can
enter a label for the view or accept the default view label.
Scale from Base: Not available when you create a base view. You use it
when you edit projected views.
Visible: Displays the scale and view label on the sheet under the view.
Edit View Label: Displays the Format Text dialog box.

Option Description
Style Rendering style for the view:

Hidden Line: Hidden lines are displayed.
Hidden Line Removed: Hidden lines are removed.
Shaded: View is shaded using the same colors used in the assembly or
part file.
Procedure: Creating Base Views

The following steps describe how to create base views.
1. Create a new drawing file.
2. On the ribbon, click the Base View tool.
3. Enter or browse for the Autodesk Inventor file to create the view, and adjust the options as
desired for orientation, scale, and style. Click the sheet to place the view.
4. The base view is placed on the sheet according to the options specified.

Creating Projected Views
The Projected View tool enables you to create projected views from any existing view on the sheet. If
you select the Projected View tool you must select a parent view, then position each projected view.
All view positions are previewed by a bounding box prior to the views being created.
When you create projected views, the view orientation is automatically determined based on its
position on the sheet relative to the base view. If you place the projected view to the right of the base
view, it generates a right-side projection of the parent view. If you place the projected view at an angle
to the parent view, it generates an isometric view based on the relative position to the parent view.
By default, the following view properties are carried over from the base view:
Scale
Style (Orthographic Only)
In the following illustration, the right, top, and isometric views are projected from the lower left base
view.
Drafting Standards Projection Setting

The description above is based on a Third Angle projection setting in the Drafting
Standards dialog box. The First Angle projection method is also available.

Access
Projected View
Ribbon: Place Views tab > Create panel > Projected

Shortcut Menu: Create View > Projected View
Procedure: Creating Projected Views

The following steps describe how to create projected views.
1. On the ribbon, click Projected View.
2. Select the parent view.
3. Click in the drawing to define the first projected view. Repeat until all views are defined.

4. Right-click in the drawing. Select Create.
Properties of Editing Base and Projected Views

After you create base and projected views, you can edit the view properties using the Drawing View
dialog box. Depending on the type of view, base or projected, different options are available for
editing.
When you edit a base view, you can change the scale and style properties. However, while editing a
projected view, you can change these properties only if you clear the Scale from Base or Style from
Base options. In a projected view, these properties are linked to the base view to ensure the same
scale and the same rendering style across views.

Editing a Base View
When you edit a base view, you can edit any option that is not grayed out. If you change the scale
factor on the base view, all projected views with the Scale from Base option selected are updated to
reflect the new scale factor.
When you edit a projected view, you can edit any option that is not grayed out. Clear the Scale and
Style from Base check boxes to change the view scale or rendering style.

Exercise: Create and Edit Base 3. On the Quick Access toolbar, click New.
4. In the New File dialog box, select the English tab.
and Projected Views Double-click the ANSI (in).dwg template.
In this exercise, you create a new drawing and place 5. In the drawing environment, Click Place Views
a base view and three projected views of a rotor tab > Create panel Base. Because the assembly is
assembly as the base for a production-ready already open, it is automatically selected as the
file for the drawing view.
drawing.
6. In the Drawing View dialog box, adjust the
options as shown:
Set the Scale value to 1/16=1 (1).
Turn on the Scale Value (2).
Enter Elevation in the View Identifier field (3).
Click the lower-left area of the sheet to
place the view.
menu.
7. On the Place Views ribbon, Click the Projected

view tool.
1. Open INV_015_Create_Edit_Views.iam

8. Select points on the sheet to position the
views as indicated by the bounding box
preview and isometric preview in the
11. Edit the Sheet Size and Arrange the views.
In the browser, Right Click on the Sheet node
and select edit sheet from the menu.
In the Edit Sheet dialog, set the sheet size to D.
Arrange the views as shown in the following
image.
9. Right-click in the graphics window. Click

Create to create the projected views.
10. The drawing views are displayed as shown in the
following image.
12. Right-click in the isometric view. Click Edit View.

In the Drawing View dialog box, under
Scale, enter 3/32=1
Click OK.

13. The projected isometric view updates to 15. Right-click in the isometric view. Click Edit View.
reflect the new scale as shown in the Turn on the View Label (1) and enter
following image Isometric View for the View Identifier (2).
Under Style, click Shaded (3).
Click OK.
16. The isometric view updates to the shaded

representation.
Note: You may need to reposition the isometric
view.
14. Right Click in the Top View and Click Edit
View from the menu.
Turn on the View Label (1) and enter Plan
in the View Identifier window (2).
Repeat this process for the right side
view. For this view enter Right Elevation
for the View Identifier

Lesson: Section Views
This lesson describes creating section views of factory layout drawings. When you create drawings of
factory layouts, important internal details are sometimes obscured by other features or assets.
Section views enable you to better visualize these important details by removing the assets or
features that are obstructing the view. Features that were obstructed or displayed as hidden lines are
drawn with continuous lines with hatch patterns representing the section plane.
In the following illustration, a half section view was created based on the initial view. Then an
isometric projection was created from the offset section.
Objectives
Create section views.
Edit section views.
Control hatch and sectioning in section views.

Creating Section Views
In order to create a section view, you must have at least one view on the sheet on which the section
line is drawn. After drawing the section line, you choose a side of the current view for the section
view. The section view is generated based on the direction of sight relative to the view being
sectioned.
Access
Section View
Ribbon: Place Views tab > Create panel

Shortcut Menu: Create View > Section View

Section View Dialog Box
The following options are available in the Section View dialog box.
Option Description
View Use to specify a view label or accept the default value.

Identifier
Toggle Displays the label and view scale on the sheet.

Label
Visibility
Scale Scale factor for the section view.
Format Access the Format Text dialog box.

Text
Style Rendering style for the view.

Hidden Line
Hidden Line Removed
Shaded

Option Description
Section Section depth for the view.

Depth
Full: Section depth is calculated through the entire part or assembly.
Distance: Measured from the section line to calculate the section view. All
geometry outside of the calculated distance is ignored and is not displayed in
the view.
Slice Depending on browser settings, when checked, some parts are sliced, and some
sectioned.
Slice All Browser settings are overridden and all parts in the view are sliced according to the
Parts section line geometry. Parts not crossed by the section line are not included in the
view. Section Depth fields are disabled.
Method Use the Projected method to project the lines orthogonally to the section views
position. The Aligned method projects section geometry perpendicular to each
segment of the section line. This option only appears if the section line contains
more than one segment.

Procedure: Creating Section Views
The following steps describe how to create section views.
1. With at least one view on the sheet,
on the ribbon, click Section View.
2. Select the parent view.

3. Enter the endpoints of the section
line.
Select the first point of the
section line. If necessary, use
tracking to align the section line
to a feature in the parent view.
Click additional endpoints to
define the section line. The
number of endpoints defined,
and their directions, determine
the type of section view created.

4. Right-click in the graphics window,
select Continue.
5. In the Section View dialog box,

enter the desired values. Note: The
projected method is used in this
step.
6. Move the preview to the desired

location and click to place the
section view.

Exercise: Create and Edit
Section Views
In this exercise, you create section views of factory 2. Click Place Views tab > Create tab > Section.
layout.
Select the view on the sheet as

shown.
3. Click outside of the building on the left hand

side and draw a line thru the building to the
1. Open INV_016_Section_View.dwg right hand side as shown in the image below.
Click a second point on the right side of the
building.
4. Right Click and select Create from the menu.

8. Edit the Hatch Pattern
5. In the Section View dialog, select the shaded
Zoom into the section view and review
option for Style.
the current hatch pattern.
Right Click on the Hatch Pattern and select

Edit from the menu.
In the Edit Hatch Pattern dialog, change
the scale of the hatch to.5.
Click OK.
6. Move the section view to the desired location
and left click to place the view.
7. The Section View is shown in the following 9. Close all Files without saving.
image. End of Exercise.

Lesson: Detail Views
This lesson describes creating detail views. As you create 2D drawings for manufacturing, it may be
necessary to magnify areas of the drawing. A detail view shows congested areas of a drawing clearly.
In the following illustration, detail views have been created to magnify congested areas of the main
view.
Objectives
Describe the purpose of detail views.
Create detail views in drawings.
Edit the size and location of detail views.

Creating Detail Views
You use the Detail View tool to create detail views of an existing view in the drawing. When you use
Detail Views, you define the detailed area by specifying a center point and a rectangular or circular
fence. All geometry contained within the detail view rectangle or circle is included in the detail view.
When you create a detail view, you magnify an area of the drawing while creating an associative link
between the original view and the detail view. If the geometry being magnified changes in the original
view, those changes are reflected in the detail view. Also, the placement and readability of dimensions
in these areas of the drawing are simplified.
A detailed view is associated with the main view, and any changes that affect geometry within the
main view are reflected in the detail view automatically. Although the view is scaled, as is true of
other scaled views, when you place dimensions on geometry within the view, the dimensions reflect
the actual geometry size.
Detail view circle

Scale detail view with dimensions

Access
Detail View
Ribbon: Place Views tab > Create panel

Shortcut Menu: Create View > Detail View
Detail View Dialog Box

The following illustration shows the Detail View dialog box.

The following options are available in the Detail View dialog box.
Option Description
View Use to specify a view label or accept the default value.

Identifier
Scale Use to specify the scale factor for the detail view. Select from the list or
manually enter a custom value.
Style Determines a rendering style for the view.

Hidden Line
Hidden Line Removed
Shaded
Toggle Label When selected, the view scale label is visible on the sheet.
Visibility
Edit View Use to access the Format Text dialog box.

Label
Fence Shape Determines a fence shape for the view.

Circular
Rectangular
Cutout Shape Specify the cut line as Jagged or Smooth.
Display If Smooth cutout shape is selected, select this option to have a boundary
Full Detail drawn around the detail view.
Boundary
Display If the Display Full Detail Boundary option is selected, select this option to
Connection have a line drawn between the detail view boundary in the parent view
Line and the boundary around the detail view.

Detail Views
In this exercise, you create and edit detail views to 2. Zoom in on the section view.
magnify critical features of the factory layout.
3. To begin to create a detail view from the parent

The completed exercise view.
Click Place Views tab > Create panel > Detail
View.
Select the section view.
4. In the Detail View dialog box, verify the
following values:
For Label, Enter B (1).
For Scale, Enter 3/16=1 (2).
For Style, Click Hidden Line Removed (3).
1. Open INV_017_Detail_View.dwg. For the Fence Shape select Circular (4).
For the Cutout Shape select Smooth (5).
Check the option to Display Full Detail
Boundary (6)
Check the option to Display Connection Line
(7)

5. For the center point of the fence, select a point 7. Activate the Detail View tool again. Create
near (1). For the endpoint of the fence, select a another detail view (shown in the
point near (2). following image) using the process
demonstrated in the previous steps.
8. Close all files. Do not Save.

End of Exercise.
6. When prompted to select a location for the

view, select a point as shown in the following
illustration.

Lesson: Crop Views
As you create complex drawings, the need to crop view geometry to show only certain areas arises.
To display only an area of a drawing view, you need to understand the process for using different
boundary shapes to crop drawing views.
The Crop tool provides a straightforward method to show only the area of information that you
require.
In the following illustration, the initial view before cropping is shown on the left. The middle image
shows the view cropped using a circular default boundary, while the right image shows the view
cropped using a closed loop sketch.
Objectives
Describe the types of views that can be cropped and the supported display options.
Crop a drawing view using a circular or rectangular boundary shape.
Crop a drawing view using a sketched boundary shape.

Creating Quick Cropped Views
To create a quick cropped view, you must first have a view on the drawing sheet that supports
cropped views. After starting the Crop tool, you select the view to crop and choose a rectangular or
circular boundary. You then define the location and size of the boundary.
In the following illustration, the isometric section view is in the process of being cropped on the left.
The results of cropping this view with a rectangular boundary is shown on the right.
Access
Crop
Ribbon: Place Views tab > Modify panel
Toolbar: Drawing Views Panel > Crop

Shortcut Menu: Create View > Crop

Process: Cropping a View Using a Default Boundary Shape
The following steps give an overview and example of cropping a drawing view using a default
boundary shape of circular or rectangular.
1. Start the Crop tool.
2. Select the view to crop.

3. If the default boundary type (circular or
rectangular) is not what you want,
select another crop boundary type.
4. Draw the cropping boundary at the location

and size that you require. Use opposite
corners for a rectangular boundary or the
center and radius for a circular boundary.

Creating Cropped Views with Sketches
To create a cropped view using a sketch, you must first have a view on the drawing sheet that supports
cropped views. You then create a closed loop sketch associated to the drawing view to be cropped.
After starting the Crop tool, you select the sketch and the view is cropped.
In the following illustration, a sketch is created in an isometric view. That sketch is then selected using
the Crop tool to create the resulting view on the right.
Process: Cropping a View Using a Sketch

The following steps give an overview and example of cropping a drawing view using a closed loop
sketch.
1. Click inside the drawing view that you want
to crop. Click > Place Views tab > Sketch panel
> Sketch to create a sketch associated to the
drawing view.

2. In the sketch, create a single closed loop
shape using line, arc, or spline segments.
3. Click Place Views tab > Modify panel > Crop.

4. Select the associated sketch.

Cropped Views
In this exercise, you create cropped views using 2. To create a rectangular cropped view:
default and sketch boundaries. Click Place Views tab > Modify panel > Crop.
Click the Top view.
Click and drag a rectangle over the right
section of the drawing, as shown.
3. The view is cropped to show only the objects

inside the defined boundary.
1. Open INV_018_Cropped View.dwg

4. Activate the second sheet in the drawing.
In the browser, double click the sheet 2 to
activate it.
5. To create a sketch based on the view:

Select the isometric view.
On the Place Views ribbon, click the Create
Sketch tool
Using the line command, draw a
the simple sketch shown in the
following image.
Note: Make sure the sketch
creates a closed loop.
On the Sketch ribbon, click Finish.
5. On the Place Views ribbon, click the Crop tool.

Select the sketch drawn in the previous
step.

End of Exercise.

Lesson: Dimensions, Annotations,
and Parts Lists
After creating drawing views, you can annotate those views with dimensions, centerlines, and
symbols. Production-ready drawings also typically include parts lists and balloons. While traditional
annotation methods can be quite tedious, you can quickly and easily include these elements in
your drawings using the annotation tools available in Autodesk Inventor.
Objectives
Dimension drawings with manual techniques.

Add centerlines, center marks and symbols to your drawings.
Add a Parts List and Balloons to the drawing.

Adding Dimensions
This lesson describes the manual application of dimensions. Dimensions define the size and location of
the objects being designed. They are the most important annotation applied to a drawing. Therefore,
the application of dimensions is critical to the success of the project.
Dimensions manually applied to drawing views are associated with the object that defines them.
Manually placed dimensions provide documentation of the model in the drawing environment. The
application of manual dimensions uses general, baseline, and ordinate dimensions.
In the following illustration, the dimensions have been added manually to define the size of the factory
facility.
Creating General Dimensions

The General Dimension tool can place many different types of dimensions, depending on the
geometry selected. Selecting two parallel lines results in horizontal, vertical, or aligned dimensions;
selecting two nonparallel lines results in angle dimensions; and selecting an arc or circle results in
radial or diameter dimensions. To obtain a horizontal or vertical dimension between two nonparallel
lines, you select one line and the endpoint of the other line, or select two endpoints.
In the following illustration, general dimensions are placed on the drawing to define the location of a
factory asset.

Access
General Dimension
Ribbon: Annotate tab > Dimension panel
Toolbar: Drawing Annotation Panel

Keyboard: D
Term Definition
Horizontal Creates a horizontal dimension based on the points or segments selected.
Vertical Creates a vertical dimension based on the points or segments selected.
Aligned Creates a linear dimension perpendicular to the points or segments selected.
Procedure: Placing General Dimensions

The following steps describe how to place general dimensions on a drawing.
2. Select two points or line segments in the drawing view.

Adding Centerlines
This lesson describes how to add centerlines and leaders to your drawings. These tools help define
asset locations on production-ready factory drawings.
The use of centerlines and center marks is critical in the interpretation of symmetrical and cylindrical
features in drawings. Symbols aid in defining the manufacturing processes used in creating parts and
assemblies. Leaders provide information about the text, symbol, or dimension attached to specific areas
on a feature or object.
In the following illustration, centerlines define the location of factory assets.
Procedure: Adding Centerlines Manually

The following steps describe how to manually add centerlines to drawings.
1. Start the Centerline tool. In the graphics window, click to place the start point of the centerline.
2. Click to place the end point of the centerline.
3. Right-click on the centerline and click Create.
4. Right-click in the graphics window. Click Done.

Adding Parts List and Balloons
This lesson describes how to create and customize parts lists to document the assets in your
Factory assembly. The parts list is generated from the assembly bill of materials (BOM) and shows all or
only certain parts and subassemblies in the BOM database.
Parts lists play a vital role in the factory documentation process by displaying the assets that
make up the lines, and their quantities, parameters, and any other properties that you wish to convey.
In the following illustration, a factory drawing is shown with the associated parts list.
About Parts Lists

The parts list is generated from the bill of materials database and can be customized to show the
columns and information needed to complete the assembly. Formatting such as table layout, column
width, and heading names can be customized to give the parts list the exact look that you want.
Parts lists can display four types of information:
Structured
Parts only
The following illustration provides a comparison between the parts list and bill of materials database
for an assembly.

Creating Parts Lists
You create parts lists by clicking the Annotate tab > Table panel > Parts List. The Parts List dialog box is
displayed to reveal the following controls for creating your parts list.
Option Description
Source This area specifies where to pull the parts list data from, an existing view or
a file (IPT, IPN, IAM).
BOM Settings The options in this area dictate how to represent subassemblies and their
and Properties parts. When the selected view is Structured, the subassemblies show
as line items. When the selected view is Parts Only, the parts within the
subassemblies show as line items with their Item value containing the
delimiter character specified.
Table Wrapping In Table Wrapping, set the wrap direction. If you select Enable Automatic
Wrap, you can set the maximum number of parts list rows, or number of
parts list sections.
Access
Parts List
Ribbon: Annotate tab > Table panel
Toolbar: Drawing Annotation Panel
Procedure: Creating a Parts List

The following steps describe how to create a parts list in a drawing file.
1. In a drawing file, click Annotate tab > Table panel > Parts List.
2. Select a drawing view and make the appropriate settings in the Parts List dialog box.
3. Position the parts list on the sheet. The parts list is displayed.

Exercise: Adding 3.

Add Centerlines to the Conveyor Lines.
On the Annotation ribbon, click the
Annotations Centerline tool
In this exercise, you add centerlines,

dimensions, leaders and a parts list to a
factory drawing.
Click the two midpoints shown in the
following image.

Right Click and select Create from the
menu.
1. Open INV_019_Annotations.dwg.
Repeat the process adding centerlines to
all straight conveyors in the line.
2. Zoom into the Plane view as shown in the
following image.
4. Change the color of the Centerline layer.

On the Annotate ribbon, click Edit
Layers.
In the Style and Standards Editor dialog,

click the color swatch for Centerline
(ANSI) and set the color to blue.
Click OK
Click Done
Click Yes

5. Add Dimensions documenting the 7. Add a Parts List to the Drawing.
length and width of the Robot Line. On the Annotate ribbon, click the
On the Annotate ribbon, click the Parts List command.
Dimension tool.
Select the Plan View.
In the Style window, at the right end

of the ribbon, select Architecture
(ANSI).
Click OK and place the parts list as

Add Dimensions documenting the shown below.
length and width of the Robot Line.
Note: You can select centerlines while
adding dimensions
Note: The Dimension command, for
drawings, works the same way it does
in model sketches.
Note: If you Right Click on the Pars

list, you can choose the Edit Parts
List The Edit Parts List Dialog offers
6. Change the Color of the Dimension
many options for modifying the parts
Layer.
list. This functionality is not covered
Click Edit Layers.
in this course.
Click the color swatch for Dimension
(ANSI) and set the color to dark green.
8. Change the Color of the Symbol Layer.
Click Edit Layers.
Set the color of the Symbol (ANSI)
layer to blue.
Click OK
Click Done
Click Yes
Click OK
Click Done
Click Yes
Lesson: Creating Work Features 51

9. Add a Balloon to the Drawing View. 10. Add Additional Balloons to the Drawing
Click the Balloon tool. View.
Using the previous process, add the
additional balloons as shown in the
following image.
Click the curved conveyor as shown in

the following image. This places the
arrow head of the Balloon.
Close the drawing without saving

End of Exercise.
Move the cursor away and click to

place the balloon as shown.
Press ENTER to finish the Balloon

Command.

Lesson: 2D Drawings and AutoCAD
Interoperability
The common practice for factory designers currently centers on the use of AutoCAD. Currently most
factory layout drawings are created as simple 2D drawings using the AutoCAD application. Many
factory designers will incorporate the Factory Design Suite into current design practices and still
maintain an AutoCAD centric approach to factory layout.
This lesson will outline the process of creating a factory layout in AutoCAD, bringing it into Inventor
(Autodesk Factory Design Suite), building the 3D layout, creating the Inventor drawings, and
referencing them back into the original AutoCAD design. This process creates a round trip
maintaining reference links so drawings can update if changes occur.
The following flow chart depicts the Round Trip process, starting in AutoCAD, moving to Inventor
Factory Design, and linking back to the original AutoCAD drawing.
Lesson: Managing Views 53

Round Tripping Settings
In order to have a seamless roundtrip without user interaction, we need to set up Inventor in a
certain way. Open the Applications Options, on the Manage ribbon, and adjust the options as shown
for:
View justification = Fixed
View Block insert point = Model Origin

Process for Round Tripping
The process starts in
AutoCAD with the original
2D layout of the facility.
This drawing is used as the

DWG Overlay in the
Inventor Factory Layout.
The 3D Factory Layout is

Created, based on the DWG
Overlay.
An Inventor Drawing is
created from the 3D Factory
Layout.

The Inventor Drawing is
opened in AutoCAD and the
Block created for the
drawing view is placed in
Model space at 0,0.
The Inventor Drawing is

then inserted into the
Original AutoCAD drawing
as an External Reference,
completing the Round Trip.

Chapter Summary
In this chapter, you learned how to quickly and easily create drawing views of your 3D factory designs.
Learning how to create and edit drawing views is the first step in creating production-ready drawings.
In the next chapter, you learn how to annotate your drawing views with dimensions, , centerlines and
symbols, and even add bill of material tables to your drawings.
Navigate the Autodesk Inventor user interface when creating and editing drawing sheets.
Create base and projected views of 3D parts and assemblies.
Create and edit section views.
Create and edit detail views.
Create and edit cropped views.
Add Annotations to Drawings.
Review the AutoCAD Interoperability with Inventor DWGs.

Chapter
13
Navisworks Getting Started

Validating your Factory Layout requires the comparison and analysis of multiple designs from various
stakeholders. Your Factory Layout must interface with the Architectural Facility and the Manufacturing
designs supplied by the System Integrators or Factory Owners. Putting all this information into a single
environment is often beyond the capabilities of most software programs.
Navisworks enables Factory Layout Designers to visualize large complex Layouts with thousands of
components such as complete manufacturing facilities, factory floor layouts, production lines & industrial
machinery, all in a single digital model by means of real time flythrough and walk through. Customers can
combine together CAD data from various design systems regardless of file format or size, for complete
Factory visualization and analysis.
Objectives
After completing this chapter you will:
Focus on the Navisworks product overview.
Review the Navisworks user Interface and Workflow.
Aggregate an entire Factory design from various CAD files.
Review the file types used by Navisworks.
Publish an NWD file.
Chapter13: Navisworks Getting Started 1

Product Overview
Navisworks revolutionizes design review. Navisworks provides interactive visualization and real-time
walkthrough of even the largest and most complex 3D models. Navigating and exploring the design to
improve quality and compress the review process is effortless with Navisworks. The post-production
value of 3D models is significantly increased by the wide-ranging access that Navisworks offers for
investigating and examining a design.
Publisher
The Navisworks Publisher tool provides a way of communicating design intent.
Publisher creates NWD files in which everyone can view and walk through the 3D models in real time,
without specialist skills and free from the limitation of pre-programmed animation.
Compressed and secure for distribution, Navisworks review files are faithful to the original native 3D data
from which they are created.
TimeLiner
Embracing a fourth dimension of time, the Navisworks TimeLiner tool available in the Autodesk
Navisworks Simulate and Manage products is aimed at satisfying the growing interest in affordable 4D
construction simulation for building and site planning, as well as presentation of time-based modeling.
TimeLiner makes it easy to produce time simulations and what-if scenarios. While these can be set up
solely in Navisworks, you can also link to some major project software, such as Microsoft Project,
Primavera (Sure Track/Power Project), Excel (CSV files), and Asta Power Project. TimeLiner also supports
any project scheduling software that can export the common MPX format.
Animator and Scripter

With the Navisworks Animator and Scripter tools available in the Autodesk Navisworks Simulate and
Manage products, you can animate your model and interact with it. For example, you could animate how
a crane moves around a site, or how a car is assembled or dismantled. You can also create interactive
scripts, which link your animations to specific events, such as On Key Press or On Collision. For example,
the doors will open as you approach them in your model.
You can also link Clash Detective, TimeLiner, and Object Animation together to enable clash testing of
fully animated TimeLiner schedules. So, instead of visually inspecting a TimeLiner sequence to make sure,
for example, that the moving crane did not collide with a work group, you can run a Clash Detective test.
Presenter
The Navisworks Presenter tool available in the Autodesk Navisworks Simulate and Manage products, is an
original visualization solution dedicated to enhancing the real-time experience and the creation of
compelling rendered output to communicate design intent.
With Presenter, you can apply textures, materials, and lights quickly to 3D models, and is ideal for fast-
moving collaborative review at every stage of the creative process.
With Presenter, everyone can enhance the realism of the interactive environment, and create both still
and animated photorealistic rendered output to share a vision of a project and improve understanding
and design quality.
Clash Detective
The Navisworks Clash Detective tool available in the Autodesk Navisworks Manage product enables the
effective identification, inspection, comment tracking, and reporting of interference in a 3D project
model. Clash Detective can eliminate a tedious manual task, with the accompanying risk of human error,
to significantly reduce the expensive consequences of incomplete, inaccurate, and poorly coordinated
production information.
Project Coordination is simplified with the use of Clash Detective by easily coordinating with the
responsible parties to track the clash through the project lifecycle.
For those who seek to complete design projects on time and within budget, the business case for Clash
Detective is clear and unequivocal.
Freedom Viewer
Freedom is a separate Navisworks software that provides users with a free 3D viewer to look at
Navisworks NWD files. It is the answer for those without design software or specialist skills who want to
explore a 3D project model.
Easily open, view, and walk through NWD files, even those streamed across the Internet.
2 Chapter13: Navisworks Getting Started

Lesson: User Interface
This lesson describes the Navisworks workspace layout. It also introduces you to basic workflow of
aggregating 3D data from various sources into a single digital environment.
Objectives
Review the Navisworks User Interface

Workspace
The Navisworks interface is intuitive and easy to learn and use. It contains a number of traditional
Windows ribbon elements, such as the Application Menu, ribbon, Quick Access toolbars, and so on.
1. Application Menu The Application Menu provides access to commonly accessed

tools.
2. Ribbon The ribbon is a palette at the top of the application window
that displays task-based tools and controls.
3. Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar displays frequently used commands.
4. Scene View The Scene View window is used to interact with 3D models.
5. View Cube ViewCube is used to reorient the current view of a model.
6. Navigation Bar The Navigation bar is a user interface element where you can
access both unified and product-specific navigation tools.
7. Dockable Windows - Open Dockable Window allow access to model and system
information. Window can be pinned open as shown here.
8. Dockable Windows - Closed Dockable Windows automatically collapse to maximize the
scene window size.
9. Status Bar The Status bar displays command instructions, model status,
and system performance.
10. InfoCenter The InfoCenter is located in the top right-hand corner of
Navisworks and provides a number of useful tools for getting
to know and searching for help in Navisworks.

Application Menu (1)
The Application Menu provides access to commonly accessed tools. To access its commands, click
in the top left-hand corner of Navisworks. The commands available in this menu include: file actions
(Open, Save, and Save As), Import and Export commands, the Publish command, and the option to the
print or distribute it to other users by email. Within this menu, the button provides access to the
Options Editor dialog box to customize your global settings.
Ribbon (2)
The ribbon is a palette at the top of the application window that displays task-based tools and controls.
The ribbon is divided into tabs, with each tab supporting a specific activity. Within each tab, tools are
grouped together into a task-based series of panels.
To activate a command on the ribbon, simply navigate to the tab and panel and select the command.
Every command on a toolbar includes a tooltip, which describes the function the button activates. Placing
the mouse over a button displays a brief instruction on how to use this feature in the Status bar. When
some commands are activated, context-sensitive tabs may be added to the ribbon. When active, the
context-sensitive tab is highlighted in green to show tools that will only be applied to the selected items.
Once the objects are deselected, the context-sensitive tab is removed.
You can customize the ribbon depending on your needs in the following ways:
To specify which ribbon tabs and panels are displayed, right-click the ribbon and on the shortcut
menu, click or clear the names of the tabs or panels.
You can change the order of ribbon tabs. Click the tab you want to move, drag it to the desired
position, and release.
You can change the order of ribbon panels in a tab. Click the panel you want to move, drag it to
the desired position, and release.
You can control the amount of space the ribbon takes in the application window. There are two
buttons to the right of the ribbon tabs, that allow you to choose the ribbon toggle and ribbon
minimize states.
Select to cycle between the minimized ribbon states. Once fully compressed, select to resume
the full ribbon display state. The minimize ribbon states enable you to minimize to tabs only, minimize to
Panel titles only, and minimize to Panel buttons only. The pull-down enables you to control which of
the states can be accessed as you are cycling.

Quick Access Toolbar (3)
At the top of the application window, the Quick Access toolbar displays frequently used commands.
A default set of commands have been included on the ribbon, to enable/disable these defaults
select at the end of the Quick Access toolbar, and select the commands that are to be
included.
You can add an unlimited number of buttons to the Quick Access toolbar by selecting the
command on its tab, right-clicking, and selecting Add to Quick Access Toolbar. New buttons are
added to the right of the default commands.
You can add separators between the buttons to subdivide the commands. To add a separator,
right-click on the Quick Access toolbar in the location where the separator is required, and select
Add Separator. Separators can be removed by right-clicking on the separator and selecting
Remove from Quick Access Toolbar.
You can position the Quick Access toolbar either above or below the ribbon. To move its position,
select at the end of the Quick Access toolbar and select either Show Below the Ribbon or
Show Above the Ribbon.
Only ribbon commands can be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Commands
that extend past the maximum length of the toolbar are displayed as flyouts.
Scene View (4)

The Scene View window is used to interact with 3D models. You can control how much space the Scene
View window uses compared to the dockable windows by dragging the edges of the windows as required.
Alternatively, you could auto hide the dockable windows, or switch on full screen mode (F11).

To split your current view horizontally, expand the Split View command in the Scene View panel
on the View tab and click Split Horizontal.
To split your current view vertically, expand the Split View command in the Scene View panel on
the View tab and click Split Vertical.
Resize a view by dragging the view borders or select Window Size in the View tab and enter
the required values.
Views can be subdivided so that there are horizontal and vertical Scene View windows. This is
done by selecting within a Scene View window to activate it and then splitting it again.
Any of the sub-divided Scene Views have title bar headings. To float a Scene View, select its title
bar heading and drag it away from its current location. To redock a floating Scene View, double-
click on the title bar heading.
Split Scene View windows can be set to Auto Hide by selecting the Auto Hide icon on the
Scene Views title bar heading. Once auto hidden, it is listed above the Status bar.
ViewCube (5)
ViewCube is used to reorient the current view of a model. You can reorient the view of a model with the
ViewCube tool by clicking pre-defined areas on the ViewCube to assign preset views, click and drag on the
ViewCube to freely change the view angle of the model, and define and restore the Home view.
The ViewCube tool provides twenty-six defined parts to click and change the current view of a
model. The twenty-six defined parts are categorized into three groups: corner, edge, and face. Of
the twenty-six defined parts, six of the parts represent standard orthogonal views of a model:
top, bottom, front, back, left, and right. Orthogonal views are set by clicking one of the faces on
the ViewCube tool. You use the other twenty defined parts to access angled views of a model.
Clicking one of the corners on the ViewCube tool reorients the current view of the model to a
three-quarter view, based on a viewpoint defined by three sides of the model. Clicking one of the
edges reorients the view of the model to a half view based on two sides of the model.
When the cursor is over one of the clickable areas of the ViewCube tool, the clickable face,
corner, or edge highlights and the cursor changes to an arrow with a small cube to indicate that it
is over the ViewCube tool. A tooltip is also displayed. The tooltip describes the action that you can
perform based on the location of the cursor over the ViewCube tool.
You can also click and drag the ViewCube tool to reorient the view of a model to a custom view
other than one of the twenty-six predefined parts. As you drag, the cursor changes to indicate
that you are reorienting the current view of the model. If you drag the ViewCube tool close to one
of the preset orientations, and it is set to snap to the closest view, the ViewCube tool rotates to
the closest preset orientation.

The outline of the ViewCube tool helps you to identify the form of orientation it is in:
standard or fixed. When the ViewCube tool is in standard orientation (i.e., not
orientated to one of the twenty-six predefined parts) its outline is displayed as dashed.
The ViewCube tool is outlined in a solid continuous line when it is constrained to one of
the predefined views.
When you view a model from one of the face views, two roll arrow buttons are displayed
near the ViewCube tool. Use the roll arrows to rotate the current view 90 degrees clockwise or
counterclockwise around the center of the view.
When the ViewCube tool is active while viewing a model from one of the face views, four
orthogonal triangles are displayed near the ViewCube tool. You use these triangles to switch
to one of the adjacent face views.
Selecting in the top right-hand corner of the ViewCube reorients the Scene View to its default
orientation and zoom level.
Additional ViewCube options can be accessed by selecting in the bottom left-hand corner of the
ViewCube. These options enable you to define the view setting, define the Home and Front orientations,
and access its settings in the Options Editor.
The display of the ViewCube can be set in the Navigation Aids panel on the View tab by enabling/disabling
the View Cube command in the Navigation Aids panel.
Navigation Bar (6)

The Navigation bar is a user interface element where you can access both unified and product-specific
navigation tools. Unified navigation tools (such as Autodesk ViewCube and SteeringWheels) are those
that can be found across many Autodesk products. Product-specific navigation tools are unique to a
product. The navigation bar floats over and along one of the sides of the Scene View.
You start navigation tools by clicking one of the buttons on the navigation bar. Many of the tools have
varying commands that are compressed. To expand a command, press and hold its icon and select
an alternate command.
The top-level Navigation bar commands are as follows. The full suite of commands that are available on
the Navigation Bar are discussed in Chapter 2.
Collection of wheels that offer rapid switching between
Full Navigation Wheel specialized navigation tools.
Activates the pan tool and moves the view parallel to the
Pan screen.
Set of navigation tools for increasing or decreasing the

Zoom Tools magnification of the current view of the model.
Set of navigation tools for rotating the model around a

Orbit Tools pivot point while the view remains fixed.
Set of navigation tools for rotating the current view

Look Tools vertically and horizontally.

Set of navigation tools for moving around the model and
Walk / Fly controlling realism settings.
The Navigation bar can be customized by selecting at the bottom of the bar. You can enable/disable
which commands are displayed, define where the Navigation bar is located in the Scene View window,
and access its settings in the Options Editor.
The display of the Navigation bar can be set in the View tab by enabling/disabling the Navigation Bar
command in the Navigation Aids panel.
Dockable Windows (7)

Most features are accessible from the dockable windows. To display a dockable window, expand the
Windows command in the View tab and choose from the list of available dockable windows. Alternatively,
some of the windows can be enabled/disabled directly on tabs. For example, the Selection Tree and
Properties windows are available on the Home tab.
All windows are dockable and resizable, and will automatically lock to specific locations near to where
they are moved.
Holding down the CTRL key when moving a window prevents it from auto docking.
Using the Docking Tool

When you drag a window from its current location towards a new destination on the interface, a docking
tool is displayed. The docking icons point towards the four edges of the interface. The options that are
available are dependent on the permittable locations for docking.

NOTE: These inner docking locations do not allow for pinning/unpinning workspaces. Only the outside
docking locations allow pinning.
When the window you are dragging is close to the place where you want it to dock, move the mouse over
the corresponding area of the docking tool. You will see an outline of the window appear on the interface.
To dock the window, release the mouse button.
Tiling Windows
You can tile windows on the interface. To do this, drag the window you want to tile over the window
where you want it to be placed. When a rectangular outline appears, release the mouse button.
Auto Hiding Windows

You can auto hide windows; this keeps them active while maximizing the amount of available screen
space. If auto-hide is active, the body of the window disappears when you move the cursor out of it,
leaving only the title bar visible. Move the cursor over the title bar to display the entire window again.
To turn auto-hide on, click on the title bar. To turn auto-hide off, click on the title bar.
Status Bar (8)

The Status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Navisworks screen.
The left-hand corner of the Status bar displays short instructions for using the Navisworks features.
The right-hand corner of the Status bar contains four performance indicators that provide constant
feedback as to how Navisworks is performing on your computer.
Performance Indicators
The four performance indicators are Scene Drawing, Disk to Memory, Web Server Download, and
Memory Usage.
Scene Drawing Indicator Bar

The Pencil progress bar indicates how much of the current view is drawn (for example, how
much drop-out there is in the current viewpoint). When the progress bar is at 100%, the view is
completely drawn, with no drop-out.
While the view is being drawn, the pencil icon will change to yellow. If there is too much data to handle
and the computer cannot process this quickly enough for Navisworks, then the pencil icon will change to
red, indicating a bottleneck.
Disk to Memory Indicator Bar

The Disk progress bar indicates how much of the current model is loaded from disk (for example,
how much is loaded into memory). When the progress bar is at 100%, the entire model, including
geometry and property information, is loaded into memory.
While data is being read, the disk icon will change to yellow. If there is too much data to handle and the
computer cannot process this quickly enough for Navisworks, then the disk icon will change to red,
indicating a bottleneck.

Web Server Download Indicator Bar
The Web Server progress bar indicates how much of the current model is downloaded when
opening a file via a URL (for example, how much has been downloaded from a Web server). When the
progress bar is at 100%, the entire model has been downloaded.
While data is being downloaded, the Web Server icon will change to yellow. If there is too much data to
handle and your computer cannot process this quickly enough for Navisworks, then the Web Server icon
will change to red, indicating a bottleneck.
Memory Usage Indicator

The field to the right of the icons displays the amount of memory currently being used by
Navisworks.
InfoCenter (9)
The InfoCenter is located in the top right-hand corner of Navisworks and provides a number of useful
tools for getting to know and searching for help in Navisworks.
The InfoCenter can be used to search for keywords by typing directly in the entry field. The additional
tools enable you to access subscription services, product updates and announcements, and to access the
Navisworks Help tool. The Favorites command also provides a convenient way of saving searched topics
for future review.

Lesson: Workflow
components such as complete manufacturing facilities, factory floor layouts, production lines & industrial
machinery, all in a single digital model by means of real time flythrough and walk through. Customers can
combine together CAD data from various design systems regardless of file format or size, for complete
Factory visualization and analysis.
Navisworks is compatible with all major native design and laser scan file formats. This means that 3D design
data from various CAD systems can be combined together to create a single digital model.
Objectives
Understand the Navisworks Multi-CAD Data Aggregation Workflow.

Assemble a Navisworks environment by aggregating 3D designs from various sources.

About File Types
When you open a model file or files in Navisworks, you can save the file as either an NWF file or an
NWD file.
NWC File
By default, when Autodesk Navisworks opens a native CAD file (for example, AutoCAD or MicroStation),
it first checks in the same directory whether there is a cache file present with the same name as the
CAD file but with an .NWC extension. If there is, and this cache file is newer than the native CAD file,
then Autodesk Navisworks opens this file instead as it has already been converted to Autodesk
Navisworks format and, therefore, opens much quicker.
NWF File
An NWF file contains the review markups, but no geometry. Instead, it includes links (acts as a pointer)
to the original native CAD drawing files (as listed in the Selection Tree). This means an NWF is
considerably smaller in file size than an NWD.
Generally, you should use NWF files whenever multiple files are brought together to create the scene,
such as xrefs in AutoCAD. This way, whenever one file changes, the whole model does not have to be
re-published, only the file that has changed needs to be re-read.
NWF files can also be used as the design review buffer for NWD files. Comments, views, redlining,
animations, material overrides, and clash tests can all be saved and added to an NWF file. The NWD
files may need to be re-published due to changes throughout the design process.
NWD File
An NWD file is a fully published Navisworks file containing all geometry and review markups. An NWD
file can be thought of as a snapshot of the current state of the model and can be viewed in both
Navisworks and Freedom (the Navisworks free viewer). An NWD file is created with the Publish
command, which is accessed by clicking Application Menu > Publish, or by selecting the Output
tab and clicking NWD on the Publish panel. The file can also include features such as password
access and file expiration dates.

Procedure: To Save as an NWF or NWD File
An NWD file can be saved using the normal Save As procedure. However, there are
additional features available if you use the Publish command. For more information, see
Publish.
1.
Click Application Menu > Save As.
2. In the Save As dialog box, in the Save as type drop-down list, select NWD or NWF.
3. Browse to the required directory then add an appropriate file name and click Save.
Tip: If a file will need to be read using an earlier version (2009 or 2010) of
Navisworks, it should be saved as that version type.
Merging NWF Files

An NWD file may be sent by a project coordinator to multiple parties for review. Each party will add
review markups and data to the model, which may include any combination of viewpoints, comments,
redlines, Clash Detective results, TimeLiner schedules, Presenter materials, and so on.
Each party can save their review session as an NWF file that references the original NWD file. The
project coordinator can then merge all of the NWF files into a single file, duplicating neither the NWD
file (referenced by all NWFs) nor any other review markup that is common to all NWFs.
Typical Navisworks Data Workflow

The following illustration maps the typical Navisworks Data Workflow.
Original data is created in various CAD applications.
Navisworks is used to open the designs creating a NWC cache file. The cache files are
automatically created and stored alongside the original work. As long as the NWC file is newer
than the original data, it is used for upstream design. If the original data is modified, a new
NWC file will be created during the next reference operation.
Once the original data is translated into Navisworks, it can be saved as an NWF file. The NWF
file simply references the original data (NWC). The NWF file only contains unique information
like user viewpoints, redline markups, animations, and simulations.
If necessary, a standalone NWD file can be created embedding all necessary geometry,
viewpoint, and markup information into a single highly compressed file.

Exercise: Data Aggregation 2. View the entire model using Zoom All,
and the View Cube.
In this exercise, you create a Navisworks On the View Cube, click the Upper Left
model by combining original data from corner on the Front face.
various CAD files or sources.
On the Navigation Bar, expand the

zoom tool and select Zoom All.
1. Open a file with Navisworks.

On the Navisworks application menu,
click Open.
The Scene should appear as shown in
Select NAV_001_Factory_Lines.iam and

click open.
When the model appears, Left-Click in the
background to deselect.
3. Append another file to the Navisworks

environment.
On the Home ribbon, click the Append
tool.
Select NAV_001_Conveyor_1.iam and

click Open.
Once the new model is displayed, Click
the Zoom All tool again.
Click in the background to deselect.

4. Repeat the previous step appending the 6. Open the previous file.
following files. On the application menu, click the
Note: Multiple files may be appended Open tool.
at the same time.
NAV_001_Robot_Line.iam
NAV_001_Packaging_Line.iam
NAV_001_Machining_Line.iam
NAV_001_Inspection_Line.iam
NAV_001_Factory_Out_Building.iam
NAV_001_Factory_Building.iam
NAV_001_Robot_Line.iam
NAV_001_Civil_Design Note the existence of .nwc files just
Click in the background to deselect. below each of the original cad files
Click Zoom All used in the previous step. These files
The Scene should appear as shown in contain the translation information
the following image. created during the initial import.
5. Save the entire design as an NWF file.

On the Application menu, click the
Save tool. Select NAV_001_Factory.nwf and
click open.
Notice how fast the file opens. At this
point, the NWC cache files
(automatically generated in the
previous steps) are newer than the
original CAD files. If the NWC files are
newer than the supporting CAD files
they are used during file open to
speed up performance.
If necessary, click in the background
In the Save As dialog, save the file as to deselect.
NAV_001_Factory.nwf.
Note: NWF is the default file format
for work in progress designs.
Start a New Navisworks file by clicking
the New tool on the application
menu.
Click File New and do not save.

End of Exercise.

Lesson: Publishing an NWD File
With Navisworks Publisher, you can take a snapshot of the model at any time. This can then be issued to
other members of the design team, who may not be CAD users, but who need to view the 3D model. NWD
files can be viewed in Navisworks for full design review, or with the Navisworks Freedom free viewer for a
simple real-time walkthrough. There is also the option for entering publication information that is saved
with the file. This includes password protection and file expiration options.
Procedure: To Publish an NWD File
1. In Navisworks, open the file that is to be published.
2.
Click Application Menu > Publish or select the Output tab and click NWD on the
Publish panel.
3. In the Publish dialog box (shown below), enter information in the Title, Subject, Author,
Publisher, Published For, Copyright, Keywords, and Comments fields, as needed. The additional
commands described below can also be set, as needed.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Save As window, browse to the required location, and enter a file name. (The name must
be different if saved in the same folder as the original.) Click Save. The published file can be
viewed in Navisworks or Freedom.

Publish Dialog Box Options
Option Description
Password Sets up a password if the file is to be protected and only accessed by certain
personnel. (The password will need to be passed to those people.)
By default, this dialog box, including the entered information, will not be
displayed until after the password has been entered and accepted. (See also
Display on open option.)
Display at Specifies that the Publish dialog box, including the entered information, is to be
password displayed with the Password field.
Expires Specifies an expiration date for the file. This can prevent the old files being used.
After the expiration date is passed, the file cannot be opened.
May be re- Allows further changes to be made to a file. By default, a published file cannot be
saved re-saved. This prevents changes being added to this publication.
Display on Specifies that the Publish dialog box is displayed when the file is opened. By
open default, the Publish dialog box, with entered information, is not displayed unless
the Display at Password box or the Display on open box is checked.
Embed Enables textures to be embedded in the one project file. If textures have been
Textures added to the model, these can be embedded in the file or it will be saved as a
separate file (in the same folder). The benefits of using the Embed Textures option
is that there is only one published project file and the textures, including any
custom or imported textures, will benefit from the security features of Publisher.
Embed Enables all the linked database properties to be embedded in the project file. This
Database feature enables any object properties accessed via an external database to be
Properties embedded in the NWD as normal properties.
This adds value to database linkage as well as NWD publishing, giving a quick and
easy way of getting a large amount of database data into the model, which is then
viewable by all.
Prevent Object Prevents inclusion of the object properties from any native CAD package in the
Property published file. This is intended primarily for protection of intellectual property.
Export

Exercise: Publishing an 3.

In the Publish Dialog, do the following...
For Title, enter Factory Site.
NWD File. For Subject, enter Sample Factory.
For Author, enter your name.
In this exercise, you publish a stand-alone For Publisher, enter your company.
NWD file containing all referenced For Published For, enter your customer
geometry. The NWD file may be e- name.
mailed to other members of your Review all other fields, but leave them
collaborative design team. blank.
Note: The NWD file does not maintain a Click OK.
relationship to the original CAD files and
must be treated as a Snap Shot of the
design at a specific time.
1. First Objective
Open NAV_002_Factory.nwf.
2. Start the Publish Command.

On the application menu, click the Publish
Command.
4. In the Save As dialog, save the NWD file in

the Training Files directory as
NAV_002_Factory.nwd.
Optional: check the file size of the NWD
file created in this exercise.
Start a New file without saving.
End of Exercise.

Chapter Summary
This chapter presented the Navisworks user interface and demonstrated basic workflows for loading
CAD models from various sources into the Navisworks environment. The supporting file types
used by Navisworks were also discussed.
Focus on the Navisworks product overview.
Review the Navisworks user Interface and Workflow.
Aggregate an entire Factory design from various CAD files.
Review the file types used by Navisworks.
Publish an NWD file.

Chapter
14
Visualization / Digital Mockup
components such as complete manufacturing facilities, factory floor layouts, production lines &
industrial machinery, all in a single digital model. The ability to navigate the entire digital model is
extremely important for quality assurance and the design review process. We can visualize complete 3D
layouts of manufacturing plants and factories consisting of the products, tooling, fixtures, machines, and
plant layouts.
The ability to walk through an extensive digital design is just the beginning of the Navisworks interactive
experience. The Measuring tools enable detailed measurement of distance, area, and angles. User
defined Cross Sections and section planes, enable close inspection of all details.
The construction process is a constant challenge for designers. The Factory design will change every day
during the construction cycle. Navisworks allow Factory designers to display the construction process in
the context of time, with the Timeliner. Designers can simulate the real-life experience and appearance
of manufacturing plants and factory layouts at any time in the installation process, so things go according
to schedule.
Objectives
Use the various Navigation tools available in Navisworks.
Establish Viewpoints and Animations
Use the Measuring tools to add dimensions to a Viewpoint.
Create user defined Cross Sections.
Review a Timeliner example.
Chapter14: Visualization / Digital Mockup 1

Lesson: Navigation
This lesson describes how the Navisworks navigation tools work. It also introduces you to
additional key actions and other tools to aid and enhance model navigation.
Objectives
Use the various navigation tools available in the Navisworks environment.
Using Navigation Tools

The Navigation bar and various tabs on the Ribbon include tools that help you navigate a model in a
variety of ways. When using a navigation tool, additional navigation functions may be available by using
the CTRL or SHIFT keys.
Navigation Bar
The Navigation bar is located on the right-hand side of the Scene view. You can control the display of
the Navigation bar on the View tab, in the Navigation Aids panel, by selecting/deselecting the
Navigation Bar option.
Icon Name Description

Pan Drag in any direction to move the camera correspondingly. Press SHIFT
or CTRL to temporarily switch to Zoom.
2 Chapter14: Visualization / Digital Mockup

Zoom Drag up or down to move the camera in and out along the axis of the
focal point.
Zoom Window Click and drag a box over an area on the scene to zoom into the
bounding area.
Zoom Selected Zoom in to selected items in the scene window.
Zoom All Fit the complete model into the scene window.
TIP: This can be useful if lost, in or outside the model.
Orbit Orbit the camera around the focal point; drag in any direction to orbit
correspondingly. Orbit mode resets the world up vector. Press SHIFT to
temporarily change to Zoom and press CTRL to temporarily change to
Pan.
Free Orbit Rotate the model around the focal point (similar to having the model
in the palm of the hand). Drag in any direction to move the model
correspondingly. Press and hold CTRL and select a new pivot location
with the left mouse button. To temporarily change to Pan,
press and hold the middle mouse button.
Constrained Spin the model on a turntable. Turntable mode resets the world up
Orbit vector. Once started, the model continues to rotate; click again in the
scene to stop rotation. Press SHIFT to temporarily switch to Zoom, or
press CTRL to temporarily switch to Pan to adjust the camera height.
Look Around Turn the camera about the viewpoint (similar to moving your head
around). Press CTRL to rotate the model.
Look At Looks at a particular face in the scene. The camera orients so that the
selected face is centered and parallel with the screen.
Focus Focus an item to the center of the scene window. Select, then click on
an item to center it.
Fly Fly the camera through the scene. Move up or down to ascend or
descend and left or right to move correspondingly. If you find yourself
flying too quickly, adjust linear and angular speeds by clicking
Viewpoint menu > Edit Current Viewpoints.
TIP: The Fly tool can be set to a speed that is suitable for the model
size, and so on. Select a viewpoint to navigate from, then click Tools
menu > Global Options > Interface > Viewpoint Defaults. Add a check
mark to Override Linear Speed and then set the speed as required.
Walk Walk around and through the model scene. Walk mode resets the
model to an upright position. Press SHIFT to increase walking speed or
press CTRL to temporarily switch to Pan to adjust the camera height.
Press SPACEBAR to temporarily crouch under an obstacle.
TIP: The Walk tool can be set to a speed that is most suitable for the
model size, and so on. Select a viewpoint to navigate from, then click
Tools menu > Global Options > Interface > Viewpoint Defaults. Click
Override Linear Speed, then set the speed as required.

The Viewpoint Tab
Additional viewing tools are available in Viewpoint tab on the ribbon, as described below.

Perspective View the model with a perspective camera (selected by default).
(camera panel)
Orthographic View the model with an orthographic camera.

(camera panel)
Collision (Motion Prevent navigation through objects. You can walk or climb over objects
Settings panel> in the scene up to half the height of the collision volume (viewer). This
Realism) way, you can climb stairs.
NOTE: Collision detection is only available in Walk or Fly modes.
TIP: The collision volume (viewer) can be adjusted in height and
radius. Click Application Menu > Options > Interface > Viewpoint
Defaults > Settings (Default Collision Detection), and set the viewer
radius and height as required.
Gravity (Motion Enable gravitational effect when walking (for example, being pulled
Settings panel> downwards). You can ascend and descend stairs and slopes. Enabling
Realism) the gravity tool automatically enables collision. This ensures that
gravity stops moving downward once the viewpoint collides with the
ground.
Crouch (Motion Enable automatic crouching while walking. (This function only works
Settings panel> with Collision Detection switched on.)
Realism)
Third Person View from a third persons perspective. When activated, an avatar
(Motion Settings (which is a representation of yourself) is visible in front of the camera
panel>Realism) within the 3D model. Navigating tools control the avatars interaction
with the current scene.
NOTE: With Auto Zoom enabled, the camera temporarily zooms closer
to the third person, if separated by an object during navigation. To
disable, go to Tools > Global Options > Interface > Viewpoint Defaults >
Settings > and remove the check mark from Auto Zoom.
Tip: The Third
Person, Collision, TIP:
Gravity, and Collision Detection and Crouch, Gravity, and Third Person can all
Crouch be switched on and off by pressing the shortcut keys, CTRL+C,
commands are
CTRL+G, and CTRL+T, respectively.
also available on
the Walk/Fly pull- Using Third Person in connection with Collision Detection and
down menu on Gravity makes this a very powerful function, giving an exact
the Navigation visualization of how a person would interact with the intended
bar. design.
The Third Person settings can be adjusted. To change the settings
for the current session, select the Viewpoint tab, and on the Save,
Load & Playback panel, click (Edit Current Viewpoint) and click
Settings in the Collision area. Under Third Person, select Enable,
then select Avatar (type), and the Angle and Distance if required.

Align X (Camera Aligns the camera along the X-axis.
panel>Align
Camera)
Align Y (Camera Aligns the camera along the Y-axis.

panel>Align
Camera)
Align Z (Camera Aligns the camera along the Z-axis.
panel>Align
Camera)
Straighten You can straighten the camera to align it with the viewpoint up vector.
(Camera panel>
When the camera position is close to the viewpoint up vector (within
Align Camera)
13 degrees), you can use this function to snap the camera to an axis.
Tip: As an alternative, type 0 at the base of the Tilt window.
N/A Tilt Camera Use the scroll bar to tilt the camera up and down. To display the scroll
bar in the Scene view, click Show Tilt Bar on the Viewpoint tab.
Navisworks global settings for the default use of the Realism commands are set in the
Application Menu > Options > Viewpoint Default > Settings. When the user
assigns settings from this location they become the default for every model that is
opened from this point on. To set and store the use of the Realism commands at the
model level, click Edit Current Viewpoint on the Viewpoint tab and click Settings.

Exercise: Using the 3.

Use Zoom Window.
Activate the Zoom Window tool.
Navigation Tools
In this exercise, you explore the Factory
Layout using various navigation
commands available on the Navigation
Bar.
In the Scene View, draw a box around

the area of the model shown below.
1. Open NAV_003_Navigation.nwf
2. Use the Zoom Commands.

On the Navigation bar, select the 4. Walk Thru the Model.
associated with the zoom command. On the Navigation Bar, click the Walk
Click Zoom All to obtain an overall view of Tool.
the model.
On the Viewpoint ribbon, set the realism

settings as shown in the following
image, then set the Lighting option to
use Scene Lights.
Note: The button on the Navigation bar

changes to Zoom All and stays active until
another tool is selected.
Left Click and drag the mouse fwd to

walk in that direction. After you land on
the ground proceed into the main
factory building entrance.

5. Explore the factory building using the walk 7. Use the View Cube.
tool. Click the Home button on the View
Drag the mouse Left and Right to look Cube.
side to side.
Use the scroll wheel to look up and down.
Use the Walk Tool to explore the factory
buildings.
Note: The collision setting in the realism
panel allows you to walk up stairs. Click the Front Face of the View Cube.
6. Explore the Factory grounds using the Fly

tool
Exit the building and stand in front of the
On the Navigation Bar, click Zoom All.
factory building.
Use the View Cube to set the view to
Clear all options on the Realism tool as
Right, Left, and Top.
Return to the Home View.
8. Use the Orbit Command.

On the Navigation Bar, click the Orbit
command.
In the Navigation bar select the

associated with the Walk command and
click the Fly fool.
Place the cursor at the desired Pivot
point and scroll up and back. This sets
the pivot point for the orbit command.
Hold the Left button down to start flying

thru the grounds.
Move the mouse fwd and back to change Left click and drag to adjust the
elevation. orientation of the model.
Move the mouse right and left to bank in Using the View Cube, return to the
that direction. Home View
Explore the factory grounds using the fly On the Navigation Bar, select the
command associated with the Orbit command.
Note: Hold the scroll wheel down to Click the Constrained Orbit tool.
adjust the yaw while flying. Drag left and right to spin the model like
a turntable.
Note: Release the mouse button while
dragging for a continuous spin.
Start a New file without saving.

End of Exercise.

Lesson: Viewpoints
This lesson describes how to create, organize, edit, and export viewpoints. It also introduces you to setting
navigation commands in viewpoints.
Objectives
Create, organize, edit, and export viewpoints.

About Viewpoints
Viewpoints are snapshots taken of the model as it is displayed in the scene. The model can be navigated
to a required view, items of the model can be hidden, and other items can be rendered with different
materials and lighting. Then the finished scene can be saved as a viewpoint for further reference.
In addition, you can add a variety of comments and Redline tags to a saved viewpoint.
When a viewpoint is saved it contains information about the following:
Camera position and focus point
Section planes
Navigation modes
Speeds
Rendering conditions
Perspective/orthogonal modes
Procedure: to Display and Add a Viewpoint

1. To display the Saved Viewpoints window, if it is not visible, select the Viewpoint tab and click
the icon on the Save, Load & Playback panels title bar. As an alternative, select the View
tab, expand the Windows option, and enable Saved Viewpoints. The Saved Viewpoints
window displays a list of the previously saved viewpoints.
2. Click a viewpoint to display it.
3. To quickly view the whole model, click Zoom All on the Navigation Bar on the right-hand side
of the Scene View.
NOTE: Saved animations are also located in the Viewpoints window. See Animate
Objects for more information.
4. Navigate to the required position in the model.
5. Prepare the view (for example, apply rendering, lighting, comments, redlines, navigation
modes, and tools).
6. Right-click in the Viewpoints window, and click Save Viewpoint.
7. Enter a new name and press ENTER.

Tip: To rename a Viewpoint to an alternate name, right-click the viewpoint in the Viewpoints
window and click Rename.

Organizing Viewpoints
Viewpoints (and animations) can be moved, reordered, or organized in folders as follows:
To move a viewpoint to a different position, drag it to the new position.
To sort the list of viewpoints alphanumerically, right-click in the Viewpoints window, and then
click Sort.
To create a folder, right-click in the Viewpoints window, then click New Folder.
To rename the folder, right-click the folder in the Viewpoints window, and click Rename. In
the folder name field, enter a new name for the folder.
To move viewpoints to a folder, in the Viewpoints window, select all viewpoints to be moved
and drag to the folder.
To sort the list of folders (and viewpoints) alphanumerically, right-click in the Viewpoints
window, and then click Sort.

Editing Viewpoints
Viewpoint settings can be changed in Application Menu > > Interface > Viewpoint Defaults,
which will be effective on all new viewpoints. Each viewpoint can also be edited individually.
Procedure: To Open the Viewpoint Editor

1. In the Viewpoints window, select the viewpoint to be edited.
2. Right-click the selected viewpoint, and then click Edit.

IMPORTANT: To save the changes after editing, click OK. Then right-click the viewpoint in the
Viewpoint window, and click Update.
Camera Positions
Position X Y Z coordinates of the viewing position.
Look At X Y Z coordinates of the focal point.
Vertical Field of View Viewing perspective of the camera.
o Enter a value between 1 and 90. (This is not editable when in orthographic mode.)
Horizontal Field of View Viewing perspective of the camera.
o Enter a value between 1 and 90. (This is not editable when in orthographic mode.)
Roll Roll of the camera about its viewing axis. (This value is not editable when the world up
vector remains upright (in Walk, Orbit, and Turntable modes.)

Motion Speeds
Editing the following motion settings takes effect when navigating from this viewpoint. When a
different viewpoint is selected, the motion settings revert to the Global Option settings unless
overridden in that viewpoint.
Linear Speed Navigation speed in a straight line.
Angular Speed Turning speed of a viewpoint (value in degrees per second).
Saved Attributes
Hide/Required Saves objects set in the scene as hidden or required.
Override Material Saves overridden colors and transparencies of an object in a viewpoint.
Collision
Click Settings in the Edit Viewpoint dialog box to open the Collision dialog box.
Collision Add a check mark to switch collision detection on with this viewpoint.
Gravity Add a check mark to incorporate gravity on with this viewpoint.
Auto Crouch Add a check mark to enable crouching in this viewpoint.

Lesson: Animations
This lesson describes how to record animations and create animations between two or viewpoints.
Objectives
Record a Walking or Flying Animation

Create an Animation between two Viewpoints.

Creating Animations.
Animations can be created, edited, and played back in Navisworks, and also played back in the Freedom
viewer. Animations can also be exported in AVI format to be played back in a variety of software including
Windows Media Player.
There are two ways to produce an animation, either by recording interactive navigation, or by animated
transitions between saved viewpoints. In addition, an animation can be created in the form of a slide
show.
Animation Tab
Procedure: To View a Saved Animation

1. In the Saved Viewpoints window, select the animation.
2. Select the Animation tab.
On the Playback panel, click Play to view the animation.

3.
Click Stop or Pause to stop play at any time.

4.
Click Step Forward or Step Backward to advance or reverse by one frame in the
5. animation.
Click Rewind or Forward to move to the beginning or end of the animation.

6.
7. Drag the Animation Slider or the Time field
to view a specific point in the animation.
NOTE: Animations can also be played back using the controls on the Viewpoint tab. The only
difference is that the Animation Slider and the Time field are not available on this tab.

Procedure: To Record an Interactive Animation
1. Select the viewpoint where the animation will begin.
3.
On the Create panel, click Record to start recording movements in the Navisworks scene.
4. Navigate around the model as required.
5.
In the Recording panel, click Stop to end the recording. Navisworks automatically saves the
animation to the Viewpoints window and names it Animation1.
6. In the Viewpoints window, right-click Animation 1, and click Rename. In the animation name
field, enter a new descriptive name, and press ENTER.
NOTE: Any delay in navigation or delay due to switching navigation tools will cause a cut frame
to be added to the animation. This cut frame will add a controlled pause to the animation, or be
an identifier of where frames may need to be removed to make a more smooth video
movement.
Procedure: To Create an Animation from Viewpoint Transitions
2. Right-click in the Viewpoints window, and then click Add Animation.
3. To rename the new animation, in the Viewpoints window, right-click the animation, and click
Rename. In the animation name field, enter a new name and press ENTER.
4. Create all the viewpoints required for the animation and rename each if required.
5. Drag the viewpoints into the empty animation.

The animation is ready for viewing.

Exercise: Create Viewports 3.

Review the Existing Viewpoints.
Some Viewpoints have already been
and Animations created for this exercise.
In the Saved Viewpoints window, click
In this exercise, you create Viewpoints at the Main Entrance viewpoint.
specific points in the factory layout.
These viewpoints are then used to create
animations moving from one viewpoint to
another.
Notice that the viewpoint can be set to

behave a predetermined manner. In this
rd
case the 3 Person Avatar is active and
the navigation mode is set to walk.
the Conference Room Viewpoint.
Review the other existing Viewpoints.

4. Create a Viewpoint.
1. Open NAV_004_Viewpoints.nwf the R&D Floor viewpoint.
Click in the Background to deselect. On the Viewpoint ribbon, clear the Third
Person option for Realism.
2. Review existing Viewpoints.
On the View tab, under Window, Activate
the Saved Viewpoints window.
Position yourself in front of the Robot

Arm as shown in the following image.
Pin the Window open by clicking the pin

button shown below.

Right Click in the Saved Viewpoint Left Click and Drag the Robot Arm
window and select Save Viewpoint. Viewpoint on top of the animation
node and release the mouse button.
Repeat the previous process dragging

the Blower Viewpoint into the
animation.
Name the new Viewpoint, Robot Arm. After adding the Viewpoints to the
Change your position to view the animation the animation node should
Blower as shown in the following look like the following image.
image.
6. Set the Timing for the Animation.

Right Click on the Animation and
select Edit.
In the Edit Animation dialog, set the
duration to 30 seconds.
Click OK.
Right Click in the Saved Viewpoint
window and select Save Viewpoint.
Name the new Viewpoint, Blower. 7. Viewing the Animation.
On the Viewpoint ribbon, on the Save,
Load & Playback panel, click the play
8. Create an Animation between two button.
Viewpoints.
Right Click in the Saved Viewpoint
window and select Add Animation.
Note: The Animation must be

selected in the Saved Viewpoint
window.
Start and New file without saving.

End of Exercise.
Name the Animation Robot to
Blower.

Exercise: Record an 3.

Set the timing for the Animation.
Right Click on the Walkthru animation
Animation. and select Edit.
In the Edit Animation dialog, set the
In this exercise, you create an duration to 30 seconds.
animation by recording a
walkthrough.
Click OK.
4. View the Animation.

On the Animation ribbon, Playback
panel, click the Play button.
Challenge: Create a Recorded

1. Open NAV_005_Record_Walkthru.
Animation of a flight around the factory
Click in the Background to deselect.
grounds.
Activate the R&D Floor Viewpoint.
Hints:
2. Record a Walkthru. Turn off the Third Person Avatar.
Click the Animation Tab. Turn off Collision.
Note: Please read the following step Select a starting position outside the
entirely before proceeding. buildings.
Click the Record button and quickly
begin walking. Walk out the rear of
the factory building and into the
factory out building next door. When
you reach your destination, click the
Record button to stop the recording.
In the Saved Viewpoint window, name

the new animation Walkthru.

Lesson: Digital Mockup
Combining a digital prototype of a factory building with another digital prototype of a packaging or machining line
can create several challenges. Navisworks allows designers to easily compare multiple digital prototypes in a digital
mockup of the entire design. Experiencing the factory building, factory lines, and supporting infrastructure before
construction allows design refinement and the opportunity to fix critical errors. This section will focus on
Navisworks tools that aid in the analysis and manipulation of the Digital Mockup.
Objectives
Utilize the Factory Layout and Item Tools to manipulate model geometry.
Use the Measuring Tools to make linear, angular, and area measurements.
Use the Cross Section tools to expose interior detail.
Review a Timeliner sample file.

Lesson: Factory Layout Tools
The version of Navisworks that ships with the Autodesk Factory Suite has special tools built in to
aid in the Factory Layout process. The floor concept, introduced in the Inventor Factory Design
Utilities, is present in Navisworks as well. Users can insert geometry from various CAD sources
and specify a landing surface, so components land upright. Special Grip Snap options make
placing model geometry extremely easy. This lesson will focus on the Factory Layout Tools
available in Autodesk Navisworks.
Objectives
Familiarize yourself with the Factory Layout Tools available in Navisworks.

Append Model geometry from various CAD sources into the Navisworks model.
Use the Item Tools to move and rotate model geometry.

Factory Layout Ribbon
The Factory ribbon contains the Factory Layout Tools unique to the Factory version of Navisworks. An
outline of the commands and general functionality are included in the table below.
1. Utilities You can use Resize Floor to manually change the floor size by
dragging the borders. When you click Resize Floor, grips display at
the corners and midpoints of the floor edges.
The new floor size is saved in the Options Editor dialog box. If Auto
Resize is enabled, Resize Floor updates the minimum floor size.

2. Position The Grip Snap tool provides several methods for moving and rotating models.
When you select a point or an edge on a model, a mini-toolbar displays with
options for moving the model.
Grip Snap options for an edge selection
Grip Snap options for a point selection
Each mini-toolbar provides three options for moving the model. Once you
select an edge or a vertex on the model, the mini-toolbar appears. You can
press Tab to cycle through each of the mini-toolbar options. Click the Back
option on the far right of the mini-toolbar to cancel the edge or vertex you
selected, and then you can select a different edge or vertex on the model
again.
Once you start to move the model, you can press Esc to cancel the move, and
then press Esc a second time to cancel the command.
Free Drag is available for both Edge and Point selections. The model
is attached to the pointer, and you can manually move the model to
a different location. The model snaps to the floor grid and other
model geometry.
Move Using Reference Geometry is available for both Edge and Point
selections. It repositions the model based on selections on another
model. The orientation of the model does not change.
Drag Along Ray is only available for Edge selections. You can
dynamically drag the model along the infinite line defined by the
selected edge. Or, you can enter a specific value in the Heads-Up
Display.
Rotate About Point is only available for Point selections. You can
dynamically rotate the model around the selected point. The rotation
is restricted to the XY plane. You can also enter a specific angular
value in the Heads-Up Display.
The Back button cancels the current selection and keeps the Grip
Snap command active so you can select other geometry.
You can move one or several models with the Grip Snap command. The
model with the selected geometry always moves. To move multiple models,
press and hold the CTRL key while selecting them in the graphics window
before you start the command. Or, you can select the models from the
Selection Tree after starting the command. If you start the command without
preselecting models, you can only move the model with the selected
geometry. If multiple models are preselected, and you select geometry on a
different model, the preselection set is cleared and only the last model
moves.

2. Position Most components in a factory are placed relative to the floor.
Conveyors and other equipment sit on the floor, but items like hoppers
and ductwork are usually positioned at a specific height above the floor.
The landing surface of a model defines how it sits on the factory floor.
Models are initially placed so the model coordinate system aligns with
the factory coordinate system. You can set the landing surface by
selecting three points on the model to define a plane. You can also
change the landing surface of a model if it requires a different
orientation. For example, a strut channel can be mounted on the ceiling
or on a wall, so the landing surface depends on the location.
For machinery, you simply pick points on the mounting feet and it will
sit on the floor. For objects like pipe hangers, you pick the points where
you want to set the height. The model is placed on the floor, and you
can use Grip Snap to move it to the correct height.
3. Learn Activates the Factory Specific Help system.

About
Factory
Activates a web link to the Autodesk Manufacturing Channel on

YouTube. There you will find various instructional videos to help you get
started using the application.

4. Community Activates the Autodesk Wiki Help page.
Activates the Autodesk Factory Design YouTube Channel.
Activates the Autodesk Factory Design Facebook page.
Activates the Autodesk Twitter, Flicker, and Autodesk

Discussion Forum pages.
Lesson: Item Tools

When you select model geometry, the context sensitive Item Tools tab appears on the ribbon. This
ribbon, allows you to manipulate the selected geometry in a number of ways. This lesson outlines the
commands located on the Item Tools ribbon.
1. Switchback You can use the SwitchBack functionality to send the current view of the
currently loaded file back to Inventor.
Note: SwitchBack supports all versions of Inventor 2011, but Inventor must
be installed on the same machine as Navisworks Factory for SwitchBack to
work.
Additional Switch Back information is available in this chapter.
2. Hold When you navigate around a model in Autodesk Navisworks, it is possible to

pick up or hold selected items and move around with them in the model.
For example you may be viewing a plan for a factory and would like to see
different configurations of machine layouts.

3. Look At When you are in focus mode, clicking on an item swivels the camera
so that the point clicked is in the center of the view. This point
becomes the focal point for the Orbit tools (SteeringWheels and
navigation bar).
Zooms to the extents of the selected item.
4. Visibility Hides the selected items. You can hide the objects in the current
selection so that they are not drawn in the Scene View. This is useful
when you want to remove specific parts of the model. For example,
when you walk down the corridor of building, you may want to hide a
wall that occludes your view of the next room.
Forces the selected items to remain visible during interactive

navigation, regardless of any performance settings. Although
Autodesk Navisworks intelligently prioritizes objects for culling in the
scene, sometimes it drops out geometry that needs to remain visible
while navigating.
5. Transform Moves the selected item with the translation Gizmo.

Note: Additional information on the Move command is available in
this chapter.
Rotates the selected item with the translation Gizmo.

Note: Additional information on the Rotate command is available in
this chapter.
Resizes the selected item with the translation Gizmo.

Note: Additional information on the Scale command is available in this
chapter.
Resets the position, rotation, and scale of the selected objects back to
the original values.
6. Appearance Sets the Transparency level and Color of the Selected objects.

The SwitchBack Feature
SwitchBack is designed to improve the workflow of design review by significantly reducing the time
taken finding and altering original designs.
When reviewing a model, the SwitchBack feature enables an instant switch back from Navisworks, to
the CAD application that the model was created in. Furthermore, when an object is selected in
Navisworks and then SwitchBack is selected, the same object is displayed in the CAD application, in the
same camera position.
This means that when reviewing an object in the model that then requires changes, by using
SwitchBack, you can access the object easily in the CAD application and make changes. When the file is
saved in the CAD application, and the model in Navisworks refreshed, the effect of the altered object
can be reviewed
To use SwitchBack with Inventor.

1. Start Inventor so that both it and Navisworks Factory are running simultaneously.
2. Select an object in the Scene View, and click Item Tools tab SwitchBack panel
SwitchBack.
3. The current Navisworks Factory camera view is taken back to Inventor, and the same object is
selected.
Note: Alternatively, you can right-click over the object in the Scene View and select SwitchBack
from the pop-up context menu. You can also right-click over the object node in the Selection
Tree and select SwitchBack. Additionally, in the Clash Detective window, on the Results tab, you
can click the SwitchBack button.
4. Make the changes in Inventor, then save the changes.
5. Return to Navisworks Factory, and click Refresh on the Quick Access toolbar to view the
modified object.

Move an Object with the Gizmo
To move an object with gizmo
1. Select the object you want to move in the Scene View.
2. Click Item Tools tab Transform panel Move .
3. Use the move gizmo to adjust the position of the currently selected object:
o To move all currently selected objects, place the mouse over the square at the end of the
desired axis. When the cursor changes to , drag the square on the screen to
increase/decrease the translation along that axis.
o To move the objects along several axes at the same time, drag the square frame between
the desired axes.
Dragging the yellow square in the middle of the move gizmo enables you to snap this
center point to other geometry in the model.
o To move the gizmo itself rather than the selected objects, hold down the CTRL key while
dragging the square at the end of the desired axis.
o To snap the move gizmo to other objects, hold down the CTRL key while dragging the
yellow square in the middle of the gizmo.
o For the point-to-point translation, hold down the CTRL key, and use the center square
to drag the gizmo to the start point. Then, with CTRL released, drag the square again to
move the objects to the end point.

Rotate an Object with the Gizmo
To rotate an object with gizmo
1. Select the object you want to rotate in the Scene View.
2. Click Item Tools tab Transform panel Rotate .
3. Use the gizmo to rotate the currently selected object:

o Before you can rotate the currently selected objects, you need to position the origin
(center point) of the rotation. To do this, place the mouse over the square at the end of
the desired axis. When the cursor changes to , drag the square on the screen to
increase/decrease the translation along that axis. This will move the gizmo itself.
Dragging the yellow square in the middle of the rotate gizmo enables you to move it
around, and snap it to points on other geometry objects.
o Once the rotate gizmo is positioned correctly, place the mouse over one of the curves
in the middle, and drag it on the screen to rotate the selected objects. The curves are
color-coded, and match the color of the axis used to rotate the object around. So, for
example, dragging the blue curve between the X and Y axes, rotates the objects around
the blue Z axis.
o To rotate the orientation of the gizmo to an arbitrary position, hold down the CTRL key
while dragging one of the three curves in the middle.
o To snap the gizmo to other objects, hold the CTRL key while dragging the yellow square
in the middle of the gizmo.

Resize an Object with the Gizmo
To resize an object with the gizmo
1. Select the object you want to resize in the Scene View.
2. Click Item Tools tab Transform panel Scale .
3. Use the scale gizmo to resize the currently selected object:

o To resize all currently selected objects, place the mouse over one of seven squares.
When the cursor changes to , drag the square on the screen to modify the size of
the objects. Typically, dragging a square up or right increases the size, dragging it down
or left decreases the size.
o To resize the objects across a single axis only, use colored squares at the end of the
axes. To resize the objects across two axes at the same time, use yellow squares in the
middle of the axes. Finally, to resize the objects across all three axes at the same time,
use the square in the center of the gizmo.
o You can modify the center of scaling. To do this, place the mouse over the square in the
middle of the gizmo, and hold down the CTRL key while dragging the square on the
screen.

Exercise: Factory Layout 3.

Set the Landing Surface for the Container
The Container was originally modeled in
Tools and Item Tools a different X,Y,Z orientation. The Set
Landing Surface command located on
In this exercise, you add a Skylift and the Factory ribbon, allows users to
shipping container to the overall factory specify a landing surface by selecting 3
design. The Factory Tools are used to set points.
the landing surface for one of the On the Factory ribbon, click the Set
components, and the Item Tools are used Landing Surface tool.
to place the objects in the desired Click the 3 corner points shown in the
location.
following image.
Note: Each point is located on the
bottom (currently side) of the shipping
container.
The Container flips to the underside of

1. Open NAV_005A_Factory_Item_Tools.nwf. the floor grid. Click the Inverse button
Click in the background to deselect. in the heads up display as shown.
Activate the Factory Layout Tools
Viewpoint.
2. Add a shipping container to the layout.

On the Home ribbon, use the Append
The Container flips to the proper
command and add Container.skp from the
orientation. Click the Confirm button in
Components / Google Sketchup folder.
the heads up display as shown.
Navisworks automatically zooms to and
highlights the appended file, as shown in
the following view.
Press the Esc key to deselect the

component.

4. Place the Container on the Flatbed Truck The Shipping Container should be
at the rear of the factory using Grip positioned similar the following
Snaps. image.
On the Factory ribbon, click the Grip
Snap tool.
Select the lower corner of the

Shipping Container as shown in the
following image.
5. Use the Item Tools to place the Shipping

Container in the final position.
When any object is selected, the Item
Tools tab appears at the top of the
ribbon (Shown Below).
On the Item Tools ribbon. Click the

Move tool.
Select Free Drag from the Heads Up
Display as shown.
The Move Gizmo appears at the

Activate the Loading Area Viewpoint. center of the selected geometry.
Click the horizontal edge of the
flatbed as shown in the following
image.

Place the cursor at the end of the Challenge Using the processes
Green (Y) axis. When the Hand demonstrated in this exercise, do the
symbol appears, Left Click and drag following.
the Shipping Container to the front of
the flatbed. Append Skylift.skp to the layout. The
file is located in the Components /
Google Sketchup folder.
Use the Item Tools to Move the Skylift
to the rear of the facility.
Hint: The Top Viewpoint is preset
looking down on the overall factory
grounds. Using this viewpoint allows
you to drag the Skylift and easily cover
the distance.
Use the Rotate Gizmo to spin the
Skylift into position.
The following image shows the
desired position of the Skylift.
The final position of the Shipping

Container is shown below.
Press ESC to Clear the selection.
6. Activate the Factory Layout Tools

Viewpoint for the Challenge portion of
this exercise.

Lesson: Measuring Tools
Navisworks provides designers with a set of measuring tools. Measurements can be made from any
edge, vertex, or surface. The Measurement tools are located on the Review ribbon.
Snapping
Snapping controls can be set in the Options Editor to precisely select vertices and edges while making
measurements. These settings are in the Snapping group of the Options Editor dialog box. You can also
specify the Tolerance for picking in this window.
Enable Snap to Vertex, Snap to Edge, or Snap to Line Vertex, as necessary, to aid in making
measurements. Snap settings can also help when moving, rotating, or scaling in Navisworks.
Cursor Name Description
No All Snap options are cleared. No snap function, but a point on a surface
Snap is found.
Vertex
Cursor changes to when a point, snap point, or line end is moved over
(found to snap to).
Edge
Cursor changes to when moved over an edge (found to snap to).
The geometry in Navisworks is constructed with triangles, and therefore the cursor
will snap to edges that may appear to be in the middle of a face.
Viewing the model in Hidden Line mode clarifies which vertex or edge the cursor
is snapping to
.

Procedure: How to Use Measuring Tools
1. Select the Review tab and expand the Measure command.
In the expanded Measure command there are six measuring tools that are available for use.
2. Point to Point measures between two points.

Click Point to Point . Then click the start and end points of the distance to be
measured. A line is displayed between the two points and the value is displayed on
the model.
Click Clear or right-click to remove existing points and select a new base point.
3.
Point to Multiple Points measures between a base and various other points.
Click Point to Multiple Points . Then click on the start and first end point to be
measured. A line is displayed between the two points and the value is displayed on
the model.
Click the next end point to be measured. A line is displayed between the base point
and the next end point and the value is displayed on the model.
Repeat to measure additional end points if required.
4.
Point Line measures a total distance between multiple points along a route.
Click Point Line . Then click the start and the second point to be measured. A line
is displayed between the two points and the value is displayed on the model.
Click the third point to be measured. The line extends to the third point.
Repeat to measure the total distance between additional points if required.

5.
Accumulate calculates the sum of several point-to-point measurements.
Click Accumulate . Then click the start and end points of the first distance to be
measured. A line is displayed between the two points.
Click alternately on additional start and end points as needed. The sum of all the
selected segments are displayed on the model.
6.
Angle calculates an angle between two lines.
Click Angle . Then click on a point along the first line.

Click on the first line at the point where the second line intersects. Finally, click on a
point along the second line.
The value is displayed on the model.
7.
Area calculates an area on a specific plane.
Click Area . Then click on points along the perimeter of the area to be measured.
Select as many points as required to obtain the accuracy you want.
All the points added must lie on the same plane to be accurate.
A line is displayed between the points and the value is displayed on the model.

The Measure Tools window can also be displayed when measuring to provide additional information on
the measurements. To display this window, select the View tab, expand the Windows option, and
enable Measure Tools or click on the Measure panel title bar on the Review tab. The Measure
command icons on the Measure Tools window vary slightly from those on the ribbon. However, they
can also be used to initiate a Measure command when the Measure Tools window is displayed. Hover
your mouse over the icons to display a command tooltip.
As selections are made on the model the locations of the start and end points are populated in the
Measure Tools window and the Difference and Distance fields are calculated. The information in the
Measure Tools window varies depending on the Measure command that is active. For example, when
measuring an Angle or Area, the Distance field is changed to an Angle and Area field respectively.
Measuring Tool Options

The Measuring tools have a number of options for obtaining accurate measurements. The options can
be accessed by clicking Options on the Measure Tools window or you can click Application Menu >
> Interface > Measure.
Select options as needed.

Exercise: Using the 3.

Open the Measure Tools window.
On the Review ribbon, click the
Measure Tools expand button shown in the following
image.
In this exercise, you use the measure
tools to extract information from the
model.
Pin the Measure Tools window open.
4. Measure the size of the Robot Table.

Start the Point to Point measurement
tool located on the Measure flyout.
1. Open NAV_006_Measure_Tools.nwf.
Activate the Measure Viewpoint.
2. Check the current measurement

options. Select the two vertexes shown in the
On the Application Menu, Click following image. Note the vertex
Options. snap symbol highlighted below.
In the Options Editor, select Measure.
Review the options available. For this

exercise we will use the default On the Measure Panel, click Convert
options. to Redline. This converts the current
In the Options Editor, select Snapping. measurement to a redline object.
Make sure the options are set as Note: A Viewpoint is automatically
shown in the following image. created to support the Redline.

Add the additional measurements 6. Measure the size and position of the
shown in the following image, Blower.
converting each to a redline markup. Walk to the Blower component in the
rear of the factory as shown in the
following image.
Using the measure tools, determine
the height and width of the machine
and how close it currently is to the
back wall.
5. Measure the distance to the nearest

column.
Using Edge Snaps, select the two
edges shown in the following image.
Note the highlighted edge snap
below.
Open a New File without saving
End of Exercise.
Review the distance values in the

Measure Tools window. Note the
linear distances is shown in the view,
but the X, Y, and Z values are
displayed in the Measure Tools
window.
On the Measure Panel click the Clear

tool.

Lesson: Cross Section Tools
Sometimes the detail you need to see is hidden behind other components in the design. The Cross
Section tools allow you to display and inspect any area of your digital mockup.
With sectioning, you can make up to six sectional cuts in any plane and still be able to navigate around
the scene. You view models inside without hiding any item. Viewpoints of section planes can be saved
and used in animations to show a dynamically sectioned model.
Slices can also be created using multiple section planes and linking them as a slice. In this way the
model can be navigated and the scene viewed as a slice in real time, and used in viewpoints and
animations.
Procedure: To Create Sectioned Planes

1. Select a saved viewpoint or manipulate the model to an orientation to begin sectioning from.
2 Select the Viewpoint tab and click Enable Sectioning in the Sectioning panel. The
Sectioning Tools context-sensitive tab appears.
3. In the Mode panel, ensure that Planes is enabled to define sections in the scene using
planes.
4. In the Current pull-down menu in the Plane Settings panel, select a plane to activate it. By
default Plane 1 is activated.
Notice in the pull-down menu that Plane1 is enabled as indicated by the yellow lightbulb
icon. The remaining planes are not initially active.
5. By default, each plane has a default Alignment already assigned (e.g., Top, Bottom, Front, and
so on). To change this alignment, select the Alignment pull-down menu in the Planes Settings
panel. The alignment options correspond to the faces of the ViewCube along with the
following options:
Click Align View to section through the model, parallel to the current viewpoint
regardless of its viewing angle.
Click Align to Surface to section through the model aligned with a selected surface.
Click Align to Line to section through the model aligned to a selected line.
6. To change the location of the sectioning plane in the model, select either the Move or
Rotate commands in the Transform panel.
7. Use the gizmo that appears on the plane in the Scene View to move/rotate the position of
the plane in the viewpoint. To enter an exact positioning value, expand the Transform panel
and enter coordinates or angular values.
8. Enable additional planes by selecting them in the Current pull-down menu. Once enabled you
can change their alignment or Move/Rotate them, as necessary.
9. To disable a plane once it is displayed, select on the Planes Settings panel header and
disable the planes display in the Section Plane Settings window that appears.
10. On the Save panel, click to save the Viewpoint. Enter Section1 as the name of the
viewpoint.

Linking Section Planes
Use Link Section Planes to link two or more section planes together, forming a slice, and then use the
gizmo or the Transform fields to move the slice through the model.
Procedure: To Link Section Planes

1. Create all of the individual section planes that will be linked together.
2. With the Sectioning Tools tab active, enable the appropriate planes that are required in the
slice. The planes can be either parallel or perpendicular to one another.
3.
On the Planes Settings panel, click Link Section Planes to link the planes together.
4. Use the gizmo that is displayed on the linked section planes or the Transform fields to move
the slice through the model.
5. Repeat the above steps for other planes if required.
6.
On the Planes Settings panel, click Link Section Planes again to disable the link.
7.
On the Save panel, click to save the Viewpoint. Enter a descriptive name for the
viewpoint.
TIP: Record the model as it is progressively sectioned, either using the gizmo or by setting up
two views of the model in different states of section and then adding them to an empty
animation.

Exercise: Sectioning 2. Move the Section.
In the Plane Settings panel, ensure
In this exercise, you create section that Plane 1 is displayed as the
planes to reveal interior detail for the currently active plane in the
factory building. Current pull-down menu. Pull-
down the menu and notice that
Plane1 is enabled as indicated by
the yellow lightbulb icon. The
remaining planes are not active.
By default, the Alignment option
for Plane 1 is set to Top as shown
in the Plane Settings panel. Ensure
that Top is set as the alignment
option
In the Transform panel, ensure
that the Move command is
enabled so that you can access the
move gismo on the section plane.
Select the gizmo that is displayed
1. Open NAV_007_Section_Planes.nwf. with the plane. Drag the gizmo
Click in the background to deselect. upwards to change the position of
On the Viewpoint ribbon, click Enable the plane in the model.
Sectioning. Place the plane as shown in the
following image.
The model should appear as shown in


3. Activate a second Section Plane. 5. Save a Sectioned Viewpoint.
In the Plane Settings panel, select On the Save panel, click Save
the Current pull-down menu and
select Plane 2 to enable it. Expand Viewpoint to save the
the Current pull-down menu again Viewpoint. Enter Section1 as the
and notice that Plane 1 is also still name of the viewpoint.
displayed as indicated by the yellow
While using section planes, you can
lightbulb icon.
use the navigation modes to review
areas of interest in the model.
6. Turn Off Section Planes.

On the Plane Settings Panel, Click the
small expand button.
Tip: To disable a plane once it is

displayed, select on the Planes Clear the checkmark beside Plane 1 and
Settings panel header and disable the 2. Also clear the check mark for Link
planes display in the Section Plane Planes.
Settings window that appears.
By default, the Alignment option for
Plane 2 is set to Bottom. Maintain
this setting.
In the Transform panel, ensure that
the Move command is enabled.

Using the Gizmo, drag the section
plane to a position similar to the one
Challenge Create a Section view
similar to the one in the following
image.
Hints:
Use Plane 3
Save a Viewpoint once the view is
established.
4. Link two Section Planes.

In the Plane Settings panel, click Link
Section Planes to link section

planes 1 and 2 together, forming a
slice of the first floor.
Use the gizmo on the model to move
the slice through the model
Open a new file without saving.
End of Exercise.

Lesson: TimeLiner
Navisworks TimeLiner creates 4D simulations (a simulation that includes time) of the construction of 3D
models. By attaching items in the model to tasks with a start and end
date/time, you can create a simulation that shows sections of the model being added or
removed over time, according to the scheduled tasks.
With TimeLiner, you can also link the objects to tasks in an external scheduling file, and synchronize the
simulation with the actual status of the project. Actual and planned dates can be associated with the
tasks, simulating actual against planned schedules.
This lesson describes how to open and position the TimeLiner window within Navisworks. It also
introduces you to the Task and Simulation tabbed panes and demonstrates playing a simulation of the
construction of a 3D building.
Timeliner Task Window
1. Task Name
2. Start Date
3. End Date
4. Task Type
5. Attachment Status
Timeliner Simulate Window

1. Player Tools
2. Work in Progress
Visualization
3. Completed Task
Visualization
4. On Screen Status Text
5. Active Task
6. Task Progress
7. Start and End Date
Procedure: To Open and play a Timeliner Simulation

To open the TimeLiner window, select the Home tab and click TimeLiner in the Tools panel. The
TimeLiner window appears at the bottom of the Navisworks window. The Simulation tab in the
Timeliner window contains the player controls.

Exercise: Run a Timeliner 4.

Simulate the Timeline
Click the Simulate tab in the Timeliner
Simulation window.
Click the Play button and review the
In this exercise, you review an construction schedule timeline.
existing Timeliner simulation for the
proposed construction process for
the packaging line.
Drag the slider to any point in the

simulation and use the navigation
tools to explore the specific point in
the construction timeline.
1. Open NAV_008_TimeLiner.nwf
Activate the ISO All Viewpoint.
Review the current timeline

2. Open the Timeliner Window. information on the screen.
On the Home tab in the Tools
panel, click TimeLiner.
The TimeLiner window appears at

the bottom of the Navisworks Open a new file without saving.
window. End of Exercise.
3. Review the Task List.

Pin the Timeliner window open.
Review the Task List and the Start and
End Date for each Task.

Chapter Summary
This chapter focused on the large layout Visualization tools that allow you to navigate thru a
Navisworks design. The chapter also presented the available tools used to analyze the Digital
Mockup of the factory layout.

Use the various Navigation tools available in Navisworks.
Establish Viewpoints and Animations
Use the Factory Layout and Item Tools to manipulate model geometry.
Use the Measuring tools to add dimensions to a Viewpoint.
Create user defined Cross Sections.
Review a Timeliner example.

Chapter
15
Interference / Collaboration
3D interferences are very common when you are bringing multiple models together for the first time.
These interferences must be discovered as quickly as possible to assure a quality design and reduce
construction problems. Navisworks enables the effective identification, inspection and reporting of
interferences from the digital model with a versatile set of Clash Detection tools.
The digital model of factory layouts, work cells and production lines can be inspected to detect potential
issues such as equipment collisions and space restrictions. Navisworks also works with laser scanned
point clouds. Large volumes of point clouds can be imported into the digital environment to compare
the as built laser scan with the 3D model data.
Large designs often require input from various sources. Communicating the design intent to these
sources is a crucial factor in the design process. Navisworks can publish the single digital model in high
compressed, lightweight NDW and 3D DWF format for Free viewing. This gives all stakeholders access to
the complete manufacturing plant or factory layout.
You can share your digital design with all the members of your design team. If members of your team
dont have Navisworks, they can download Navisworks Freedom from Autodesk.com. Navisworks
Freedom allows anyone to view the NWD files created by Navisworks. Navisworks Freedom can also
view Autodesk 3D Design Review files or 3D DWF.
Objectives
Use the selection tools to select model geometry.
Setup and run a Clash detection based on model geometry.
Setup and run a Clash Detection based on Point Clouds.
Add Redline markups to a viewpoint.
Collaborate with other team members utilizing the various export functions.
Chapter15: Interference / Collaboration 1

Lesson: Clash Detection
Clash Detection is an important feature for the initial review of a factory design. Interferences that
are discovered during the construction process can cause major cost overruns. Navisworks Manage,
delivers interference checking capability with the Clash Detection tools. Note: Clash Detection is only
available in the Navisworks Manage version of the application, or Autodesk Factory Design Suite
Advanced.
Objectives
Select geometry and create a selection set.

Set up and run a Clash Detection between model geometry.
Set up and run a Clash Detection between model geometry and a Point Cloud.
2 Chapter15: Interference / Collaboration

Clash Detection
Navisworks Clash Detective identifies, inspects, and reports interference clashes in a 3D project
model. Clash Detective can eliminate a tedious manual task, with the accompanying risk of human
error, to significantly reduce the expensive consequences of incomplete, inaccurate, and poorly
coordinated design information.
You can use Clash Detective for a quick sanity check for design work that an engineer has just
completed, or for an ongoing audit check of the project by the project coordinator.
Clash Detective can also conduct clash tests between traditional 3D geometry (triangles) and laser
geometry. Clash test reports can be produced for communicating to other people. Batches of clash
tests can be saved and exported to use in other projects.
By Linking Clash Detective and Object Animation together, you can check animated versus animated
or animated versus static object clashes. For example, linking a Clash Detective test to an existing
animation scene would automatically highlight clashes for both static and moving objects during the
animation (for example, a crane rotating through the top of a building or a delivery truck colliding
with a work group).
You can also link Clash Detective, TimeLiner, and Object Animation together for clash testing of fully
animated TimeLiner schedules. So, instead of visually inspecting a TimeLiner sequence to make sure,
for example, that the moving crane didn't collide with a work group, you can run a Clash Detective
test.
This lesson describes how to open the Clash Detective window within Navisworks. It also introduces
you to the Select tab for defining and running the clash test and Results tab for viewing
the results.
Conducting a Clash Test

The Clash Detective window enables you to set up rules and options for your clash tests, view the
results, sort them, and produce clash reports.

Procedure: To Conduct a Clash Test
1.
Select the Home tab and click Clash Detective in the Tools panel.
2. Select the Select tab in the Clash Detective window. There are two identical panes in this tab
called Left and Right. These panes represent the two sets of items that will be tested against
each other during the clash test.
TIP: The Left and Right panes in the Clash Detective window can be displayed in four view
formats to aid in selecting items for clash testing. To change formats, select the Standard,
Compact, Properties, or Sets tabs, as required. The Standard tab provides a full, expandable
listing of the layers. The Compact tab provides a top-level listing of the layers. The Properties
tab sub-divides the models according to its properties. If there are saved selection or search
sets available, a Sets tab is also available. (Scroll to the right if necessary.) Using the Sets tab
you can select from the lists to define the items to be tested.
3. Click the required geometry type in the Left and Right panes. Clash tests can conducted on
the following geometry types:
Surfaces Clashes item surfaces (default setting).
Lines Clashes items with center lines (e.g., pipes).
Points Clashes (laser) points. See Laser Scan Data Clashing for more information.
4. In each of the Right and Left panes, select the items that are to be compared against. To
select the items for the clash detection, use one of the following techniques:
Select the items directly in the Selection Tree. Consider using the Standard, Compact,
or Properties tabs to change the view formats when making selections.
In the Scene View, select an item or set of items to be clashed. If required, press and
hold CTRL to select multiple items.
In the Clash Detective window, click Select Current below the necessary panes to
assign the currently selected items in the Scene View to that pane.
Select the Sets tab associated with either the Left or Right panes and select from the
saved selection or search sets that already exist in the model.
NOTE: Items which have been hidden will not be included in a clash test.
Clash testing can be faster, more effective, and easily repeatable if you use
selection or search sets. Carefully consider which sets of objects will need clashing
against each other and create selection and search sets accordingly.
Creating batch clash tests is another way to speed up clash testing.

5. Clash Detective can clash test a selection against itself, in addition to clash testing against the
set in the other pane. Add a check mark to the Self Intersect box for the Left, Right, or both
panes, as necessary.
6. Define the Clash type in the Type pull-down menu. There are three types of clashes:
Hard Where two objects actually intersect.

Clearance Where two objects come within a specified distance of each other.
Duplicates Where two objects are identical, both in type and position.
You can use Duplicates testing to clash the entire model against itself by selecting the
whole model in both the Left and Right panes. Use this to detect any items in the
scene that may have been duplicated by mistake. For example, a multiple instanced
item may have been inserted in the same place twice or a reference file was loaded
twice (it was referenced by more than one file in the scene).
If you select Clearance, hard clashes are also detected. Any objects closer than the set
tolerance and any interference are obviously less than the set clearance, as shown in
the image above.
7. Define the Tolerance that should be used in the test in the Tolerance pull-down menu (for
1mm enter 0.001).
8. Click Start to begin the clash analysis.

NOTE: The progress bar that appears during a clash test shows how far through the test
Clash Detective has got. Press the Cancel button to stop the test at any time. All clashes
processed before test termination are reported and the test will be saved with a Partial
status.
TIP: Before running a clash test, it may be useful to go the Rules tab and select one or more
of the rule definitions. This filters out unnecessary clashes and makes the results more
meaningful. See Setting Clash Rules.
9. Details on the number of clashing instances are identified in the Found field on the Select tab.
Select the Results tab to review a detailed list of the clash test results.

Lesson: Selection Tree and Selecting Objects
During any Clash Detection, it is necessary to select the desired objects to test. Navisworks
provides access to all geometry in the Selection Tree. This section describes how to view items in
the Selection Tree structure of files opened in Navisworks. It also introduces you to the selection
options, and how to create sets of selected items.
View the Selection Tree

As a model is opened in Navisworks, the file name is added to the Selection Tree window.
To display the Selection Tree window if it is not visible, select the Home tab, and on the Select &
Search panel, enable Selection Tree .
As an alternative, you can control the Selection Trees display on the View tab by expanding the
Windows option, and enabling Selection Tree.
From here, the models hierarchical structure can be expanded, revealing the files, layers, and
objects used to build the model.
Navisworks uses this hierarchical structure to identify object specific paths (a unique path through
the model data from the root partition, the file name, to a particular object).
Selecting an Object
Selecting an object in the Selection Tree also highlights it in the Navisworks Scene View.
Selecting an object in the Navisworks Scene View using the Selection tool also highlights it
in the Selection Tree.
Use the ESC key to remove selection from an object in the scene and the
Selection Tree.

Selection Resolution (Level)
When an item in the scene is selected using the Selection tool, individual geometry or a group
of geometry may be selected depending on the setting of the Selection Resolution.
Procedure: To Change the Selection Resolution using the

Options Editor
1.
To change the setting of the selection resolution, click Application Menu > >
Interface > Selection > Resolution.
2. Select the required option, and then click OK.

NOTE: Any item in the Selection Tree can be selected regardless of the Selection Resolution
setting for the Selection tool.
Procedure: Change the Selection Resolution using the Ribbon

1. To change the setting of the selection resolution, expand the Select & Search panel on the
Home tab and select a resolution setting from the Selection Resolution pull-down menu.
2. Select the required option.

NOTE: Any item in the Selection Tree can be selected regardless of the Selection Resolution
setting for the Selection tool.

The available selection options are:
File Selects the appended portion of the selected model.
Layer Selects all objects within a layer.
First Object Selects the first object in the path that is not a layer.
Last Unique Selects the most specific object (furthest along the path) that is unique (not multiple
instanced).
Last Object Selects the most specific item (furthest along the Selection Tree path) that is marked as
a composite object. If no composite object is found, the geometry is selected.
Geometry Selects the last object in the path (most specific, may be multiple instanced).
Selection Sets
Selection sets can be used so that once a set of objects has been selected, they can be saved as a
selection set, then used again as needed. This process greatly enhances the Clash Detection
process.
Selection sets can be moved, reordered, or organized in folders if required.
Procedure: To Create and Organize Selection Sets
1. On the Home tab, in the Select & Search panel, expand the Sets pull-down and click Manage
Sets to open the Sets Window. As an alternative, select the View tab and on the Workspace
panel, expand the Windows option, and enable Sets.
2. To create a selection set, select the first item to be saved, then hold down CTRL, and select all
the other items to be saved.
TIP: Items can be selected on the scene, or in the Selection Tree. When selecting in the
Selection Tree, you can use SHIFT to select a range of consecutive items.
3. Right-click in the Sets window. Click Add Current Selection.

The selection is saved as Selection Set 1.
4. To save the selection set to an appropriate name, enter the new name and press ENTER. To
rename an existing selection set, right-click the selection set and click Rename.
5. To move a selection set to a different position, drag to the new position.
6. To sort the list of selection sets alphanumerically, right-click in the Selection Sets window,
and then click Sort.
7. To create a folder, right-click in the Selection Sets window, and then click New Folder.
8. To rename a folder, right-click the folder, and then click Rename. In the Folder name field,
enter a new name for the folder and press ENTER.
9. To move selection sets to a folder, select all sets to be moved, and drag to the folder.
10. To sort the list of folders (and sets) alphanumerically, right-click in the Selection Sets window,
then click Sort.

Exercise: Run a Clash
On the Select and Search panel, under
Detection on Geometry Select Same, click Select Same
Geometry.
In this exercise, you create a Clash
Detection analysis between the
Inspection line and the columns of the
factory out building.
All building columns are selected as

shown below.
1. Open NAV_009_Clash_Detection.nwf
On the Select and Search panel, expand
Sets and click Manage Sets.
Activate the Clash Detection Viewpoint.
Right Click in the Sets window and click
Add Current Selection.
2. Create a Selection Set of the building
columns.
On the Home ribbon, click the Select Tool.
Select one of the building columns as

shown.
Name the new Selection Set Columns
and press ENTER.
If necessary, click in the background to
deselect.

3. Set up the Clash Detection. 5. Explore the Interference.
On the Home ribbon click Clash Start the Walk tool and investigate
Detection. the interference between the safety
fence and the column.
6. Create a Viewpoint for future use.

Create a Viewpoint called Safety
Pin the Clash Detection window open. Fence Clash.
In the Clash Detection window, click
the Select Tab. Start a new file without saving.
In the left hand column, select End of Exercise.
NAV_001_Inspection Line.
At the bottom of the right hand
column, select the Sets tab
Note: you may have to scroll the tabs
to the left.
On the Sets tab, select Columns.
At the bottom of the Clash Detective

window, set the Clash Type to Hard.
Click Start to run the analysis.
4. View the Results.

In the Clash Detective window, click
the Results tab.

Lesson: Point Cloud Data Clashing
Increasingly, users are bringing laser scan data into Navisworks alongside traditional geometry
based models. Laser scan data usually comes into Navisworks as a point cloud. You can use Clash
Detective with these two types of data to check for interferences.
Running a Clash Test with Laser Scan Data

The value of being able to clash as-built point clouds with new-build designs is immense.
Traditional hard clash testing of surfaces involves looking for intersections of triangles (that the 3D
surfaces are made from). Similarly, when hard clashing points against lines with surfaces, there must be
an interaction in order for a clash to be recognized. This can be difficult with points (laser point cloud).
Even if the point is on the surface, it will not be registered as a clash, as it is not large enough to pass
through the surface.
For this reason, when clashing points and surfaces, a clearance type test is used to specify a tolerance
around each point. This better represents the point cloud and therefore will identify any clashes.
Procedure: To Run a Clash Test with Laser Scan Data

1. In the Clash Detective window, select the Select tab.
2. Define the files that are to be clash tested. In one pane, select the point cloud data file
and click Point to clash test the point cloud. Clear the other clash items. In the
second pane, select the surface model and click Surfaces to clash test the point
cloud data against surface data.
3. In the Run area, set Type to Clearance and assign the required Tolerance value.
4. Click Start to run the clash test.

Exercise: Run a Clash 3.

Set the Clash Detection.
Pin the Clash Detective window open.
Detection between On the Select tab, in the left hand
column, select Boiler Room.nwd
Geometry and a Point Cloud In the right hand column, select Pipe
Run 001.nwc.
In this exercise, you create a Clash
Detection analysis to see if a Point Cloud
of a Boiler system can be placed in the
corner of the factory out building.
Click the point option for each column.
Set the Clash Type to Clearance and

enter a tolerance of .0833.

Click Start.
1. Open NAV_010_Point_Cloud.nwd.
5. View the Results
Click the Results and investigate the
Activate the Point Cloud Viewpoint.
results.
2. Explore the Point Cloud.

A laser scan point cloud of an existing
facility has been overlaid on the factory
out building. Machinery from the existing
facility is being evaluated for installation in
the out building.
Using the walk command, explore the
Point Cloud overlay
Turn off the Third Person avatar and
navigate to the front of the out building
where a point cloud of a boiler has been
placed in the file. The desired point of
view is shown in the following image.
Open a new file without saving.

End of Exercise.

Lesson: Collaboration
Navisworks digital models can be shared with all members of your collaborative team. The highly
compressed NWD files provide an efficient way of communicating the entire model and design
intent to all stakeholders. 3D design intent and model data are more reliably and quickly
communicated, facilitating better team collaboration, and accelerating the design review cycle,
assuring delivery of projects on time and on budget.
Communication between team members is extremely important. When design problems occur,
stakeholders need a method to comment on the situation. The Navisworks Redline tools allow
designers to markup any pre-established Viewpoint with text, balloons, clouds, or geometry.
These markups can be exported in the NWF file format which is unique to each stakeholder. Then
the markups can be merged with other comments bringing the entire collaborative project into a
single document. The single standalone document is saved using the NWD file format. NWD files
are standalone and can be viewed by anyone using the Navisworks Freedom viewer available at
Autodesk.com.
Objectives
Use the Redline tools to markup a viewpoint.

Utilize the free viewer for Navisworks files, Navisworks Freedom.
Review the available Export options for team collaboration.

Lesson: Redline Tools
Redlining can be associated with saved viewpoints and clash detection result views.
1. On the Review tab in the Redline panel, select the Draw pull-down menu to access the
redline tools.
2. In the Redline panel, select settings for the line (Thickness and Color) before using the
tools.
Text Adds text in the viewpoint. Click the location where the text is to be
placed. Enter text in the Text window, then click OK to add to the
viewpoint.
Ellipse Creates an ellipse. Drag over the viewpoint and then release the
mouse.
Cloud Creates a cloud. Click in the viewpoint for each of the cloud base
points. Select the start point to close the cloud.
Freehand Creates freehand redlines. Drag in the viewpoint, then release the
mouse.
Line Creates a single segment linear redline between a start and end
points. Click in the viewpoint at the start and end points of the
desired lines.
Line String Creates linear strings of lines. Click in the viewpoint at the start,
intermediate, and end points of the desired lines.
Erase Erases redlines. Drag over the redline to be deleted, then release the
mouse. The entire redline must be enclosed in the box for the erase
function to be applied.

Redline Tags
Redline Tags combine the features of redlining, viewpoints, and comments into a single, easy-to-use review tool.
This allows you to tag anything you want to identify in the model scene. A viewpoint will be created and you can
add a comment and status to the tag. For example, during a review session, you may observe an item in the scene
that is incorrectly sized or positioned. You can then tag this item, identifying the problem. If a tag is added the
Add Comment dialog box is displayed, and you can add a comment.
Procedure: To Add a Redline Tag

1.
On the Review tab in the Tags panel, click Add Tag . Click the object where the tag is to
point to, then click where the tag label is to be located.
The tag is added.
2. In the Add Comments dialog box, enter the text for the tag, and then select a Status option.
3. Click OK to save the comment.

A tag viewpoint is created (you can rename it).
NOTE: Additional Redline Tags can be added to anywhere on the model. Each tag is numbered
in the sequence that it was added.
Reviewing Redline Tags

There are a variety of methods for finding Redline Tags including the following:
On the Review tab in the Comments panel, click Find Comments . Use the Find Comments dialog box
to do the following:
o Click the Comments tab to search for comments that are associated with tags. Search for a specific
tag, text, author, ID, or status.
o Click the Date Modified tab to search for comments within a date criteria.
o Click Source tab to search for comments created in certain sources.
o Click Find to search the model. Tip: Leave the search fields blank to search for all comments and tags.
If viewpoints have been created for each tag, browse the Viewpoints window for the required tag ID.
Select the tag in the Saved Viewpoints window and review the comment in the Comments window.
To navigate directly to a tag when you know its Tag number, select the Review tab and in the Tags panel,
enter the tag number or select a number from the pull-down menu and click .
To renumber tags, select the Review tab, expand the Tags pane and click Renumber Tag IDs.

Exercise: Redline a
Viewpoint
In this exercise, you document the
clash between the safety fence and
the support column by adding
Redline markups to a viewpoint.
Right Click and select Override Item >

Override Color.
Set the color to Red and click OK.

1. Open NAV_011_Redline.nwf.
Activate the ISO All Viewpoint.
If necessary, click in the background
to deselect.
Activate the Safety Fence Clash
Viewpoint.
2. Change the color of the clashing

components by adding a color override. On the Home ribbon, click the Select
On the Home ribbon, set the Selection None tool to clear the selection.
Resolution to Geometry.
Activate the Select tool and select the

safety fence and the support column.
Note: Hold the CTRL button down to
select both components.

7. Add the Redline Markups to the 5. Export the Viewpoint to share with
Viewpoint. other team members.
Click the Review tab. Right Click the Safety Fence Clash
On the Redline panel, click the Text Viewport and select Edit from the
Tool. menu.
In the Edit Viewpoint dialog, place a
check mark in the Override Material
option.
Click a spot below the interference Click the Output tab.

and enter the text shown in the On the Export Data panel, click the
following image. Viewpoints tool.
In the Export dialog, use the default

name and save the .XML file in the
Click OK. Training Files directory.
Click OK.
Start a new file without saving.
8. Add a Redline Cloud.
Use the Cloud tool and click multiple
points in a clockwise motion around 6. Open NAV_011A_Factory.nwf.
the interfering components as shown Click in the background to deselect.
in the following image. Notice that there are now Viewpoint
Note: Right Click finish the Cloud. in this file.
On the Application Menu, Click
Import > Viewport XML.
In the Import dialog, select

NAV_011_Redline.
Click OK.
All Viewpoints from the previous file
are not available in this file. Activate
the Safety Fence Clash Viewpoint.
Start a new file without saving.
End of Exercise.

Lesson: Export Data
Collaborating with team members can often require sharing data in various forms. Each team member
could be working with different CAD software or require the data in another format. Navisworks can export
design data collected from the complete design in a number of different formats. This section will outline
the various export capabilities located on the Output ribbon.
1. Print When the print option is selected, Autodesk Navisworks prints

the current viewpoint scaled to fit and centered on the page.
Before you print out a copy of the model you are working on,
you may wish to see how it will appear.
This option enables you to the set up paper size and

orientation options.
2. Send by Launched your Email application and attaches the file.

Email
3. Publish Publishes the complete Navisworks file as a standalone document.

NWD This format can be viewed in the Navisworks Freedom viewer
available, for free, at Autodesk.com
4. Export 3D DWF files can be exported from Autodesk Navisworks. The file
Scene exporter creates a DWF file containing:
All geometry
All materials
Per-vertex colors
Properties (where available)
Note: 3D DWF files can be viewed in the Navisworks Freedom

viewer available, for free, at Autodesk.com
FBX files can be exported from Autodesk Navisworks. The exporter
creates an FBX file with the extension .fbx and supports the export
of:
Triangles
Lines
Materials (color, flat transparency, and wrapped
image texture only)
Viewpoints
Lights
Model Hierarchy

Google Earth KML files can be exported from Autodesk Navisworks.
The exporter creates a compressed KML file with the extension
.kmz and supports the export of:
Triangles
Lines
Materials (color and flat transparency only)
Viewpoints (adjustments may occur due to Google Earth
limitations)
Model Hierarchy
Hyperlinks (currently only URLs work correctly in Google
Earth)
5. Visuals To export an image as a bitmap, PNG, or JPEG file
1. Display the view you want to export in the Scene View,

and click Output tab > Visuals panel > Image.
2. In the Image Export dialog box, select the Format of the
image you want to export.
3. Use the Size and Options area to set the image size. See
Image Export Dialog Box.
For PNG files, click the Options button, and use the PNG
Options dialog box to specify the Interlacing and
Compression settings.
For JPEG files, click the Options button, and use the JPEG
Options dialog box to specify the Compression and
Smoothing settings.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Save As dialog box, enter a new filename and
location, if you want to change from those suggested.
6. Click Save.
Scenes rendered in Presenter can be exported out as images, so

they can be used in presentations, on websites, in print, and so on.
For more information,
To export an animation to an AVI file, or a sequence of image files
1. Click Output tab > Visuals panel > Animation.

2. To export the currently selected viewpoint animation,
select Current Animation in the Source box.
To export the currently selected object

animation, select Current Animator Scene in the
Source box.
To export a TimeLiner sequence, select TimeLiner
Simulation in the Source box.
3. Set up the rest of the boxes in the Animation Export dialog

box, and click OK. For more information, see Animation
Export Dialog Box.
4. In the Save As dialog box, enter a new filename and
location, if you want to change from those suggested.
5. Click Save.
6. Export Clash tests can be exported from the Clash Detective tool for use
Data by other Autodesk Navisworks users.
You can export CSV data from TimeLiner. The columns exported,
and their order, will be precisely as in the TimeLiner Task View.
Note: When exporting a CSV from TimeLiner, the hierarchy of tasks

is not represented. All available tasks are exported without any
hierarchical structure. This means that collapsing/expanding task
nodes in the TimeLiner grid does not affect whether or not tasks
are output to CSV.
The search criteria specified in the Find Items window can be

exported to an XML file. This can then be imported into other
Autodesk Navisworks sessions. For example, if you have specified a
complicated search criteria, containing various logic statements,
that relates to all projects you work on, then this feature allows
you to specify it once and use it on all projects.
Saved search sets can be exported from Autodesk Navisworks as an

XML file. These can then be imported into other Autodesk
Navisworks sessions and re-used. For example, if you have a
number of generic searches that you perform on all of your
projects, this feature allows you to specify the searches once and
use them on all projects.
Viewpoints can be exported from Autodesk Navisworks to an XML

file. These viewpoints contain all associated data, including camera
positions, sections, hidden items and material overrides, redlines,
comments, tags and collision detection settings.
Once the viewpoint data is exported to this text-based file format,

it can either be imported into other Autodesk Navisworks sessions,
or it can be accessed and used in other applications. For example,
you may want to set up the same viewpoints in your CAD
application.
An HTML file can be exported containing a JPEG of all of the saved

viewpoints and associated data, including camera position and
comments.
Note: To customize the appearance or layout of the HTML file, you

will need to edit the viewpoints_report.xsl file. The installed file is
located in the style sheets subdirectory of the Autodesk
Navisworks install directory. You can copy the edited file to the
style sheets subdirectory of any of the Autodesk Navisworks search
directories.

Exercise: Export an AVI file. 3.

Export the Video File.
Click the Output Tab.
In this exercise, you generate an video On the Visuals Panel, click the Animation
(.avi) file of a fly through animation. tool.
In the Animation Export dialog, set all

options as shown in the following image.
1. Open NAV_012_Export_AVI.nwf.
Activate the Fly Thru Viewpoint.
Note: A preset fly thru animation has
already been created for this exercise.
2. Review the Fly Thru Animation.

In the Saved Viewpoint window, select
Click OK.
the Fly Thru Animation.
Specify the save location as the Training
Click the Animation tab.
Files directory and click Save.
Confirm that the Fly Thru animation is
displayed in the Playback panel and click
the Play button. 4. Play the video file.
In Windows Explorer, navigate to file
location specified in the previous step.
Open and review the video file.
Note: for the sake of time the video
length was set to 10 seconds. Longer
time spans and greater anti-aliasing
values will result in longer rendering time.
End of Exercise.

Chapter Summary
This chapter presented essential tools used to analyze design interferences between multiple CAD
models. The chapter also demonstrated how to share your findings by adding Redline information
to Viewpoints and exporting the Viewpoints for other team members to review. Finally, the
process of exporting design data from Navisworks was also covered.

Use the selection tools to select model geometry.
Setup and run a Clash detection based on model geometry.
Setup and run a Clash Detection based on Point Clouds.
Add Redline markups to a viewpoint.
Collaborate with other team members utilizing the various export functions.

Autodesk Factory Design Suite Learning Essentials

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Autodesk Factory Design Suite Learning Essentials

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Autodesk Factory Design Suite Learning Essentials

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter

Autodesk Factory Design Suite

Chapter1: Autodesk Factory Design Suite 1

2 Chapter1: Autodesk Factory Design Suite

Autodesk Inventor Enhanced with the Factory Design Utilities

Chapter1: Autodesk Factory Design Suite 3

4 Chapter1: Autodesk Factory Design Suite

Chapter1: Autodesk Factory Design Suite 5

6 Chapter1: Autodesk Factory Design Suite

C:/Autodesk Learning / Autodesk Factory Design Suite /

Chapter1: Autodesk Factory Design Suite 7

Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics 1

Designing with Objects

Understanding AutoCAD Architecture Terms

2 Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics

Working in the Product

Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics 3

To minimize the ribbon

Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon.

Ribbon Tabs and Panels

4 Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics

Contextual Ribbon Tabs

Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics 5

You can perform the following actions on the application menu:

On the application menu to

6 Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics

Quick Access Toolbar Item Description

reverses the effects of the

Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics 7

8 Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics

Controlling the Appearance of Palettes

title bar of the palette, click (Auto-hide). To temporarily redisplay a hidden

To disable auto-hide, click (Auto-hide) again.

Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics 9

If the Properties palette is not displayed when you

Drawing Window Status Bar

Command Line Window

10 Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics

A style is a set of parameters that determines the appearance or function of an object in

Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics 11

12 Chapter2: AutoCAD Architecture Basics

Creating the Shell

Chapter3: Creating the Shell 1

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

Create the shell walls from linework in a drawing.

2 Chapter3: Creating the Shell

The completed exercise

2. Convert the exterior linework to walls

The walls are now right justified and

Press ENTER twice to retain linework in the

Chapter3: Creating the Shell 3

The wall displays the multiple layers

7. Adjust the wall height.

4 Chapter3: Creating the Shell

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

Create a default building grid for the factory layout.

Chapter3: Creating the Shell 5

Press Enter twice.

The completed exercise

2. Create a Structural Grid. 4. Resize the grid.